l200 - english - ocre10e1 - מיצובישי mitsubishi

L2

00OWNER’S MANUAL

L200 - ENGLISH - OCRE10E1

L200 - ENGLISH - OCRE10E1

ForewordE09200102896

Thank you for selecting a MITSUBISHI L200 as your new vehicle.This owner’s manual will add to your understanding and full enjoyment ofthe many fine features of this vehicle.It contains information prepared to acquaint you with the proper way to oper-ate and maintain your vehicle for the utmost in driving pleasure. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to make changes indesign and specifications and/or to make additions to or improvements inthis product without obligation to install them on products previously manu-factured.It is an absolute requirement for the driver to strictly observe all laws and reg-ulations concerning vehicles. This owner’s manual has been written in compliance with such laws and reg-ulations, but some of the contents may become contradictory with later amend-ment of the laws and regulations.Please leave this owner’s manual in this vehicle at time of resale. The nextowner will appreciate having access to the information contained in this own-er’s manual. Repairs to your vehicle:Vehicles in the warranty period:All warranty repairs must be carried out by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point. Vehicles outside the warranty period:Where the vehicle is repaired is at the discretion of the owner.

Throughout this owner’s manual the words WARNING and CAUTION ap-pear.These serve as reminders to be especially careful. Failure to follow instruc-tions could result in personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

WARNINGindicates a strong possibility of severe personal injury or death if in-structions are not followed.

CAUTIONmeans hazards or unsafe practices that could cause minor personal in-jury or damage to your vehicle.You will see another important symbol:

NOTE: gives helpful information.*: indicates optional equipment.

It may differ according to the sales classification; referto the sales catalogue.

Abbreviations used in this owner’s manual:LHD: Left-Hand DriveRHD: Right-Hand DriveM/T: Manual TransmissionA/T: Automatic Transmission

Information for station serviceE09300102174

Fuel

Fuel tank capacity 75 litres

Fuel requirementsCetane number (EN590)

51 or higherRefer to the “General information” section for the fuel selection.

Engine oil Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the selection of engine oil.Tyre inflation pressure Refer to the “Maintenance” section for the tyre inflation pressure.

© 2009 Mitsubishi Motors Corporation

10OCRE10E1BLC09.001470

Table of contentsOverview

General information

Locking and unlocking 1

Seat and seat belts 2

Instruments and controls 3

Starting and driving 4

For pleasant driving 5

For emergencies 6

Vehicle care 7

Maintenance 8

Specifications 9

Instruments and Controls (Driver’s area)E00100104564

LHD

1

2

3 4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 3-30Turn-signals lever p. 3-33Front fog lamp switch* p. 3-35Rear fog lamp switch p. 3-35Headlamp washer switch* p. 3-40

2. Audio remote control switches* p. 5-293. Instruments p. 3-024. Wiper and washer switch p. 3-365. Cruise control switches* p. 4-486. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver’s

seat) p. 2-27Horn switch p. 3-41

7. Ignition switch p. 4-108. Steering wheel height adjustment p. 4-079. Fuel tank filler door release lever* p. 02

10. Bonnet release lever p. 8-0311. Fuses p. 8-1912. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 2* p. 4-4513. Headlamp levelling switch p. 3-3214. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 1* p. 4-45

Rear differential lock switch* p. 4-3315. Outside rear-view mirrors switch* p. 4-08

Overview

LHD

RHD

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for driver’sseat) p. 2-27Horn switch p. 3-41

2. Audio remote control switches* p. 5-293. Combination headlamps and dipper switch p. 3-30

Turn-signals lever p. 3-33Front fog lamp switch* p. 3-35Rear fog lamp switch p. 3-35Headlamp washer switch* p. 3-40

4. Cruise control switches* p. 4-485. Instruments p. 3-026. Wiper and washer switch p. 3-367. Ignition switch p. 4-108. Outside rear-view mirrors switch* p. 4-089. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 1* p. 4-45

Rear differential lock switch* p. 4-3310. Headlamp levelling switch p. 3-3211. Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch Type 2* p. 4-4512. Fuses p. 8-1913. Bonnet release lever p. 8-0314. Fuel tank filler door release lever* p. 0215. Steering wheel height adjustment p. 4-07

Overview

Instruments and Controls (Single cab)E00100104577

1

2

3 4 5

6

7

8

910111213

14

15

LHD

1. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-342. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 5-043. Rear window demister switch p. 3-404. Utility box p. 5-445. Ventilators p. 5-026. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passen-

ger’s seat) p. 2-277. Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp p. 2-318. Glove box p. 5-43

Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 2-309. Cigarette lighter p. 5-38

10. Gearshift lever p. 4-1311. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 4-1912. Cup holder* p. 5-4513. Parking brake lever Type 1* p. 4-0514. Parking brake lever Type 2* p. 4-0515. Ashtray p. 5-37

Overview

1

23

4 5

6

7

8

9101112

13

14

15

RHD

1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passen-ger’s seat) p. 2-27

2. Ventilators p. 5-023. Utility box p. 5-444. Rear window demister switch p. 3-405. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 5-046. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-347. Cigarette lighter p. 5-388. Parking brake lever Type 2* p. 4-059. Parking brake lever Type 1* p. 4-05

10. Cup holder* p. 5-4511. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 4-1912. Gearshift lever p. 4-1313. Ashtray p. 5-3714. Glove box p. 5-43

Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 2-3015. Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp p. 2-31

Overview

Instruments and Controls (Club, Double cab)E00100104580

LHD

1

23 4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

1213

14

15

16

17

18

19

1. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-342. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 5-04

Automatic air conditioning* p. 5-083. Rear window demister switch (vehicle with heater/manual air con-

ditioning) p. 3-404. Utility box* p. 5-44

Centre information display* p. 3-10MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System*Refer to the separate “MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-tem owner’s manual”

5. Ventilators p. 5-026. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passen-

ger’s seat) p. 2-277. Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp p. 2-318. Glove box p. 5-43

Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 2-309. Ashtray (fixed position)* p. 5-37

10. Cigarette lighter p. 5-3811. Rear retractable power window switch* p. 1-0912. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 4-24, 4-2813. Parking brake lever p. 4-0514. Cup holder p. 5-4515. Ashtray (moveable)* p. 5-3716. Front console box* p. 5-4317. Heated seat switch* p. 2-0618. Gearshift lever* p. 4-13

Selector lever* p. 4-15, 4-1919. Audio* p. 5-14

Overview

RHD

1

2

34 5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

1. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag (for front passen-ger’s seat) p. 2-27

2. Ventilators p. 5-023. Utility box* p. 5-44

Centre information display* p. 3-10MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication System*Refer to the separate “MITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-tem owner’s manual”

4. Rear window demister switch (vehicle with heater/manual air con-ditioning) p. 3-40

5. Heater/Manual air conditioning* p. 5-04Automatic air conditioning* p. 5-08

6. Hazard warning flasher switch p. 3-347. Audio* p. 5-148. Transfer shift lever (4WD only) p. 4-24, 4-289. Heated seat switch* p. 2-06

10. Parking brake lever p. 4-0511. Cup holder p. 5-4512. Ashtray (moveable)* p. 5-3713. Gearshift lever* p. 4-13

Selector lever* p. 4-15, 4-1914. Front console box* p. 5-4315. Cigarette lighter p. 5-3816. Rear retractable power window switch* p. 1-0917. Glove box p. 5-43

Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch p. 2-3018. Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp p. 2-31

Overview

Interior (Single cab)E00100203278

LHD

1

2

34

5

6

7

8

91011

12

13

14

15

1. Lock switch* p. 1-092. Electric window control switch* p. 1-093. Room lamp p. 5-40, 8-23, 8-314. Digital clock p. 5-405. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-086. Sun visors p. 5-367. Bottle holder p. 5-468. Front seats p. 2-039. Jack p. 6-07

10. Tools*1 p. 6-0711. Accessory socket* p. 5-3912. Floor console box* p. 5-4313. Jack handle p. 6-0714. Head restraints p. 2-0815. Seat belts p. 2-09

NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

Overview

RHD

1

2

34

5

6

7

8

9

10

1112

13

14

15

1. Digital clock p. 5-402. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-083. Room lamp p. 5-40, 8-23, 8-314. Lock switch* p. 1-095. Electric window control switch* p. 1-096. Seat belts p. 2-097. Head restraints p. 2-088. Tools*1 p. 6-079. Jack p. 6-07

10. Accessory socket* p. 5-3911. Floor console box* p. 5-4312. Jack handle p. 6-0713. Front seats p. 2-0314. Bottle holder p. 5-4615. Sun visors p. 5-36

NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

Overview

Interior (Club cab)E00100203281

LHD

1

2

34 5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

1314

15

16

17

18

19

1. Lock switch* p. 1-092. Electric window control switch* p. 1-093. Room lamp (rear) p. 5-40, 8-23, 8-314. Personal lamps* p. 5-41, 8-23, 8-315. Sunglasses holder* p. 5-446. Room lamp (front)* p. 5-40, 8-23, 8-317. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-088. Digital clock* p. 5-409. Sun visors p. 5-36

Sun visors p. 5-36Vanity mirror p. 5-37

10. Bottle holder p. 5-4611. Front seats p. 2-03

Seat under tray* p. 5-4512. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front

seat)* p. 2-3513. Secret box p. 5-4414. Rear seat p. 2-0715. Floor console box p. 5-43

Accessory socket p. 5-39Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)* p. 5-28Auxiliary Video connector (RCA)* p. 5-28

16. Jack p. 6-07Jack handle p. 6-07Tools p. 6-07

17. Head restraints p. 2-0818. Coat hook* p. 5-4719. Seat belts p. 2-09

Adjustable seat belt anchor p. 2-11

Overview

RHD

1 2

3

4

67

8

9

10

11

12

13

1415

16

17

18

19

5

1. Personal lamps* p. 5-41, 8-23, 8-312. Sunglasses holder* p. 5-443. Room lamp (front)* p. 5-40, 8-23, 8-314. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-085. Digital clock* p. 5-406. Room lamp (rear) p. 5-40, 8-23, 8-317. Lock switch* p. 1-098. Electric window control switch* p. 1-099. Seat belts p. 2-09

Adjustable seat belt anchor p. 2-1110. Coat hook* p. 5-4711. Head restraints p. 2-0812. Secret box p. 5-4413. Floor console box p. 5-43


14. Rear seat p. 2-0715. Jack p. 6-07

Jack handle p. 6-07Tools p. 6-07

16. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for frontseat)* p. 2-35

17. Front seats p. 2-03Seat under tray* p. 5-45

18. Bottle holder p. 5-4619. Sun visors p. 5-36

Sun visors p. 5-36Vanity mirror p. 5-37

Overview

Interior - front area (Double cab)E00100203294

LHD

1

2

3 4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

1. Lock switch* p. 1-092. Electric window control switch* p. 1-093. Sunroof switch* p. 1-124. Sunglasses holder* p. 5-445. Personal lamps p. 5-41, 8-23, 8-316. Digital clock* p. 5-407. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-088. Room lamp (front) p. 5-40, 8-23, 8-319. Sun visors p. 5-36

Card holder p. 5-36Vanity mirror p. 5-37

10. Front seats p. 2-03Seat under tray* p. 5-45

11. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for frontseat)* p. 2-35

12. Bottle holder p. 5-4613. Floor console box p. 5-43


14. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbag* p. 2-3515. Coat hook p. 5-4716. Seat belts p. 2-09

Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats) p. 2-11

Overview

RHD

1 7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

2

3

4

5

6

1. Sunroof switch* p. 1-122. Sunglasses holder* p. 5-443. Personal lamps p. 5-41, 8-23, 8-314. Digital clock* p. 5-405. Inside rear-view mirror p. 4-086. Room lamp (front) p. 5-40, 8-23, 8-317. Lock switch* p. 1-098. Electric window control switch* p. 1-099. Seat belts p. 2-09

Adjustable seat belt anchor (front seats) p. 2-1110. Coat hook p. 5-4711. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - curtain airbag* p. 2-3512. Floor console box p. 5-43


13. Bottle holder p. 5-4614. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - side airbag (for front

seat)* p. 2-3515. Front seats p. 2-03

Seat under tray* p. 5-4516. Sun visors p. 5-36

Card holder p. 5-36Vanity mirror p. 5-37

Overview

Interior - rear area (Double cab)E00100201144

LHD

1

2

3

4

5

6

78

9

10

1. Head restraints p. 2-082. Bottle holder p. 5-463. Room lamp (rear)* p. 5-40, 8-23, 8-314. Cup holder p. 5-465. Armrest (for rear seat) p. 2-076. Rear seats p. 2-077. Tools*1 p. 6-078. Jack p. 6-079. Jack handle*1 p. 6-07

10. Seat belts (for rear seats) p. 2-09 NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

Overview

RHD

1

2

3

4

5

6

78

9

10

1. Room lamp (rear)* p. 5-40, 8-23, 8-312. Bottle holder p. 5-463. Head restraints p. 2-084. Seat belts (for rear seats) p. 2-095. Jack handle*1 p. 6-076. Tools*1 p. 6-077. Jack p. 6-078. Rear seats p. 2-079. Armrest (for rear seat) p. 2-07

10. Cup holder p. 5-46 NOTE:*1- Tools differ according to the vehicle model.

Overview

Exterior - front (Single cab)E00100503952

12

3

4

5

6

78

9

10

1. Wiper and washers p. 3-362. Antenna p. 5-353. Outside rear-view mirrors p. 4-084. Fuel tank filler door p. 025. Locking and unlocking p. 1-026. Side turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-22, 8-277. Front turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-22, 8-268. Headlamps p. 3-30, 8-22, 3-31

Position lamps p. 3-30, 8-22, 8-269. Headlamp washers* p. 3-40

10. Engine compartment p. 9-21Bonnet p. 8-03

Overview

Exterior - rear (Single cab)E00100503112

1

2

3

4

56

7

8

9

1. Rear turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-22, 8-292. Stop and tail lamps p. 3-30, 8-22, 8-293. Reversing lamps p. 8-22, 8-294. Tyre inflation pressures p. 8-11

Changing tyres p. 6-17Tyre rotation p. 8-12Tyre chains p. 8-13

5. Spare wheel p. 6-166. Licence plate lamps p. 3-30, 8-22, 8-307. Rear fog lamp (Driver’s side only) p. 3-35, 8-22, 8-288. Rear gate p. 1-119. High-mounted stop lamp p. 8-22, 8-30

Overview

Exterior - front (Club cab)E00100503965

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

89

10

11

12

1. Wiper and washers p. 3-362. Rain sensor* p. 3-373. Antenna p. 5-354. Outside rear-view mirrors p. 4-085. Fuel tank filler door p. 026. Locking and unlocking p. 1-02

Keyless entry system* p. 1-047. Side turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-22, 8-278. Front turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-22, 8-269. Headlamps p. 3-30, 8-23, 8-24

Position lamps p. 3-30, 8-23, 8-2410. Front fog lamps* p. 3-35, 8-22, 8-2711. Headlamp washers* p. 3-4012. Engine compartment p. 9-21

Bonnet p. 8-03

Overview

Exterior - rear (Club cab)E00100503978

1

2

3

4

56

7

8

9

10



5. Spare wheel p. 6-166. Licence plate lamps p. 3-30, 8-22, 8-307. Rear fog lamp (Driver’s side only) Type 2* p. 3-35, 8-22, 8-288. Rear fog lamp (Driver’s side only) Type 1* p. 3-35, 8-22, 8-289. Rear gate p. 1-11

10. High-mounted stop lamp p. 8-22, 8-30

Overview

Exterior - front (Double cab)E00100503981

1

2

34

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

13

14

12

1. Wiper and washers p. 3-362. Rain sensor* p. 3-373. Antenna* p. 5-354. Sunroof* p. 1-125. Antenna* p. 5-356. Outside rear-view mirrors p. 4-087. Fuel tank filler door p. 028. Locking and unlocking p. 1-02

Keyless entry system* p. 1-049. Side turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-22, 8-27

10. Front turn-signal lamps p. 3-33, 8-22, 8-2611. Headlamps p. 3-30, 8-23, 8-24

Position lamps p. 3-30, 8-23, 8-2412. Front fog lamps* p. 3-35, 8-22, 8-2713. Headlamp washers* p. 3-4014. Engine compartment p. 9-21

Bonnet p. 8-03

Overview

Exterior - rear (Double cab)E00100503138

1

2

3

4

56

7

8

9

10



5. Spare wheel p. 6-166. Licence plate lamps p. 3-30, 8-22, 8-307. Rear fog lamp (Driver’s side only) Type 2* p. 3-35, 8-22, 8-288. Rear fog lamp (Driver’s side only) Type 1* p. 3-35, 8-22, 8-289. Rear gate p. 1-11

10. High-mounted stop lamp p. 8-22, 8-30

Overview

Fuel selection...................................................................................02Filling the fuel tank..........................................................................02Installation of accessories................................................................04Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel systems................04Genuine parts...................................................................................05Used engine oils safety instructions and disposal infor-

mation..........................................................................................05Disposal information for used batteries...........................................05

General information

Fuel selectionE00200102141

Recommended fuel Cetane number (EN590)51 or higher

CAUTIONl Your vehicle is designed to use only diesel

fuel that meets the EN 590 standard.Use of any other type of diesel fuel wouldadversely affect the engine’s performanceand durability.

NOTEl Due to the separation of paraffin, the fluidity

of the fuel decreases considerably as the tem-perature falls.Because of this fact there are two kinds offuel: “summer” and “winter”.This must be considered in winter use.Select either of the two kinds of fuel in ac-cordance with ambient temperature.

Above -5 °C: “Summer” dieselBelow -5 °C: “Winter” diesel

When travelling abroad, find out in advanceabout the fuels served in local service stations.

l Poor-quality diesel fuel can cause deposits toform in the injector, resulting in black smokeand rough idling.If these problems occur, you are advised toadd a cleaning additive to the diesel fuelwhen you refuel the vehicle.The additive will break up and remove the de-posits, thereby returning the engine to a nor-mal condition.Be sure to use a genuine MITSUBISHI DIE-SEL FUEL SYSTEM CLEANER. Using anunsuitable additive could make the enginemalfunction. For details, please contact yourMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

Filling the fuel tankE00200201262

WARNINGl When handling fuel, comply with the safe-

ty regulations displayed by garages andfilling stations.

l Before removing the fuel cap, be sure toget rid of your body’s static electricity bytouching a metal part of the car or thefuel pump. Any static electricity on yourbody could create a spark that ignitesfuel vapour.

l Perform the whole refueling process(opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself. Do notlet any other person come near the fueltank filler. If you allowed a person tohelp you and that person was carryingstatic electricity, fuel vapour could be ig-nited.

l Do not move away from the fuel tank fill-er until refueling is finished. If youmoved away and did something else (forexample, cleaning your windscreen) part-way through the refueling process, youcould pick up a fresh charge of static elec-tricity.

l If the tank cap must be replaced, use onlya MITSUBISHI MOTORS original part.

Fuel tank capacity75 litres

Refueling1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.

General information

02

2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear leftside of your vehicle. Type 1Open the fuel tank filler door with the re-lease lever located below the instrument panel.

LHD

RHD

3. Open the fuel tank filler tube by slowly turn-ing the cap anticlockwise.

A- RemoveB- Close

Type 2Slide the cover (1). Insert the key in the cap(2) and unlock it.Turn the cap and remove it.

CAUTIONl Since the fuel system may be under pres-

sure, remove the fuel tank filler tube capslowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-uum that might have built up in the fueltank. If you hear a hissing sound, wait un-til it stops before removing the cap. Oth-erwise, fuel may spray out, injuring youor others.

4. Insert the gun in the tank port as far as itgoes. Do not tilt the gun.

5. When the gun stops automatically, do not fillwith fuel any more.

6. To close, turn the fuel tank filler tube capslowly clockwise until you hear clickingsounds, then gently push the fuel tank fillerdoor closed.

General information

03

Installation of accessoriesE00200300875

We recommend you to consult your MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.l The installation of accessories, optional

parts, should only be carried out within thelimits prescribed by law in your country, andin accordance with the guidelines fitting in-structions and warnings contained within thedocuments accompanying the parts or acces-sories.

l Improper installation of electrical compo-nents may cause an electrical fire if incorrect-ly fitted. Please refer to the Modification/al-teration to the electrical or fuel systems sec-tion within this owner’s manual.

l Using a cellular phone or radio set inside thevehicle without an external antenna maycause electrical system interference, whichcould lead to unsafe vehicle operation.

l Tyres and wheels which do not meet specifi-cations must not be used.Refer to the “Specifications” section for in-formation regarding wheel and tyre sizes.

l When fitting accessories, ensure that maxi-mum gross vehicle weight and maximumaxle weight are not exceeded.

Important points!Due to large number of accessory and replacementparts of different manufactures available in the mar-ket, it is not possible, not only for MITSUBISHIMOTORS, but also for a MITSUBISHI MOTORSAuthorized Service Point, to check whether the at-tachment or installation of such parts affects theoverall safety of your MITSUBISHI-vehicle.

Even when such parts are officially authorized, forexample by a “general operators permit” (an ap-praisal for the part) or through the execution of thepart in an officially approved manner of construc-tion, or when a single operation permit followingthe attachment or installation of such parts, it can-not be deduced from that alone, that the driving safe-ty of your vehicle has not been affected. Consider also that there basically exists no liabilityon the part of the appraiser or the official. Only inthe case of parts (MITSUBISHI MOTORS originalreplacement or exchange parts as well asMITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine accessories) thatare recommended and released by a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point and that are at-tached or installed by a MITSUBISHI MOTORSAuthorized Service Point can you assume, that op-timal safety has been provided. The same also per-tains to modifications of MITSUBISHI vehiclewith respect to the production specifications. Foryour own safety, in such cases, you should only un-dertake modifications according to the recommen-dations of a MITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.

Modification/alterations to theelectrical or fuel systems

E00200400238

MITSUBISHI MOTORS has always manufacturedsafe, high quality vehicles. In order to maintain thissafety and quality, it is important that any accesso-ry that is to be fitted, or any modifications carriedout which involve the electrical or fuel systems,should be carried out in accordance withMITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.

CAUTIONl If the wiring interferes with any part of

the vehicle bodywork or improper instal-lation methods are used, i.e. protectivefuses not installed, etc.), electronic devi-ces may be adversely affected, possibly re-sulting in an electrical fire or other fail-ures that may cause an accident.

General information

04

Genuine partsE00200500545

MITSUBISHI MOTORS has gone to great lengthsto bring you a superbly crafted automobile offeringthe highest quality and dependability.Use MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts, de-signed and manufactured to maintain yourMITSUBISHI MOTORS automobile at top per-formance. MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Partsare identified by this mark and are available at allMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoints.

Used engine oils safetyinstructions and disposal

informationE00200600025

WARNINGl Prolonged and repeated contact may

cause serious skin disorders, includingdermatitis and cancer.

l Avoid contact with the skin as far as pos-sible and wash thoroughly after any con-tact.

l Keep used engine oils out of reach of chil-dren.

Protect the environmentIt is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil.Use authorized waste collection facilities, includ-ing civic amenity sites and garages providing facili-ties for disposal of used oil and used oil filters. If indoubt, contact your local authority for advice on dis-posal.

Disposal information for usedbatteries

E00201300029

Your vehicle contains batteriesand/or accumulators.Do not mix with general house-hold waste.For proper treatment, recoveryand recycling of used batteries,please take them to applicable col-lection points, in accordancewith your national legislationand the Directives 2006/66/EC.By disposing of these batteriescorrectly, you will help to savevaluable resources and preventany potential negative effects onhuman health and the environ-ment which could otherwisearise from inappropriate wastehandling.

General information

05

Keys..............................................................................................1-02Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system).....................1-03Keyless entry system*..................................................................1-04Doors............................................................................................1-06Central door locks*.......................................................................1-07“Child-protection” rear doors (Double cab).................................1-08Manual window control*..............................................................1-08Electric window control*..............................................................1-08Quarter window (Club cab)..........................................................1-12Rear gate.......................................................................................1-13Sunroof*.......................................................................................1-14

Locking and unlocking

1

KeysE00300101608

Two keys are provided. The key fits all locks.Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.

Type 1

Type 2

WARNINGl When taking a key on flights, do not

press any switches on the key while onthe plane. If a switch is pressed on theplane, the key emits electromagneticwaves, which could adversely affect theplane’s flight operation.When carrying a key in a bag, be carefulthat no switches on the key can be easilypressed by mistake.

NOTEl The key number is stamped on the tag as in-

dicated in the illustration.Make a record of the key number and storethe key and key number tag in separate pla-ces, so that you can order a key in the eventthe original keys are lost.

l The key is a precision electronic device witha built-in signal transmitter. Please observethe following in order to prevent a malfunc-tion.

• Do not leave in a place that is exposed todirect sunlight, for example on the dash-board.

• Do not disassemble or modify.• Do not excessively bend the key or sub-

ject it to a strong impact.• Do not expose to water.• Keep away from magnetic key holders.• Keep away from audio systems, personal

computers, TVs, and other equipmentthat generates a magnetic field.

• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners orsimilar equipment.

• Do not leave the key where it may be ex-posed to high temperature or high humid-ity.

l The engine is designed so that it will notstart if the ID code registered in the immobil-izer computer and the key’s ID code do notmatch. Refer to the “Electronic immobilizer”section for details and key usage.


1-02

1

Electronic immobilizer(Anti-theft starting system)

E00300200921

The electronic immobilizer is designed to signifi-cantly reduce the possibility of vehicle theft. Thepurpose of the system is to immobilize the vehicleif an invalid start is attempted. A valid start attemptcan only be achieved (subject to certain conditions)using a keyless operation system “registered” tothe immobilizer system.

NOTEl In the following cases, the vehicle may not

be able to receive the registered ID codefrom the key. This means the engine will notstart even when the registered key is turnedto the “START” position.

• When the key contacts a key ring or othermetallic or magnetic object (Type A)

• When the key grip contacts metal of an-other key (Type B)

• When the key contacts or is close to otherimmobilizing keys (including keys of oth-er vehicles) (Type C)

In cases like these, remove the object or addi-tional key from the vehicle key and turn thekey back to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.Then try again to start the engine. If the en-gine does not start, we recommend you to con-

tact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

l Two keys are provided.If you lose one of them, order a replacementas soon as possible.To obtain a key, take your vehicle and all re-maining keys to a MITSUBISHI MOTORSAuthorized Service Point.If you need an extra spare key, take your ve-hicle and all the keys to a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point. All thekeys have to be re-registered in the immobil-izer computer unit. The immobilizer allowsup to 8 different ID codes to be registered;you can register a maximum of 8 keys for use.

CAUTIONl Don’t make any alterations or additions

to the immobilizer system; alterations oradditions could cause failure of the immo-bilizer.


1-03

1

Keyless entry system*E00300301860

Press the remote control switch, and all doors willbe locked or unlocked as desired.

1- LOCK switch2- UNLOCK switch3- Indication lamp

To lockPress the LOCK switch (1), and all doors will belocked. When they are locked with the room lampat the [•] position, the room lamp and the turn-sig-nal lamps blink once.

To unlockPress the UNLOCK switch (2), and all doors willbe unlocked. When unlocked with the room lampat the [•] position, the room lamp will be turned onfor approximately 15 seconds and the turn-signallamps will blink twice.

NOTEl The indication lamp (3) comes on each time

a switch is pressed.

l If the UNLOCK switch (2) is pressed andany of the doors is not opened within approx-imately 30 seconds, relocking will automati-cally occur.

l It is possible to modify functions as follows:For further information, contact yourMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

• The time from pressing the UNLOCKswitch (2) to the moment of automaticlocking can be changed.

• The confirmation function (flashing ofthe turn-signal lamps) can be set to oper-ate only when the doors are locked or on-ly when the doors are unlocked.

• The confirmation function (this indicateslocking or unlocking of the doors withthe flash of the turn-signal lamps) can bedeactivated.

• The number of times the turn-signallamps are flashed by the confirmationfunction can be changed.

l The keyless entry system does not operate inthe following conditions:

• The key is left in the key cylinder.• The door is open.

l The remote control switch will operate with-in about 4 m from the vehicle. However, theoperating range of the remote control switchmay change if the vehicle is located near apower station, or radio/TV broadcasting sta-tion.

l If either of the following problems occurs,the battery may be exhausted.

• The remote control switch is operated atthe correct distance from the vehicle, butthe doors are not locked/unlocked in re-sponse.

• The indication lamp (3) is dim or doesnot come on. For further information, please contactyour MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.If you replace the battery yourself, referto “Procedure for replacing the remotecontrol switch battery” on page 1-04.

l If your remote control switch is lost or dam-aged, please contact your MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point for a re-placement remote control switch.

l If you wish to add a remote control switch,we recommend you to contact yourMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.A maximum of 4 remote control switches areavailable for your vehicle.

Procedure for replacing the remotecontrol switch battery

E00309500015

1. Remove the screw (A) from the remote con-trol switch.


1-04

1

2. With the MITSUBISHI mark facing you, in-sert the cloth-covered tip of a straight blade(or minus) screwdriver into the notch in theremote control switch case and use it to openthe case.

NOTEl Be sure to perform the procedure with the

MITSUBISHI mark facing you. If theMITSUBISHI mark is not facing you whenyou open the remote control switch case, theswitches may come out.

3. Remove the remote control transmitter fromthe remote control switch case. Then, openthe remote control transmitter using the meth-od described in step 2.

4. Remove the old battery.5. Install a new battery with the + side (B) down.

+ side

- side

Coin type batteryCR1616

6. Close the remote control transmitter firmly.7. Place the remote control transmitter in the re-

mote control switch case, then securely closethe remote control switch case.

8. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 1.

9. Check the keyless entry system to see that itworks.

NOTEl You may purchase a replacement battery at

an electric appliance store.l A MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-

ice Point can replace the battery for you ifyou prefer.

CAUTIONl When the remote control switch case is

opened, be careful to keep water, dust,etc. out. Also, do not touch the internalcomponents.


1-05

1

DoorsE00300401584

CAUTIONl Make sure the doors are closed: driving

with doors not completely closed is dan-gerous.

l Never leave children in the vehicle unat-tended.

l Be careful not to lock the doors while thekey is inside the vehicle.

NOTEl To prevent the key from being locked inside

the vehicle, neither the lock knob on the driv-er’s door nor the key can be used to lock thedriver’s door when it is open.

To lock or unlock with the key

1- Insert or remove the key2- Lock3- Unlock

To lock or unlock from inside the vehi-cle

1- Lock2- Unlock

Pull the inside door handle towards you to open thedoor.

NOTEl The driver’s door can be opened without us-

ing the lock knob by pulling on the insidedoor handle.If your vehicle is equipped with the centraldoor lock system, all other doors are un-locked at the same time.

To lock without using the key

Set the inside lock knob (1) to the locked position,and close the door (2).

NOTEl The driver’s door cannot be locked using the

inside lock knob while the driver’s door isopened.


1-06

1

Central door locks*E00300801504

NOTEl Each of the doors can be locked or unlocked

independently by using the inside lock knob.l Repeated continuous operation between lock

and unlock could activate the central doorlocking systems built-in protection circuitand prevent the system from operating. Ifthis occurs, wait about 1 minute before oper-ating the inside lock knob or the key.

All of the doors can be locked and unlocked as de-scribed hereafter.

Driver’s door with keyTurn the key in the driver’s door towards the frontof the vehicle to lock the doors and towards therear of the vehicle to unlock the doors.

1- Lock2- Unlock

Driver’s door with inside lock knobSet the inside lock knob on the driver’s door to-wards the front of the vehicle to lock the doors. Setit towards the rear of the vehicle to unlock the doors.

1- Lock2- Unlock

Unlocking doors using selector lever(vehicle with keyless entry system)It is possible to unlock all of the doors using the se-lector lever by placing in the “P” position while theignition switch is in the “ON” position.

NOTEl The vehicle is shipped from the factory with

a setting established such that the doors arenot unlocked when the selector lever isplaced in the in the “P” position with the ig-nition switch in the “ON” position. If youwish to change the setting such that the doorsare unlocked, contact your MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.


1-07

1

“Child-protection” rear doors(Double cab)

E00300900742

1- Lock2- Unlock

Child protection helps prevent doors from beingopened accidentally, especially when small chil-dren are in the rear seat.A lever is provided on each rear door.If the lever is set to the locked position, the reardoor cannot be opened using the inside handle.To open the rear door while the child protection isin use, pull the outside door handle.If the lever is set to the “Unlock” position, thechild protection mechanism does not function.

CAUTIONl When driving with a child in the rear

seat, please use the child protection to pre-vent accidental door opening which maycause an accident.

Manual window control*E00302100067

1- To open2- To close

Electric window control*E00302200127

The electric windows can only be operated with theignition switch in the “ON” position.

WARNINGl Before operating the electric window con-

trol, make sure that nothing can get trap-ped (head, hand, finger, etc.).

l Never leave the vehicle without removingthe key.

l Never leave a child (or other person whomight not be capable of safe operation ofthe electric window control) in the vehiclealone.

l The child may tamper with the switch atthe risk of its hands or head being trap-ped in the window.


1-08

1

Electric window control switchE00302301431

Each window opens or closes while the correspond-ing switch is operated.

Driver’s switch (LHD)

Driver’s switch (RHD)

1- Driver’s door window2- Front passenger’s door window3- Rear left door window (Double cab)4- Rear right door window (Double cab)5- Lock switch6- Rear retractable power window (Double cab)*

The switches can be used to operate all door win-dows. A window can be opened or closed by oper-ating the corresponding switch.

Press the switch down to open the window, andpull up the switch to close it.

If the switch is fully pressed down/pulled up, thedoor window automatically opens/closes complete-ly.If you want to stop the window movement, operatethe switch lightly in the reverse direction.

NOTEl Repeated operation with the engine stopped

will run down the battery. Operate the win-dow switches only while the engine is running.

l The rear door windows only open halfway.

Rear retractable power window switch (Doublecab)*The rear retractable power window switch can beused to operate the rear retractable power window.The rear retractable power window stops in threepositions: the fully closed position, a ventilation po-sition, and the fully open position.

1- Close2- Open


1-09

1

NOTEl It is not possible to stop the rear retractable

power window in any position other than thefully closed position, ventilation position,and fully open position.If the rear retractable power window isopened while the rear window demister is op-erating, the rear window demister automati-cally stops. When the rear retractable powerwindow is subsequently fully closed, the be-haviour of the rear window demister dependsupon the elapsed time of the rear window de-mister’s timer. (The timer runs for about 20minutes in total.)

• If the rear window demister’s timer is run-ning, the rear window demister restartsfor the remaining time.

• If the rear window demister’s timer hasfinished, the rear window demister doesnot operate. If you wish to activate therear window demister, press the rear win-dow demister switch again.

A- Fully closed positionIn this position, the rear retractable power windowis fully closed.

To place the rear retractable power window in thefully closed position, firmly press the rear retracta-ble power window switch (1). B- Ventilation positionIn this position, the rear retractable power windowis slightly open.To place the rear retractable power window in theventilation position, lightly press the rear retracta-ble power window switch (1) or (2).

WARNINGl In each of the following circumstances,

the operating direction of the rear retract-able power window switch and the operat-ing direction of the rear retractable pow-er window do not match each other. Exer-cise caution to avoid the risk of accidental-ly trapping a hand or your head when op-erating the rear retractable power win-dow.

• Even if the rear retractable power win-dow switch (1) is lightly pressed whilethe rear retractable power window ismoving from the fully closed positiontowards the ventilation position, therear retractable power window doesnot return to the fully closed position.

• Even if the rear retractable power win-dow switch (2) is lightly pressed whilethe rear retractable power window ismoving from the fully open position to-wards the ventilation position, therear retractable power window doesnot return to the fully open position.

C- Fully open position

In this position, the rear retractable power windowis fully open.To place the rear retractable power window in thefully open position, firmly press the rear retractablepower window switch (2).

WARNINGl If the rear retractable power window

switch (1) is lightly pressed while the rearretractable power window is movingfrom the fully closed position towards thefully open position, the rear retractablepower window will come up to the ventila-tion position. To avoid the risk of acciden-tally trapping a hand or your head, donot operate the switch while the rear re-tractable power window is moving.

NOTEl The rear retractable power window only

opens halfway.

Lock switchE00303100396

When this switch is operated, the passenger’sswitches and the rear retractable power windowswitch cannot be used to open or close the windows.


1-10

1

To unlock, press it once again.

1- Lock2- Unlock

NOTEl The driver’s switch can open or close any

door windows.

WARNINGl A child may tamper with the switch at

the risk of its hands or head being trap-ped in the window. When driving with achild in the vehicle, please press the win-dow lock switch to disable the passen-ger’s switches and rear retractable powerwindow switch.

Timer functionE00302400709

Door’s window

The door windows can be opened or closed for 30seconds after the ignition switch is turned from the“ON” position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.If the driver’s door is opened during this period,the door window can be opened or closed for anoth-er 30 seconds.However, once the driver’s door is closed, the win-dows cannot be operated. Rear retractable power windowThe rear retractable power window can be openedor closed for 30 seconds after the ignition switch isturned from the “ON” position to the “ACC” or“LOCK” position.If the driver’s door is opened during this period,the rear retractable power window can be openedor closed for another 30 seconds.However, once the driver’s door is closed, the rearretractable power window cannot be operated.

Safety mechanismE00302500537

Door’s windowIf a hand or head is trapped in the closing powerwindow, it will lower automatically.Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their heador hand out of the power window when closing apower window.The lowered window will become operational aftera few seconds.

WARNINGl If the safety mechanism is activated three

or more times successively, the safetymechanism will be temporarily cancelled.If a hand or head got trapped, a seriousinjury could result.

CAUTIONl The safety mechanism is cancelled just be-

fore the power window is fully closed.This allows the power window to closecompletely. Therefore be especially care-ful that no fingers are trapped in the pow-er window.

NOTEl The safety mechanism can be activated if the

driving conditions or other circumstancescause the power window to be subjected to aphysical shock similar to that caused by a trap-ped hand or head.

l If the safety mechanism is activated three ormore times in a row, the safety mechanismwill be cancelled and the power window willnot close correctly.In such a case, the following procedureshould be implemented to rectify this situa-tion. Repeatedly raise the appropriate powerwindow switch until that power window hasbeen fully closed. Following this, release theswitch, raise the switch once again and holdit in this condition for at least one second,then release it. You should now be able to op-erate the power window in the normal fashion.


1-11

1

Rear retractable power windowIf a hand or head is trapped in the closing rear re-tractable power window, it will lower automatically.Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their heador hand out of the rear retractable power windowwhen closing a rear retractable power window.The lowered window will become operational aftera few seconds.

WARNINGl If the safety mechanism is activated three

or more times successively, the safetymechanism will be temporarily cancelled.If a hand or head got trapped, a seriousinjury could result.


fore the rear retractable power window isfully closed. This allows the rear retracta-ble power window to close completely.Therefore be especially careful that no fin-gers are trapped in the rear retractablepower window.


driving conditions or other circumstancescause the rear retractable power window tobe subjected to a physical shock similar tothat caused by a trapped hand or head.

l If the safety mechanism is activated three ormore times in a row, the safety mechanismwill be cancelled and the rear retractable pow-er window will not close correctly.In such a case, the following procedureshould be implemented to rectify this situa-tion. Repeatedly press the rear retractablepower window switch (1) until that rear re-tractable power window has been fully closed.Following this, release the switch, press theswitch once again and hold it in this condi-tion for at least 1 second, then release it. Youshould now be able to operate the rear retract-able power window in the normal fashion.

Quarter window (Club cab)E00302600088

To open1. Pull the lever towards you.

2. Push the lever towards the outside of the ve-hicle.

3. Push the lever towards the rear of the vehicleto secure it in place.


1-12

1

To closePull the lever, returning it to its original positionand securing it in place.

Rear gateE00303000050

To openLift up the handle and lower the rear gate.

To closeRaise the rear gate and close with enough force tolatch the assembly securely into position.

CAUTIONl Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe

when loading and unloading luggage.Heat from the exhaust could lead to burns.

l Pay attention not to catch your fingers inthe rear gate.

l Do not weight the rear gate.l Before driving, make sure that the rear

gate is securely closed. If the rear gateopens while driving the vehicle, objectsstored in the cargo area could fall out on-to the road.


1-13

1

Sunroof*E00302700887

The sunroof can only be operated with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position.

To openThe sunroof automatically opens if the switch (3) ispressed.To stop the moving sunroof, press the switch (1) or(2).

NOTEl The sunroof automatically stops just before

reaching the fully open position.Press the switch again to fully open it.

To closeThe sunroof closes while the switch (2) is pressed.

To tilt upWhen the switch (1) is pressed, the rear edge of sun-roof rises for ventilation.

To tilt downThe sunroof tilt down while the switch (2) is pressed.

Safety mechanismE00303800029

If a hand or head is trapped in the closing sunroof,it will reopen automatically.Nonetheless, make sure that nobody puts their heador hand out of the sunroof when opening or closing.The opened sunroof will become operational aftera few seconds. If the safety mechanism is activated 5 or moretimes consecutively or the switch (1) is kept press-ed for 10 seconds or longer with the sunroof station-ary in the fully tilted up position, normal closing ofthe sunroof will be aborted. In such an event, youshould take the following steps:

1. Press the switch (1) repeatedly until the sun-roof has been fully tilt up.

2. Once the fully tilt up position has beenreached, press again and hold the switch (1)for at least 3 seconds.

3. After pressing the switch (3) to perform fullopening, press the switch (2) to fully closethe sunroof.


driving conditions or other circumstancescause the sunroof to be subjected to a physi-cal shock similar to that caused by a trappedhand or head.

l Avoid stopping the sunroof before it reachesthe opening or closing end during operations.If this should accidentally happen, repeat theprocess from step 1.


fore the sunroof is fully closed. This al-lows the sunroof to close completely.Therefore be especially careful that no fin-gers are trapped in the sunroof.

4. Following this action, it should be possibleto operate the sunroof in the normal manner.

SunshadeE00307900044

Slide the sunshade manually to open and close it.

CAUTIONl Be careful that hands are not trapped

when closing the sunshade.

NOTEl The sunshade will operate together with the

sunroof when the sunroof is opened.


1-14

1

l Be sure to tilt down the sunroof before clos-ing the sunshade.

l The sunshade cannot be closed with the sun-roof opened. Do not attempt to close the sun-shade when the sunroof is opened.

WARNINGl Do not put head, hands or anything else

out of the sunroof opening while drivingthe vehicle.

l Never leave a child (or other person whomight not be capable of safe operation ofthe sunroof switch) in the vehicle alone.

l Before operating the sunroof, make surethat nothing is capable of being trapped(head, hand, finger, etc.).

NOTEl The sunroof stops just before reaching the

fully open position.If the vehicle is driven with the sunroof inthis position, wind throb is lower than withthe sunroof fully open.

l When leaving the vehicle unattended, makesure you close the sunroof and remove the ig-nition key.

l Do not try to operate the sunroof if it is fro-zen closed (after snow fall or during extremecold).

l Do not sit or place heavy luggage on the sun-roof or roof opening edge.

l Release the switch as soon as the sunroof rea-ches the fully open or fully closed position.

l If the sunroof does not operate when the sun-roof switch is operated, release the switchand check whether something is trapped bythe sunroof. If nothing is trapped, we recom-mend you to have the sunroof checked.

l Depending on the model of ski carriers orroof carriers, the sunroof may make contactwith the carrier when the sunroof is tilted up.Be careful when tilting up the sunroof if sucha ski carrier or a roof carrier is installed.

l Be sure to close the sunroof completelywhen washing the vehicle or when leavingthe vehicle.

l Be careful, not to put any wax on the weath-erstrip (black rubber) around the sunroofopening. If stained with wax, the weather-strip cannot maintain a weatherproof sealwith the sunroof.

l After washing the vehicle or after it hasrained, wipe off any water that is on the sun-roof before operating it.

l Operating the sunroof repeatedly with the en-gine stationary will run down the battery. Op-erate the sunroof while the engine is running.


1-15

1

Seat...............................................................................................2-02Seat adjustment.............................................................................2-03Front seat......................................................................................2-03Rear seat*.....................................................................................2-07Head restraints..............................................................................2-08Seat belts.......................................................................................2-09Pregnant women restraint.............................................................2-11Seat belt pretensioner system and force limiter system................2-12Child restraint...............................................................................2-13Seat belt inspection.......................................................................2-27Supplemental restraint system (SRS) - airbag*............................2-27

Seat and seat belts

2

SeatE00400101146

1-Front seatl To adjust forward or backward ® p. 2-03l To recline the seatback ® p. 2-04l To adjust the seat height (driver’s seat)* ® p. 2-05l To get in and out of the cargo space (Club cab, passenger’s seat) ® p. 2-05l Folding the seatback forward (Single cab, passenger’s seat)* ® p. 2-06l Heated seats* ® p. 2-06

2-Rear seat*l Folding the seatback forward (Double cab) ® p. 2-07l Folding up the seat cuchion (Club cab)* ® p. 2-07l Armrest (Double cab) ® p. 2-07

Seat and seat belts

2-02

2

Seat adjustmentE00400300200

Adjust the driver’s seat so that you are comfortableand that you can reach the pedals, steering wheel,switches etc. while retaining a clear field of vision.

WARNINGl Do not attempt to adjust the seat while

driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-trol and result in an accident. After ad-justments are made, ensure the seating islocked in position by attempting to movethe seat forward and rearward without us-ing the adjusting mechanism.

l It is extremely dangerous to ride in thecargo area (inside or outside) of a vehicle.Also, the cargo area and rear seats shouldnever be used as a play area by children.In a collision, people or children riding un-restrained in these areas are more likelyto be seriously injured or killed.Do not allow people or children to ride inany area of your vehicle that is not equip-ped with seats and seat belts, and makesure that everyone travelling in your vehi-cle is in a seat and wearing a seat belt, orin the case of a child is strapped in a childrestraint.

WARNINGl To minimize the risk of personal injury

in the event of a collision or sudden brak-ing, the seatbacks should always be in thealmost upright position while the vehicleis in motion. The protection provided bythe seat belts may be reduced significant-ly when the seatback is reclined. There isgreater risk that the passenger will slideunder the seat belt, resulting in serious in-jury, when the seatback is reclined.

CAUTIONl Make sure the seat is adjusted by an

adult or with adult supervision for cor-rect and safe operation.

l Do not place a cushion or the like be-tween your back and the seatback whiledriving. The effectiveness of the head re-straints will be reduced in the event of anaccident.

l When sliding the seats, be careful not tocatch your hand or foot.

l When sliding or reclining the seat rear-ward, pay careful attention to the rearseat passengers. (Double cab and Clubcab)

Front seatE00400400012

To adjust forward or backwardE00400500475

Manual typePull the seat adjusting lever and adjust the seat for-ward or backward to the desired position. After ad-justment, release the adjusting lever to lock the seatin position.

WARNINGl To ensure the seat is locked securely, try

to move the seat forward or backwardwithout using the adjusting lever.

Seat and seat belts

2-03

2

Power typeAdjust the seat by operating the switch as indicatedby the arrows.

1- Adjustment forward2- Adjustment backward

NOTEl To prevent the battery from running down,

operate the power type seat with the enginerunning.

To recline the seatbackE00400600593

Manual typeIn order to recline the seatback, lean forward slight-ly, pull the seatback lock lever up, and then leanbackward to the desired position and release the lev-er. The seatback will lock in that position.

CAUTIONl The reclining mechanism of the seatback

is spring loaded, causing it to return tothe vertical position when the lock leveris operated. When operating the lever, sitclose to the seatback or hold it with yourhand to control its return motion.

Power typeAdjust the seatback angle by operating the switchas indicated by the arrows.

1- To move to forward direction2- To recline rearward



Seat and seat belts

2-04

2

To adjust the seat height (Driver’sseat)*

E00400700653

Manual typeAdjust the seat height by repeatedly operating thelever.

1- Raise2- Lower

Power typeTo adjust the seat height, operate the switch as indi-cated by arrows.



1- To move the front of the seat up and down

2- To move the rear of the seat up and down

3- To move the whole seat up and down

To get in and out of the cargo space(Club cab, passenger’s seat)

E00411000021

The lever can be used to make getting in and outeasier.

1- To get in or out2- To get out

Seat and seat belts

2-05

2

When the lever or pedal is used, the seatback willtilt forward and at the same time the entire seat willmove forward. To return the seat, slide the entireseat rearward and then raise the seatback rearwardto lock the seat in position.

WARNINGl Do not drive the vehicle with the seatback

folded forward. The seat is not retainedposition if it is not kept in an upright posi-tion, so serious injuries could be sufferedin the event of hard braking or a collision.

CAUTIONl The reclining mechanism of the seatback

is spring loaded, causing it to return tothe vertical position when the lock leveris operated. When using the lever, sitclose to the seatback or hold it with yourhand.

l Use a foot to operate the pedal (2).

Folding the seatback forward (Singlecab, passenger’s seat)*

E00410400031

To access the onboard tool kit, fold forward the seat-back of the passenger’s seat.Refer to “Tools, jack and jack handle” on page6-07.

Pull the band and fold the seatback forward.

Heated seats*E00401100784

The heated seats can be operated with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position.

1 (HI)- Heater high (for quick heating).2- Heater off.3 (LO)- Heater low (to keep the seat warm).

The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while theheater is on.

CAUTIONl Switch off seat heaters when not in use.l Operate in the high position for quick heat-

ing. Once the seat is warm, set the heaterto low to keep it warm. Slight variationsin seat temperature may be felt while us-ing the heated seats. This is caused by theoperation of the heater’s internal thermo-stat and does not indicate a malfunction.

l If the following types of persons use theheated seats, they might become too hotor receive minor burns (red skin, heat blis-ters, etc.):

• Children, elderly or ill people• People with sensitive skin• Excessively tired people• People under the influence of alcohol

or sleep inducing medication (coldmedicine, etc.)

l Do not place heavy objects on the seat orstick pins, needles, or other pointed ob-jects into it.

l Do not use a blanket, cushion, or other ma-terial with high heat insulation propertieson the seat while using the heater; thismight cause the heater element to overheat

l When cleaning the seat, do not use ben-zene, kerosene, petrol, alcohol, or other or-ganic solvents; these might damage thesurface of the seat and also the heater ele-ment.

l If water or any other liquid is spilled onthe seat, allow it to dry thoroughly beforeattempting to use the heater.

l Turn the heater off immediately if it ap-pears to be malfunctioning during use.

Seat and seat belts

2-06

2

Rear seat*E00401300148

When a person is sitting in the middle seating posi-tion of the rear seat, adjust the head restraint toheight at which it lock in position. Refer to “Headrestraints” on page 2-08.

Folding the seatback forward (Doublecab)

E00401600242

Pull up the band on the top of the seatback and foldit forward.

Confirm that the seatback locks securely when it isreturned.

Folding up the seat cushion (Club cab)*E00411300024

The right and left seat cushions can be folded upseparately.To fold the seat cushions up, raise the seat cushions.

Securely retain the seat cushion by hooking the re-taining band (A) onto the head restraint (B) of therear seat.

Armrest (Double cab)E00401700605

To use the armrest, fold it down.To return to the original position, push it backward(into the seatback) until it is level with the seat.

NOTEl Do not stand or sit on the armrest. It could

break.l The top surface of the armrest contains a cup

holder for rear seat occupants.Refer to “Cup holder” on page 5-45.

Seat and seat belts

2-07

2

Head restraintsE00403300995

WARNINGl Driving without the head restraints in

place can cause you and your passengersserious injury or death in an accident. Toreduce the risk of injury in an accident, al-ways make sure the head restraints are in-stalled and properly positioned when theseat is occupied.

l Never place a cushion or similar deviceon the seatback. This can adversely affecthead restraint performance by increasingthe distance between your head and therestraint.

To adjust heightAdjust the head restraint height so that the centreof the restraint is as close as possible to eye level toreduce the chances of injury in the event of colli-sion. Any person too tall for the restraint to reachtheir seated eye level, should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

To raise the head restraint, move it upward. To low-er the restraint, move it downward while pushingthe height adjusting knob (A) in the direction of thearrow. After adjustment, push the head restraintdownward and make sure that it is locked.

To removeLift the head restraint with the height adjustingknob (A) pushed in.

To installConfirm that the head restraint is facing the correctdirection, and then insert it into the seatback whilepressing the height adjusting knob (A) in the direc-tion indicated by the arrow.

CAUTIONl Confirm that the height adjusting knob

(A) is correctly adjusted as shown in theillustration, and also lift the head re-straints to ensure that they do not comeout of the seatback.

Seat and seat belts

2-08

2

CAUTIONl If your vehicle is equipped with the rear

seat head restraint, the head restraintsfor the front and rear seats differ in size.When installing head restraints, makesure the front and rear head restraintsare fitted in their respective seats.

Seat beltsE00404800317

To protect you and your passengers in the event ofan accident, it is most important that the seat beltsare worn correctly while driving.The front seat belts have a pretensioner system.These belts are used the same way as a convention-al seat belt.Refer to “Seat belt pretensioner system and forcelimiter system” on page 2-12.

WARNINGl Always place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Neverput it behind you or under your arm.

l One seat belt should be used by only oneperson. Doing otherwise can be dangerous.

l The seat belt will provide its wearer withmaximum protection if the recliner seat-back is placed in fully upright position.When the seatback is reclined, there isgreater risk that the passenger will slideunder the belt, especially in a forward im-pact accident, and may be injured by thebelt or by striking the instrument panelor seatbacks.

l Seat belts should always be worn by ev-ery adult who drives or rides in this vehi-cle, and by all children who are tallenough to wear seat belts properly.

l Remove any twists when using the belt.l No modifications or additions should be

made by the user which will either pre-vent the seat belt adjusting devices fromoperating to remove slack, or prevent theseat belt assembly from being adjusted toremove slack.

WARNINGl To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury

in an accident, including the deployingdriver’s airbag, adjust the driver’s seatas far back as possible while maintaininga position that still allows good visibilityand good control of the steering wheel,the brake and accelerator, and vehicle con-trols.

l Never hold a child in your arms or onyour lap when riding in this vehicle, evenif you are wearing your seat belt. To doso risks severe or fatal injury to the childin a collision or sudden stop.

l Always adjust the seat belt to a snug fit.

3-point type seat belt (with emergencylocking mechanism)

E00404900448

This type of belt requires no length adjustment.Once worn, the belt adjusts itself to the movementof the wearer, but in the event of a sudden or strongshock, the belt automatically locks to hold the wear-er’s body.

Seat and seat belts

2-09

2

To fasten1. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding

the latch plate.

NOTEl When the seat belts cannot be pulled out in a

locked condition, pull the belts once forceful-ly and then return them. After that, pull thebelts out slowly once again.

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle until a“click” is heard.

WARNINGl Never wear the lap portion of the belt

across your abdomen. During accidents itcan press sharply against the abdomenand increase the risk of injury.

l The seat belts must not be twisted whenworn.

3. Pull the belt slightly to adjust slackness as de-sired.

To unfastenHold the latch plate and push the button on the buck-le.

NOTEl As the belt retracts automatically, keep hold-

ing the latch plate while retracting so that thebelt stows slowly. Failure to do this coulddamage the vehicle.

Seat belt reminder/warning lampE00409800790

A tone and warning lamp are used to remind thedriver and front passenger to fasten the seat belt.

NOTEl For the front passenger seat, the warning func-

tion works only while a person is sitting onthe seat.

When the ignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion, the warning lamp will come on and a tonewill sound for about 6 seconds. If the front seat beltremains unfastened approximately 1 minute later,the warning lamp will flash and the tone sound in-termittently (each 12 times) when the vehicle is driv-en. If the passenger subsequently unfastens the seatbelt while driving, the warning lamp and tone willissue further warnings. And if the seat belt remainsunfastened, the warning lamp and tone will issuefurther warnings each time the vehicle starts mov-ing from a stop. When the seat belt is fastened, thewarnings will stop.

WARNINGl In order to reduce the risk of serious or fa-

tal injury in an accident, always wearyour own seat belt. Do not allow anyoneto ride in your vehicle unless he or she isalso seated and wearing a seat belt. Chil-dren should additionally be restrained ina secure child restraint system.

Seat and seat belts

2-10

2

NOTEl When luggage is placed on the front passen-

ger seat, a sensor in the seat cushion may, de-pending on the weight and position of the lug-gage, cause the warning tone to sound andthe warning lamp to come on (Double cab).

Adjustable seat belt anchor (frontseats)*

E00405000299

The seat belt anchor height can be adjusted.Move the seat belt anchor down with the lock knob(A) depressed. To move the anchor up, slide it with-out depressing the lock knob (A).

Anchor down Anchor up

WARNINGl When adjusting the seat belt anchor, set

it at a position that is sufficiently high sothat the belt will make full contact withyour shoulder but will not touch your neck.

Lap belts*E00405100128

The lap belts should be adjusted by holding the beltand latch plate at right angles to each other, andthen pulling the belt as shown in the illustration toa snug fit around the occupant.

1- Tighten2- Loosen

While holding the latch plate, insert the latch plateinto the buckle until a “click” is heard.

Pregnant women restraintE00405600064

WARNINGl Seat belts work for everyone, including

pregnant women. Pregnant womenshould use the available seat belts. Thiswill reduce the likelihood of injury toboth the woman and the unborn child.The lap belt should be worn across thethighs and as snug against the hips as pos-sible, but not across the waist. Consultyour doctor if you have any additionalquestions or concerns.

Seat and seat belts

2-11

2

Seat belt pretensioner system andforce limiter system

E00405700140

The driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat eachhave a seat belt equipped with a pretensioner system.

Pretensioner systemE00405801089

The pretensioner system will retract their respec-tive seat belts instantaneously, thus maximizing theseat belt’s effectiveness, if there is a frontal impactsevere enough to injure the driver and/or front pas-senger and the ignition switch is in the “ON” or“START” position.The seat belt pretensioner includes the followingcomponents:

1- Front impact sensors2- Seat belt pretensioners3- Airbag control unit

WARNINGl To obtain the best results from your pre-

tensioner seat belt, make sure you have ad-justed your seat correctly and wear yourseat belt properly.

CAUTIONl Installation of audio equipment or re-

pairs in the vicinity of the pretensionerseat belts or floor console must be per-formed in line with MITSUBISHIMOTORS guidelines. It is important todo so because the work could affect thepretensioner systems.

l If you need to scrap the vehicle, please con-sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point. It is important to doso because unexpected activation of thepretensioner seat belts could cause inju-ries.

NOTEl The pretensioner seat belts will be activated

if the vehicle suffers a severe frontal impact,even if the seat belts are not worn.

l The pretensioner seat belts are designed towork only once. After the pretensioner seatbelts have been activated, we recommendyou to have them replaced by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

SRS warning lampE00405900126

This warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbagsand the pretensioner seat belts.Refer to “SRS warning lamp” on page 2-38.

Force limiter systemE00406000078

In the event of a collision, each force limiter sys-tem will effectively absorb the load applied to theseat belt so as to minimize the impact to the passen-ger.

Seat and seat belts

2-12

2

Child restraintE00406401297

When transporting children in your vehicle, sometype of child restraint system should always beused according to the size of the child. This is re-quired by law in most countries.The regulations concerning driving with children inthe front seat may differ from country to country.You are advised to comply with the relevant regula-tions.

WARNINGl When possible, put children in the rear

seat. Accident statistics indicate that chil-dren of all sizes and ages are safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat rath-er than in the front seat. (Double cab andClub cab)

l Holding a child in your arms is no substi-tute for a restraint system. Failure to usea proper restraint system can result in se-vere or fatal injury to the child.

l Each child restraint device or fixing is tobe used only by one child.

l When attaching a child restraint to therear seat, place the front seatbacks in theupright position.Otherwise, the child could be seriously in-jured in the event of hard braking or a col-lision. (Double cab and Club cab)

Caution for installing the child re-straint on vehicles with a front passen-ger airbag

E00406500190

The label shown here is attached on vehicles with afront passenger airbag.

WARNINGl Extreme Hazard!

Do not use a rearward facing child re-straint on a seat protected by an airbag infront of it!

l A REARWARD FACING CHILD RE-STRAINT must NOT be used in the frontpassenger seat if the front passenger’s air-bag has not been deactivated. The forceof an inflating airbag could kill or causeserious injuries to the child.

Front passenger’s air bag ON

NOTEl If you have a rear-facing child restraint sys-

tem that cannot be fitted to any seat otherthan the front passenger seat, be sure to turnOFF the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFFswitch before using it. (Refer to “To turn anairbag off” on page 2-30.)

Front passenger’s air bag OFF

Seat and seat belts

2-13

2

WARNINGl A FORWARD FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT should not be used in the frontpassenger seat whenever possible; if usedin the front passenger seat, adjust theseat to the most rearward position.

Infants and small childrenE00406600768

When transporting infants and small children inyour vehicle, follow the instruction given below.

Instruction:l For small infants, an infant carrier should be

used. For small children whose height whenseated allows the shoulder belt to lie in con-tact with the face or the throat, a child seatshould be used.

l The child restraint system should be appropri-ate for the child’s weight and height and prop-erly fit in the vehicle.

l Before purchasing a child restraint system,try installing it in the rear seat to make surethere is a good fit. Because of the location ofthe seat belt buckles and the shape of the seatcushion, it may be difficult to securely installsome manufacturer’s child restraint systems.If the child restraint system can be pulled for-ward or to either side easily on the seat cush-ion after the seat belt has been tightened,choose another manufacturer’s child restraintsystem.

WARNINGl When installing a child restraint system,

refer to the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the restraint system. Fail-ure to do so can result in severe or fatalinjury to the child.

l After installation, push and pull the childrestraint system back and forth, and sideto side, to see that it is properly secured.If the child restraint system is not instal-led securely, it may cause injury to thechild or other occupants in the case of ac-cident or sudden stops.

WARNINGl When the child restraint system is not in

use, keep your child restraint system se-cured with the seat belt or remove it fromthe vehicle in order to prevent it from be-ing thrown around inside the vehicle dur-ing an accident.

NOTEl Depending on the seating position in the ve-

hicle and the child restraint system that youhave, the child restraint can be attached us-ing one of the following two locations:

• To the lower anchorage in the rear seatONLY if the child restraint has ISOFIXmountings (Double cab, See page 2-25).

• To the seat belt (See page 2-26).

Older childrenE00406700235

Children who have outgrown the child restraint sys-tem should be seated in the rear seat and wear com-bination lap shoulder belt.The lap portion of the belt should be snug and posi-tioned low on the abdomen so that it is below thetop of the hip-bone. Otherwise, the belt could in-trude into the child’s abdomen during an accidentand cause injury.

WARNINGl Children who are not buckled up can be

thrown out of the vehicle in an accident.

Seat and seat belts

2-14

2

WARNINGl Children who are not buckled up can

strike other people in the vehicle in an ac-cident.

l A child should never be left unattendedin your vehicle. When you leave the vehi-cle, take the child with you.

Seat and seat belts

2-15

2

Suitability for various ISOFIX positionsE00411400054

Mass group Size class FixtureVehicle ISOFIX positions

Front passenger Rear/second Outboard Rear centre

Carrycot F ISO/L1 X X X

G ISO/L2 X X X

X X X

0 - Up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 X IL X

X X X

0+ - Up to 13 kg E ISO/R1 X IL, IL*2 X

D ISO/R2 X IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL X

X X X

I - 9 to 18 kg D ISO/R2 X IL X

C ISO/R3 X IL X

B ISO/F2 X IUF X

B1 ISO/F2X X IUF, IL*1 X

A ISO/F3 X IUF X

X X X

II - 15 to 25 kg X X X

III - 22 to 36 kg X X X

Key of letters to be inserted in the table above:l IUF- Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraints systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.l IL- Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems (CRS) given in the attached list.

These ISOFIX CRS are those of the “specific vehicle”, “restricted” or “semiuniversal” categories.l X- ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in this mass group and/or this size class.

Seat and seat belts

2-16

2

IL (Genuine part information)

Genuine part No. ECE No.

*1 MZ313045 E1-04301133

*2 MZ313589 E1-04301146

NOTEl MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.

For further information, please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Seat and seat belts

2-17

2

Suitability for various seating positionsE00406800757

Single cab (Separate seat)

Mass group

Seating Position

Front passenger

Activated airbag Deactivated airbag*1

0 - Up to 10 kg X U

0+ - Up to 13 kg X U, L*2

I - 9 to 18 kg UF, L*3, L*4 U, L*3, L*4

II - 15 to 25 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5

III - 22 to 36 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5

*1: With front passenger’s airbag deactivated by means of front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch

Key of letters to be inserted in the table above:l U- Suitable for “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.l UF- Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category restraints approved for use in this mass group.l L- Suitable for particular child restraints (MITSUBISHI MOTORS genuine parts).l B- Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.l X- Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.

L (Genuine part information)

Genuine parts No. ECE No.

*2 MZ312807 E1-04301146

*3 MZ312745 E1-04301136

*4 MZ313045 E1-04301133

*5 MZ314250 E1-04301169

Seat and seat belts

2-18

2

CAUTIONl When installing a child restraint system, prevent the head restraint from touching the child restraint system by removing it or adjusting its height.

NOTEl There is no applicable MITSUBISHI MOTORS Genuine Parts to the Mass Group “0- Up to 10 kg”.

MITSUBISHI MOTORS Europe B.V. reserves the right to changes without any prior announcement.For further information, please contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Single cab (Bench seat)

Mass group

Seating Position

Front passengerFront Centre


0 - Up to 10 kg X U X

0+ - Up to 13 kg X U, L*2 X

I - 9 to 18 kg UF, L*3, L*4 U, L*3, L*4 X

II - 15 to 25 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 X

III - 22 to 36 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 X



Seat and seat belts

2-19

2



*2 MZ312807 E1-04301146

*3 MZ312745 E1-04301136

*4 MZ313045 E1-04301133

*5 MZ314250 E1-04301169




Club cab

Mass group

Seating Position

Front passengerRear outboard


0 - Up to 10 kg X U X

0+ - Up to 13 kg X U, L*2 L*2

I - 9 to 18 kg UF, L*3, L*4 U, L*3, L*4 L*3, L*4

II - 15 to 25 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 X

III - 22 to 36 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 X


Seat and seat belts

2-20

2




*2 MZ312807 E1-04301146

*3 MZ312745 E1-04301136

*4 MZ313045 E1-04301133

*5 MZ314250 E1-04301169




Seat and seat belts

2-21

2

Double cab

Mass group

Seating Position

Front passengerRear outboard Rear centre


0 - Up to 10 kg X U U X

0+ - Up to 13 kg X U, L*2 U, L*2 X

I - 9 to 18 kg UF, L*3, L*4 U, L*3, L*4 U, L*3, L*4 L*4

II - 15 to 25 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 U, L*5 L*5

III - 22 to 36 kg UF, L*5 U, L*5 U, L*5 L*5





*2 MZ312807 E1-04301146

*3 MZ312745 E1-04301136

*4 MZ313045 E1-04301133

*5 MZ314250 E1-04301169

Seat and seat belts

2-22

2




Seat and seat belts

2-23

2

Child restraint anchorage points (Dou-ble cab)*

E00406900354

Anchorage locationThere are 2 child restraint anchorage points on thefloor, located behind the rear seat. These are for se-curing a child seat tether strap to each of the 2 rearseating positions in your vehicle.

*: Rear of the vehicle

CAUTIONl The anchorages are only applicable for

child restraints fitted in the rear seat.

Tether anchorage strap installation

WARNINGl Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed bycorrectly fitted child restraints. Under nocircumstances are they to be used foradult seat belts, harnesses, or for attach-ing other items or equipment to the vehicle.

1. Remove the head restraint from the locationin which you wish to install a child restraint.

2. Drop the child restraint’s tether strap (A)down the back of the rear seatback.

3. Tip the armrest forward. Open the fastener(B) that’s located in the space where the arm-rest was stowed.

4. Put your hand in the opening of the fastener,attach the tether strap’s hook (C) to the tetheranchorage (D), and securely tighten the teth-er strap.

Seat and seat belts

2-24

2

Installing a child restraint system tothe lower anchorage (ISOFIX child re-straint mountings)*

E00408900114

Your vehicle’s second seat is fitted with lower an-chorages for attaching a child restraint system withISOFIX mountings.

Child restraint system with ISOFIXmountings

E00409000369

The child restraint system is designed only forseats that incorporate lower anchorages. Retain thechild restraint system using the lower anchorages.

It is not necessary to retain the child restraint sys-tem using the vehicle’s seat belts.

A- Child restraint system connectors

To install

WARNINGl If there is any foreign material in or

around the connectors, remove it beforeinstalling the child restraint system. Also,make sure the seat belt is away from, notlooped through or otherwise interferingwith, the child restraint system. If foreignmatter is not removed and/or the seatbelt interferes with the child restraint sys-tem, the child restraint system will not besecured properly and could move for-ward in the event of sudden braking or acollision, seriously injuring the child andpossibly other vehicle occupants.

l When the vehicle is moving do not adjustthe seat where the child restraint systemis installed.

1. Push the child restraint system’s connectorsinto the lower anchorages (A) in accordancewith the instructions provided by the child re-straint system’s manufacturer.

If your child restraint system requires the useof a tether strap, fasten the tether strap in ac-cordance with the following procedures.

2. Remove the head restraint from the locationin which you wish to install a child restraint.

3. Drop the child restraint’s tether strap (B)down the back of the rear seatback.

Seat and seat belts

2-25

2

4. Tip the armrest forward. Open the fastener(C) that’s located in the space where the arm-rest was stowed.

5. Put your hand in the opening of the fastener,attach the tether strap’s hook (D) to the teth-er anchorage (E), and securely tighten the teth-er strap.

6. Push and pull the child restraint system in alldirections to be sure it is firmly secured.

To removeRemove the child restraint in accordance with theinstructions provided by the child restraint sys-tem’s manufacturer.

Installing a child restraint system to a3-point type seat belt (with emergencylocking mechanism)

E00408700516

Single cab and Club cab

Double cab

Front passenger seat

Front passenger seat

Installation:1. Fasten the seat belt to secure the child re-

straint system.Make sure you hear a “click” when you in-sert the latch plate in the buckle.

2. Remove all slack by using the locking clip.3. Push and pull the child restraint in all direc-

tions to be sure it is secure.

WARNINGl For some types of child restraint, the lock-

ing clip (A) should be used to help avoidpersonal injury during a collision or sud-den manoeuvre.It must be fitted and used in accordancewith the child restraint manufacturer’s in-structions.The locking clip must be removed whenthe child restraint is removed.

Seat and seat belts

2-26

2

Seat belt inspectionE00406300475

l Check the belts for cuts, worn or frayed web-bing and for cracked or deformed metallicparts. Replace the belt assembly if defective.

l A dirty belt should be cleaned with neutral de-tergent in warm water. After rinsing in water,let it dry in the shade. Do not attempt tobleach or re-dye the belts because this affectstheir characteristics.

WARNINGl We recommend you have all seat belt as-

semblies including retractors and attach-ing hardware inspected after any colli-sion. We recommend that seat belt assem-blies in use during a collision be replacedunless the collision was minor and thebelts show no damage and continue to op-erate properly.

l Do not attempt to repair or replace anypart of the seat belt assemblies; we recom-mend you to have this work done by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point. Incorrect repair or replace-ment could reduce the effectiveness of thebelts and could result in serious injury inthe event of a collision.

l Once the pretensioner has activated, itcannot be re-used.It must be replaced together with the re-tractor.

Supplemental restraint system(SRS) - airbag*

E00407201797

The information written in this Supplemental Re-straint System (SRS) section contains importantpoints concerning the driver, front passenger, sideand curtain airbags.The SRS driver and front passenger airbags are de-signed to supplement the primary protection of thedriver and front passenger side seat belt systems byproviding those occupants with protection againsthead and chest injuries in certain moderate-to-se-vere frontal collisions. The SRS side airbag is designed to supplement theproperly worn seat belts and provide the driver andfront passenger with protection against chest injuryin certain moderate-to-severe side impact collisions. The SRS curtain airbags are designed to supple-ment the properly worn seat belts and provide thedriver and passengers with protection against headinjuries in certain moderate-to-severe side impactcollisions. The SRS is NOT a substitute for the seat belts; formaximum protection in all types of crashes and ac-cidents, seat belts should ALWAYS be worn by ev-eryone who drives or rides in this vehicle.

WARNINGl IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO AL-

WAYS PROPERLY WEAR YOURSEAT BELT, EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG:

WARNING• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-

sengers properly positioned, which re-duces injury risk in all collisions, andreduces the risk of serious or fatal in-juries when the airbags inflate.During sudden braking just before acollision, an unrestrained or improper-ly restrained driver or passengers canmove forward into direct contact withor within close proximity to the airbagwhich may then deploy during the col-lision.The initial stage of airbag inflation isthe most forceful which could cause se-rious or fatal injuries if the occupantcontacts it at this stage.

• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury inroll-overs, rear impact collisions, andin lower-speed frontal collisions, be-cause driver’s and passenger’s air-bags are not designed to inflate inthose situations.

• Seat belts reduce the risk of beingthrown from your vehicle in a colli-sion or roll-over.

l IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP-ERLY SEATED.A driver or front passenger too close tothe steering wheel or instrument panelduring airbag deployment can be killedor seriously injured.Airbags inflate very fast, and with greatforce.If the driver and front passenger are notproperly seated and restrained, the air-

Seat and seat belts

2-27

2

WARNINGbags may not protect you properly, andcould cause serious or fatal injuries whenit inflates.

• Before driving, adjust the driver’sseat as far back as possible while stillmaintaining complete control of the ve-hicle.

• Before driving, adjust the front passen-ger seat as far back as possible.

• Make sure all vehicle occupants are al-ways properly restrained using theavailable seat belts.

• With seat belts properly fastened, thedriver and passengers should sit wellback and upright without leaningagainst the window or door.

l Do not sit on the edge of the seat, or leanhead or chest close to the steering wheelor instrument panel.Do not put feet or legs on or against theinstrument panel.

WARNINGl Infants and small children should never

be unrestrained, stand up against the in-strument panel or be held in your armsor on your lap. They could be seriously in-jured or killed in a collision, includingwhen the airbag inflates. They should beproperly seated in an appropriate child re-straint system. See the “Child restraint”section of this owner’s manual.

WARNINGl A REARWARD FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT must NOT be used in the frontpassenger seat if the front passenger’s air-bag has not been deactivated. The forceof an inflating airbag could kill or causeserious injuries to the child.

Front passenger’s air bag ON

NOTEl If you have a rear-facing child restraint sys-

tem that cannot be fitted to any seat otherthan the front passenger seat, be sure to turnOFF the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFFswitch before using it. (Refer to “To turn anairbag off” on page 2-30.)

Front passenger’s air bag OFF

Seat and seat belts

2-28

2

WARNINGl A FORWARD FACING CHILD RE-

STRAINT should not be used in the frontpassenger seat whenever possible; if usedin the front passenger seat, adjust theseat to the most rearward position. Fail-ure to do so could kill or cause serious in-juries to the child.

WARNINGl Older children should be seated, properly

wearing the seat belt, with an appropri-ate booster seat if needed.

Caution for installing the child re-straint on vehicles with a front passen-ger airbag

E00408800272

The label shown here is attached on vehicles with afront passenger airbag.

WARNINGl Extreme Hazard!

Do not use a rearward facing child re-straint on a seat protected by an airbag infront of it!

How the Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem works

E00407301352

The SRS includes the following components:

1- Airbag module (Driver)2- Front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lamp3- Airbag module (Passenger)4- Front impact sensors5- Airbag control unit6- Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch

7- Side airbag modules8- Side impact sensors9- Curtain airbag modules

Seat and seat belts

2-29

2

The airbags will operate only when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” or “START” position.When the airbag control unit detect an impact of suf-ficient frontal or side force, it sends an ignition sig-nal to the airbag modules to ignite materials in theinflator and generate gas and inflate the airbags.The airbags deployment produces a sudden, loudnoise, and releases some smoke and powder, butthese conditions are not injurious, and do not indi-cate a fire in the vehicle. People with respiratoryproblems may feel some temporary irritation fromchemicals used to produce the deployment; openthe windows after airbag deployment, if safe to doso.The airbags deflate very rapidly after deployment,so there is little danger of obscured vision.The time required from the sensors detecting an im-pact to deflation of the airbags after deployment isshorter than a blink of an eye.

CAUTIONl Airbags inflate at an extremely rapid

speed. In certain situations, contact withinflating airbags can result in abrasions,light cuts, bruises, and the like.

Front passenger’s airbag ON-OFFswitch

E00410100184

The front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch canbe used to disable the front passenger’s airbag. Ifyou have a rear-facing child restraint system thatcannot be fitted to any seat other than the front pas-senger seat, be sure to turn OFF the front passen-ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch before using it. (Referto “To turn an airbag off” on page 2-30.)

Front passenger’s ai rbag ON-OFF switch is loca-ted in the glove box.

WARNINGl To reduce risk of serious or fatal injury:

• Always remove the key from the igni-tion switch before operating a frontpassenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.Failure to do so could adversely affectthe airbag performance.

• Wait at least 60 seconds to operate thefront passenger’s airbag ON-OFFswitch after turning the ignitionswitch from “ON” position to“LOCK” position.The airbag SRS system is designed toretain enough voltage to deploy the air-bag.

WARNING• Always remove the key from the front

passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch af-ter operating that switch. Failure todo so could lead to improper positionof the front passenger’s airbagON-OFF switch.

To turn an airbag offE00410600219

To turn an airbag off, follow these steps:1. Insert the key into the key opening of the ap-

propriate front passenger’s airbag ON-OFFswitch, and turn that airbag ON-OFF switchto the “OFF” position.

2. Remove the key from the key opening of thatthe front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.

3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, andturn the ignition to the “ON” position.

The front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lampwill stay on to show that the front passenger’s air-bag is not operational. (Refer to “Front passenger’sairbag OFF indication lamp” on page 2-31.)

Seat and seat belts

2-30

2

That airbag will remain OFF, and will NOT de-ploy, until it is turned ON again.


• If the indication lamp does not comeon when the front passenger’s airbagON-OFF switch is turned OFF, do notfit a rear-facing child restraint systemto the front passenger seat.

• Do not turn OFF the front passen-ger’s airbag ON-OFF switch exceptwhen a rear-facing child restraint sys-tem is fitted to the front passenger seat.

To turn an airbag onE00410700106

To turn an airbag on, follow these steps:1. Insert the key into the key opening of the ap-

propriate front passenger’s airbag ON-OFFswitch, and turn that airbag ON-OFF switchto “ON” position.

2. Remove the key from the key opening of thatthe front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switch.

3. Insert the key into the ignition switch, andturn the ignition to the “ON” position.

The front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lampgoes off to show that the front passenger’s airbag isoperational. That airbag will remain ON, and will be ready todeploy, until it is again turned OFF.


• Turn ON the front passenger’s airbagON-OFF switch immediately after re-moving a rear-facing child restraintsystem from the front passenger seat.

• If the indication lamp remains onwhen the front passenger’s airbagON-OFF switch is turned ON, do notallow anyone to sit on the front passen-ger seat.

Front passenger’s airbag OFF indica-tion lamp

E00410200257

The front passenger’s airbag OFF indication lampis located in the instrument panel.

When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switchis turned OFF, the indication lamp will stay on toshow that the front passenger’s airbag is not opera-tional.When the front passenger’s airbag ON-OFF switchis turned ON, the indication lamp goes off to showthat the front passenger’s airbag is operational.

WARNINGl If the indication lamp behaves in any of

the following ways, there may be a faultin the airbag system. Have the vehicle in-spected by a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point as soon as possible.

• The indication lamp does not come onwhen the front passenger’s airbagON-OFF switch is turned OFF.

Seat and seat belts

2-31

2

WARNING• The indication lamp stays on when the

front passenger’s airbag ON-OFFswitch is turned ON.

l Do not fit any accessory that makes the in-dication lamp impossible to see, and donot cover the indication lamp with a stick-er. You would not be able to verify the sta-tus of the passenger airbag system.

Driver’s and passenger’s front airbagsystem

E00407400330

The driver’s airbag is located under the padded cov-er in the middle of the steering wheel. The front pas-senger’s airbag is contained in the instrument panelabove the glove box.

The driver’s airbag and the front passenger’s air-bag are designed to inflate at the same time even ifthe passenger seat is not occupied.

Deployment of front airbagsE00407501354

The front airbags ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOYwhen…

Head-on collision with a solid wall at speed of approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) or higher

Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded area between the arrows

Seat and seat belts

2-32

2

The front airbags are designed to deploy when thevehicle suffers a moderate to severe frontal impact.A typical condition is shown in the illustration. The front airbags will deploy if the severity of im-pact is above the designed threshold level, compa-rable to an approximately 25 km/h (16 mph) colli-sion when impacting straight into a solid wall thatdoes not move or deform. If the severity of the im-pact is below the above threshold level, the front air-bags may not deploy. However, this thresholdspeed will be considerably higher if the vehiclestrikes an object that absorbs the impact by eitherdeforming or moving (for example, another station-ary vehicle, pole or a guard rail). Because frontal collisions can easily move you outof position, it is important to always properly wearyour seat belts. Your seat belts will help keep youin a safe distance from the steering wheel and in-strument panel during the initial stages of airbag de-ployment. The initial stage of airbag inflation is themost forceful, and can possibly cause serious or fa-tal injuries. Moreover, the seat belts in your vehicleare your primary means of protection in a collision.The SRS airbags are designed to provide additionalprotection. Therefore, for your safety and the safe-ty of all occupants, be sure to always properly wearyour seat belts.

The front airbags MAY NOT DEPLOY when…With certain types of frontal collisions, the vehi-cle’s body structure is designed to absorb the shockto help protect the occupants from harm. (The vehi-cle body’s front area may deform significantly as itabsorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, thefront airbags may not deploy irrespective of the de-formation and damage to the vehicle body.

Examples of some typical conditions are shown inthe illustration. Because the front airbags do not protect the occu-pant in all types of frontal collisions, be sure to al-ways properly wear your seat belts.

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow objects

Vehicle slides under the rear body of a truck

Oblique frontal impacts

The front airbags ARE NOT DESIGNED TO DE-PLOY when…The front airbags are not designed to deploy in con-ditions where they cannot typically provide protec-tion to the occupant. Such conditions are shown inthe illustration. Because the front airbags do not protect the occu-pant in all types of collisions, be sure to always prop-erly wear your seat belts.

Rear end collisions

Side collisions

Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof

Seat and seat belts

2-33

2

The front airbags MAY DEPLOY when…The front airbags may deploy if the bottom of thevehicle suffers a moderate-to-severe impact (under-carriage damage).Examples of some typical conditions are shown inthe illustration.

Because the front airbags may deploy in certaintypes of unexpected impacts as shown in the illus-tration that can easily move you out of position, itis important to always properly wear your seatbelts. Your seat belts will help keep you a safe dis-tance from the steering wheel and instrument panelduring the initial stages of airbag deployment. Theinitial stage of airbag inflation is the most forcefuland can possibly cause serious or fatal injuries ifyou contact it at this stage.

Collision with an elevated median/island or kerb

Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole

Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the ground

WARNINGl Do not attach anything to the steering

wheel padded cover, such as trim materi-al, badges, etc. It might strike and injurean occupant if the airbag inflates.

l Do not set anything on, or attach any-thing to, the instrument panel above theglove box. It might strike and injure an oc-cupant if the airbag inflates.

WARNINGl Do not attach accessories to, or put them

in front of, the windscreen. These objectscould restrict the airbag inflation, orstrike and injure an occupant if the air-bags inflate.

l Do not put packages, pets or other ob-jects between the airbags and the driveror front passenger. It could affect airbagperformance, or could cause injury whenthe airbag inflates.

Seat and seat belts

2-34

2

WARNINGl Right after the airbag inflation, several

airbag system components will be hot. Donot touch them; you could be burned.

l The airbag system is designed to work on-ly once. Once the airbags have deployed,they will not work again. They mustpromptly be replaced, and we recom-mend you to have the entire airbag sys-tem inspected by a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.

Side airbag systemE00407600374

The side airbags (A) are contained in the driver andfront passenger seatbacks.The side airbag is designed to inflate only on theside of the vehicle that is impacted, even with nopassenger in the front seat.

The label shown here is attached to the seatbackswith a side airbag.

Curtain airbag systemE00409100474

The curtain airbags are contained in the front pil-lars and roof side rail. The curtain airbag is de-signed to inflate only on the side of the vehicle thatis impacted, even with no passenger in the frontseat or rear seat.

Deployment of side airbags and cur-tain airbags

E00407701011

The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE DE-SIGNED TO DEPLOY when…The side airbags and curtain airbags are designedto deploy when the vehicle suffers a moderate-to-severe side impact to the middle of the passengercompartment.The typical condition is shown in the illustration.

The seat belts in your vehicle are your primarymeans of protection in a collision. The SRS side air-bags and curtain airbags are designed to provide ad-ditional protection. Therefore, for your safety andthe safety of all occupants, be sure to always prop-erly wear your seat belts.

Seat and seat belts

2-35

2

The side airbags and curtain airbags MAY NOTDEPLOY when…With certain types of side collisions, the vehicle’sbody structure is designed to absorb the shock tohelp protect the occupants from harm. (The vehiclebody’s side area may deform significantly as it ab-sorbs the impact.) Under such circumstances, theside airbags and curtain airbags may not deploy ir-respective of the deformation and damage to the ve-hicle body.Examples of some typical conditions are shown inthe illustration.

Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do notprotect the occupant in all types of side collisions,be sure to always properly wear your seat belts.

Side impacts in an area away from the passenger compartment

Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle collides with theside of vehicle

Collision with a utility pole, tree or other narrow object

Oblique side impacts

Vehicle rolls onto its sideor roof

Seat and seat belts

2-36

2

The side airbags and curtain airbags ARE NOTDESIGNED TO DEPLOY when…The side airbags and curtain airbags are not de-signed to deploy in conditions where they cannotusually provide protection to the occupant. Typicalconditions are shown in the illustration.

Head-on collisions

Rear end collisions

Because the side airbags and curtain airbags do notprotect the occupant in all types of collisions, besure to always properly wear your seat belts.

WARNINGl The side airbags and curtain airbags are

designed to supplement the driver and pas-senger seat belts in certain side impacts.Seat belts should always be worn proper-ly, and the driver and passenger shouldsit well back and upright without leaningagainst the window or door.

WARNINGl The side airbags and curtain airbags in-

flate with great force. The driver andfront passenger should not put their armsout the window, and should not leanagainst the door, in order to reduce therisk of serious or possible fatal injuryfrom the deploying side airbag and cur-tain airbag.

WARNINGl Do not allow a child to kneel on the pas-

senger seat facing the passenger’s sidedoor, since the side airbags and curtainairbags inflate with great force.Otherwise, the child may be killed or seri-ously injured.

WARNINGl Do not allow any rear seat occupant to

hold onto the seatback of either frontseat, in order to reduce risk of injuryfrom the deploying side airbag. Specialcare should be taken with children.

l Do not place any objects near or in frontof the seatback of either front seat. Theycould interfere with proper side airbag in-flation, and also could cause injury ifthrown free by side airbag deployment.

l Do not place stickers, labels or additionaltrim on the seatback of either front seat.They could interfere with proper side air-bag inflation.

l Do not install seat covers on seats withside airbags. Do not re-cover seats thathave side airbags. This could interferewith proper side airbag inflation.

Seat and seat belts

2-37

2

WARNINGl Do not attach a microphone (A) or any

other device or object around the partwhere the curtain airbags (B) activatesuch as on the windscreen, side doorglass, front and rear pillars and roof sideor assist grips. When the curtain airbagsinflate, the microphone or other device orobject will be hurled with great force orthe curtain airbags may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or serious injury.

WARNINGl Do not put a hanger or any heavy or poin-

ted object on the coat hook.If the curtain airbag was activated, anysuch item could be propelled away withgreat force and could prevent the curtainairbag from inflating correctly. Hangclothes directly on the coat hook (withoutusing a hanger).Make sure there are no heavy or sharp ob-jects in the pockets of clothes that youhang on the coat hook.

l Do not allow a child to lean against orclose to the front door even if the child isseated in a child restraint system.The child’s head should also not beleaned against or be close to the area ofthe seat where the side airbag and cur-tain airbag are located. It is dangerous ifthe side airbag and curtain airbag inflate.Failure to follow all of these instructionscould lead to serious or fatal injury to thechild.

l We recommend work around and on theside airbags and curtain airbags systemto be done by MITSUBISHI MOTORSAuthorized Service Point. Improperwork could result in inadvertent deploy-ment of a side airbags and curtain air-bags, or could render a side airbags andcurtain airbags inoperative; either situa-tion could result in serious injury.

SRS warning lampE00407801201

There is a Supplemental Restraint System (“SRS”)warning lamp on the instrument panel. The systemchecks itself and the lamp tells you if there is a prob-lem. When the ignition switch is turned to the“ON” or “START” position, the warning lampshould illuminate for several seconds and thenshould go out. This means the system is ready. Ifan SRS airbag or pretensioner seat belt is not oper-ating properly, the warning lamp comes on andstays on.The SRS warning lamp is shared by the SRS airbagand the seat belt pretensioner system.

WARNINGl If any of the following conditions occur,

the SRS and/or seat belt pretensionersare not working properly, and we recom-mend you to have it inspected by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point immediately.

Seat and seat belts

2-38

2

WARNING• The SRS warning lamp does not illu-

minate when you start the vehicle.• The SRS warning lamp does not go

out after several seconds.• The SRS warning lamp illuminates

while driving.

SRS servicingE00407901244

WARNINGl We recommend any maintenance per-

formed on or near the components of theSRS to be performed by a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.Improper work on the SRS componentsor wiring could result in inadvertent de-ployment of the airbags, or could renderthe SRS inoperative; either situationcould result in serious injury.

l Do not modify your steering wheel, seatbelt retractor or any other SRS compo-nents. For example, replacement of thesteering wheel, or modifications to thefront bumper or body structure can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

l If your vehicle has sustained any damage,we recommend you to have the SRS in-spected to ensure it is in proper workingorder.

WARNINGl On vehicles equipped with side airbags,

do not modify your front seats, centre pil-lar and centre console.It can adversely affect SRS performanceand lead to possible injury.Also, if you have found any tear or openseam in the seat fabric at the portion nearthe side airbag, we recommend you tohave the seat inspected.

l On vehicles with the curtain airbags, ifyou have found any scratch, crack or dam-age to the portion of the front and rear pil-lars and roof side rail, we recommendyou to have the SRS inspected by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.

NOTEl When you transfer ownership of the vehicle

to some other person, we urge you to alertthe new owner that it is equipped with theSRS and refer the new owner to the applica-ble section in this owner’s manual.

l If you junk or scrap the vehicle, we urge youto first take the vehicle to a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point so thatthe SRS can be rendered safe.

Seat and seat belts

2-39

2

Instruments...................................................................................3-02Indication and warning lamps.......................................................3-06Indication lamps...........................................................................3-07Warning lamps..............................................................................3-08Centre information display*.........................................................3-10Combination headlamps and dipper switch..................................3-30Headlamp levelling switch...........................................................3-32Turn-signals lever.........................................................................3-33Hazard warning flasher switch.....................................................3-34Front fog lamp switch*.................................................................3-35Rear fog lamp switch....................................................................3-35Wiper and washer switch..............................................................3-36Rear window demister switch.......................................................3-40Horn switch...................................................................................3-41

Instruments and controls

3

InstrumentsE00500100876

Type A Type B

1- Tachometer2- Speedometer (km or mph + km/h)3- Fuel gauge

4- Odometer/Tripmeter5- Tripmeter reset button/Daytime dipper button*6- Water temperature gauge


3-02

3

SpeedometerE00500200880

Indication for km/hThe speedometer indicates the vehicle’s speed inkilometers per hour (km/h).

Indication for km/h and mphThe speedometer indicates the vehicle’s speed inmiles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).

TachometerE00500300780

The tachometer indicates the engine speed (r/min).The tachometer can help you obtain more economi-cal driving and also warns you of excessive enginespeeds.

CAUTIONl When driving, watch the tachometer to

make sure that the engine speed indica-tion does not rise into the red zone (exces-sive engine rpm).

Odometer/TripmeterE00500601113

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,odometer and tripmeter indications are given.

Type 1 Type 2

A- OdometerB- TripmeterC- Reset button

OdometerThe odometer indicates the total distance the vehi-cle has travelled.

TripmeterThe tripmeter indicates the distance travelled dur-ing a particular trip or period.There are two tripmeter displays: TRIP and

.TRIP can be used to measure the distance trav-elled since the current trip began. At the same time,TRIP can be used to measure the distance froman intermediate location.


3-03

3

Every time the reset button (C) is pressed lightly(less than 1 second), the tripmeter display changes(between TRIP and ).

Type 1

Type 2

To reset the tripmeterTo return the display to “0”, press the reset button(C) for more than 1 second. Only the currently dis-played value will be reset. If TRIP is dis-played, for example, only TRIP will be reset.

NOTEl Display TRIP and each have a maxi-

mum distance of 999.9 km (999.9 miles).l When disconnecting the battery terminal for

a long time, the memory of tripmeter displayTRIP and are cleared, and the dis-play returns to “0”.

Fuel gaugeE00500700902

The fuel gauge indicates the fuel level in the fueltank when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.

F- FullE- Empty

NOTEl When the engine on diesel-powered vehicles

fails to operate due to running out of fuel, itmay sometimes be difficult to start after refu-eling. This is due to air entering the fuel sys-tem. Therefore, air must be bled from the sys-tem. (Refer to “Bleeding the fuel system” onpage 6-05.)

Fuel lid markThe fuel lid mark (A) indicates that the fuel tank fill-er door is located on the left side of the vehicle. (Re-fer to “Filling the fuel tank” on page 02.)

Low fuel warning lampE00508100739

The warning lamp (A) comes on when the fuel lev-el is getting low (approx. 11 litres) with the igni-tion switch in the “ON” position. Refuel as soon aspossible.

NOTEl On inclines or curves, due to the movement

of fuel in the tank, the low fuel warning lampmay indicate incorrectly.


3-04

3

Water temperature gaugeE00500800479

The water temperature gauge indicates the enginecoolant temperature when the ignition switch is inthe “ON” position.

CAUTIONl If the indication needle enters the H zone

while the engine is running, it indicatesthat the engine is possibly overheating. Im-mediately park your vehicle in a safeplace and make the necessary correc-tions. (Refer to “Engine overheating” onpage 6-04.)While driving, care should always be tak-en to maintain the normal operating tem-perature.

Daytime dipper button (meter illumi-nation control)*

E00508800273

The rheostat can be adjusted while the headlampsor tail lamps turn on.

Turn the dial to adjust the illumination (meter, mul-ti centre display, audio system’s control panel, heat-er control panel, etc.) to the desired brightness.

1- To reduce brightness2- To increase brightness


3-05

3

Indication and warning lampsE00501501858

Type 1 Type 2

1. CRUISE indication lamp* ® p. 4-482. Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard warning indication lamps ® p. 3-073. High-beam indication lamp ® p. 3-074. Front fog lamp indication lamp* ® p. 3-075. Rear fog lamp indication lamp ® p. 3-076. Seat belt reminder/warning lamp ® p. 2-107. Low fuel warning lamp ® p. 3-048. 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp* ® p. 4-26, 4-319. Rear differential lock indication lamp* ® p. 4-33

10. Check engine warning lamp ® p. 3-0811. Diesel preheat indication lamp ® p. 3-0712. Oil pressure warning lamp ® p. 3-09

13. Fuel filter indication lamp ® p. 3-0714. Charge warning lamp ® p. 3-0915. A/T (automatic transmission) fluid temperature warning lamp (vehicles

with A/T) ® p. 4-1716. Overdrive off indication lamp (vehicles with A/T) ® p. 4-1717. Selector lever position indicator (vehicles with A/T) ® p. 4-15, 4-2218. Brake warning lamp ® p. 3-0819. Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC) OFF indication

lamp* ® p. 4-4620. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning lamp* ® p. 4-4321. Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC) indication lamp* ® p. 4-4622. Door ajar warning lamp ® p. 3-0923. Supplemental restraint system (SRS) warning lamp ® p. 2-38


3-06

3

Indication lampsE00501600012

Turn-signal indication lamps/Hazard warning indicationlamps

E00501700185

These indication lamps blink on and offwhen a turn-signal lamp is operating.

NOTEl If the blinking is too fast, the

cause may be a blown lamp bulbor a faulty turn-signal connection.

When the hazard warning lamp switch ispressed, all turn-signal lamps will flashon and off continuously.

High-beam indication lampE00501800115

This indication lamp illuminates whenthe high-beam is used.

Front fog lamp indicationlamp*

E00501900347

This indication lamp illuminates whilethe front fog lamps are on.

Rear fog lamp indication lampE00502000114

This indication lamp illuminates whilethe rear fog lamp is on.

Diesel preheat indication lampE00502300159

This indication lamp illuminates whenthe ignition switch is placed in the “ON”position. As the glow plug becomes hot,the lamp goes out and the engine can bestarted.

NOTEl If the engine is cold, the diesel pre-

heat indication lamp is on for a lon-ger time.

l When the engine has not been star-ted within about 5 seconds afterthe diesel preheat indication lampwent out, return the ignitionswitch to the “LOCK” position.Then, turn the switch to the “ON”position to preheat the engineagain.

l When the engine is warm, the die-sel preheat indication lamp doesnot come on even if the ignitionswitch is placed in the “ON” posi-tion.

CAUTIONl If the diesel preheat indication

lamp comes on after the engineis started, the engine speed maynot rise above the idling speedbecause of fuel freezing. In thiscase, keep the engine idling forabout ten minutes, then turnoff the ignition switch and im-mediately turn it on again toconfirm that the diesel preheatindication lamp is off.

Fuel filter indication lampE00509900170

This indication lamp illuminates whenthe ignition switch is turned to the “ON”position and goes off after the enginehas started. If it lights up while the en-gine is running, it indicates that waterhas accumulated inside the fuel filter; ifthis happens, remove the water from thefuel filter.Refer to “Removal of water from thefuel filter” on page 6-06.When the lamp goes out, you can re-sume driving. If it either does not go outor comes on from time to time, we rec-ommend you to have the vehicle inspec-ted.


3-07

3

Warning lampsE00502400017

Brake warning lampE00502501637

This lamp illuminates when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position,and goes off after a few seconds.Always make sure that the lamp goes offbefore driving.With the ignition switch in the “ON” po-sition, the brake warning lamp illumi-nates under the following conditions:l When the parking brake lever has

been engaged.l When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir falls to a low level.l When the brake force distribution

function is not operating correctly.(vehicles with anti-lock brake sys-tem)

CAUTIONl In the situations listed below,

brake performance may be com-promised or the vehicle may be-come unstable if brakes are ap-plied suddenly; consequently,avoid driving at high speeds orapplying the brakes suddenly.Furthermore, immediately thevehicle should be brought to astop in a safe location and tohave it checked.

CAUTION• The brake warning lamp

does not illuminate whenthe parking brake is appliedor does not turn off whenthe parking brake is re-leased.

• The ABS warning lamp andbrake warning lamp illumi-nate at the same time.For details, refer to “ABSwarning lamp” on page4-43. (vehicles with anti-lockbrake system)

• The brake warning lamp re-mains illuminated duringdriving.

l The vehicle should be broughtto a halt in the following man-ner when brake performancehas deteriorated.

• Depress the brake pedalharder than usual.Even if the brake pedalmoves down to the very endof its possible stroke, keep itpressed down hard.

• Should the brakes fail, useengine braking to reduceyour speed and carefullypull the parking brake leverto park your vehicle.Depress the brake pedal tooperate the stop lamp toalert the vehicles behind you.

Check engine warning lampE00502600657

This lamp is a part of an onboard diag-nostic system which monitors the emis-sions, engine and automatic transmissioncontrol systems.If a problem is detected in one of thesesystems, this lamp illuminates.Although your vehicle will usually bedrivable and not need towing, we recom-mend you to have the system checked assoon as possible.This lamp will also illuminate for a fewseconds when the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position. If it doesnot go off after a few seconds, we recom-mend you to have the vehicle checked.

CAUTIONl Prolonged driving with this

lamp on may cause further dam-age to the emission control sys-tem. It could also affect fueleconomy and drivability.

l If the lamp does not illuminatewhen the ignition switch isturned to the “ON” position,we recommend you to have thesystem checked.


3-08

3

CAUTIONl If the lamp illuminates while

the engine is running, avoiddriving at high speeds and werecommend you to have the sys-tem checked.During vehicle operation withthe lamp illuminated, the vehi-cle may not accelerate whenyou depress the accelerator ped-al.When the vehicle is stationarywith the lamp illuminated, youmust depress the brake pedalmore firmly than usual sincethe engine idling speed is high-er than usual and the vehiclewith an A/T has a stronger ten-dency to creep forward.

NOTEl The engine electronic control mod-

ule accommodating the onboard di-agnostic system has various faultdata (especially about the exhaustemission) stored.This data will be erased if a bat-tery cable is disconnected whichwill make a rapid diagnosis diffi-cult. Do not disconnect a batterycable when the check engine warn-ing lamp is ON.

Charge warning lampE00502700821

This lamp illuminates when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position,and goes off after the engine has started.

CAUTIONl If the lamp comes on while the

engine is running, the probablecause is as shown below.Park the vehicle immediately ata safe place and we recommendyou to have it checked.

• Broken drive belt or abnor-mality in the charging sys-tem. A broken drive belt cau-ses poor braking efficiency.Depress the brake pedalharder than usual to parkthe vehicle in a safe place.

Oil pressure warning lampE00502800620

This lamp illuminates when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “ON” position,and goes off after the engine has started.If it illuminates while the engine is run-ning, the oil pressure is too low.If the warning lamp illuminates whilethe engine is running, turn the engine offand have it inspected.

CAUTIONl If this lamp illuminates when

the engine oil level is not low,have it inspected.

l This warning lamp does not in-dicate the amount of oil in thecrankcase. This must be deter-mined by checking the oil levelon the dipstick, while the en-gine is switched off.

l If you continue driving withlow engine oil level or with thiswarning lamp illuminated, en-gine seizure may occur.

NOTEl The oil pressure warning lamp

should not be treated as an indica-tion of the engine’s oil level. Theoil level must be checked usingthe dipstick.

Door ajar warning lampE00503300475

This lamp illuminates when a door is ei-ther open or not completely closed.If the vehicle speed reaches approximate-ly 8 km/h (5 mph) with a door open orincompletely closed, the warning lampflashes 16 times and a buzzer simultane-ously sounds 16 times as a warning.


3-09

3

CAUTIONl Before moving your vehicle,

check that the warning lamp isOFF.

NOTEl It is possible to change the buzzer

setting for either of the followingtypes of operation. For further in-formation, we recommend you toconsult a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

• No buzzer operation (buzzerdisabled)

• Continuous buzzer operation

Centre information display*E00517800181

WARNINGl When operating the system for a pro-

longed period, make sure the vehicle isparked in a well ventilated area to avoidthe accumulation of toxic fumes insideand outside of the passenger compartment.

CAUTIONl The driver should not operate the display

while the vehicle is in motion.l When operating the system, stop the vehi-

cle in a safe area.

When the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” posi-tion, the screen switches on automatically.

NOTEl Placing a cellular phone in the monitor’s

small storage compartment may weaken thephone’s reception. This does not indicate afault with the system.

l Use of wireless devices such as transceiversor a cellular phone near the monitor maymake the following condition on the display.This does not indicate a fault with the system.

• The screen goes dark temporarily.• The compass may not show the correct di-

rection.l Depending on the angle of view, you may

see reddish horizontal lines on the monitor.The lines are a characteristic of the vacuumfluorescent display (VFD) used in the moni-tor. They do not indicate a fault.


3-10

3

1- Clock ® p. 3-19Indicates the time.

2- Electronic compassThis display shows the direction of the vehicle.

3- Frozen road warning ® p. 3-16Gives an indication when the outside temperature is 3 °C or lower.

4- Outside temperature ® p. 3-165- Centre information display indications

Indicates details of each display.6- “INFO” button

Used to select various kinds of information for display.7- Function buttons

Press this button to select options shown in the display.8- “ADJ” button

Used for adjusting the clock and for selecting settings displays.9- Display for function buttons

This display shows the options available for each function button.


3-11

3

Adjusting the timeE00518000063

Following modes are available for clock adjustment:l For vehicles with MITSUBISHI genuine au-

dio:“Automatic mode” and “Manual mode”

l Except for vehicles with MITSUBISHI genu-ine audio:“Manual mode” only

Automatic mode (MITSUBISHI genuine audio)The automatic adjustment mode can set the localtime automatically by using the signal from the lo-cal RDS stations. In this mode, “CT” (A) (ClockTime: sent with the RDS signal) is shown in the au-dio display.

NOTEl Automatic clock adjustment does not take

place while a settings display is shown.

Manual modeThe manual mode is also available in case the auto-matic mode shows the incorrect time when the ad-jacent local RDS stations are located in a differenttime zone. Refer to “Radio data system (RDS)” onpage 5-19.It is possible to manually adjust the time.Refer to “Changing the clock settings” on page3-19.

Changing the information displayE00517900124

Every time the “INFO” button is pressed lightly,the display can be changed to the following:


3-12

3

1- Audio information ® p. 5-142- Average fuel consumption ® p. 3-143- Driving range ® p. 3-144- Average speed ® p. 3-155- Outside temperature ® p. 3-166- Altimeter ® p. 3-167- Barometer ® p. 3-178- Calendar ® p. 3-189- Clock-only ® p. 3-18

10- Blank ® p. 3-18


3-13

3

Average fuel consumptionE00518200166

The average fuel consumption during the periodsince the last reset is shown in (A) and the momen-tary fuel consumption in (C). The average value ofthe fuel consumption is graphed every 5 minutesand the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (B).When you press the “MANUAL” function buttonin the auto reset mode, the mode will be changed tothe manual reset mode. When you press the “AU-TO” function button in the manual reset mode, themode will be changed to the auto reset mode.

Auto reset mode

Manual reset mode

NOTEl When you turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” position after turning it from the “ON”position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” positionin the manual reset mode, the auto resetmode will automatically be selected.

l When the average fuel consumption cannotbe calculated, “--.-” will be shown.

l The average and momentary fuel consump-tion change depending on the driving condi-tion (road condition, driving behavior, etc.).The indications may differ from the actualfuel consumption. Therefore, it is recommen-ded to use the indications as reference.

l The unit indication can be changed to your de-sired setting {km/L, L/100 km, mpg (UKGALLON), or mpg (US GALLON)}.Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24.

Resetting the average fuel consumptionPress the “RESET” function button to reset the aver-age fuel consumption indication.

NOTEl The average fuel consumption can be reset

separately for the auto reset mode and for themanual reset mode.

l When you turn the ignition switch to the“ON” position about 4 hours (or more) afterturning it from the “ON” position to the“ACC” or “LOCK” position in the auto resetmode, the average fuel consumption indica-tion will automatically be reset.

Driving rangeE00518300095

This value (A) shows the distance (in km or miles)that can be driven on the fuel remaining in the fueltank. The driving range is graphed every 5 minutesand the data for up to 4 hours are shown in (B).

NOTEl When the driving range is 50 km (30 miles)

or less, the display shows “----”.When it is 3,000 km (2,000 miles) or more,“3,000 km” or “2,000 miles” will be shown.

l When the driving range cannot be measured,the display shows “----”.


3-14

3

l The driving range is shown based on the ac-cumulated fuel consumption data, however,may be changed depending on the driving con-dition (road condition, driving behavior,etc.). If the battery terminals are disconnec-ted, the accumulated fuel consumption datawill be erased. It is recommended to use theindication as reference.

l When the vehicle is fueled, the driving rangewill be updated. However, if the amount offueling is small, the indication may not be cor-rect. Therefore, fill up the tank as much aspossible in case of fueling.

l When the vehicle is stopped on a steep slope,the value of the driving range may increase.This is caused by the fuel movement insidethe tank on the slope and is not deemed as afailure.

Resetting the driving rangePress the “RESET” function button to reset the driv-ing range plotted in graph.

NOTEl Pressing the “RESET” function button will

not reset the indication (C).l It is possible to set the display unit to km or

miles.Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24.

Average speedE00518400126

The average speed during the period since the lastreset is shown in (A) and the momentary speed in(C). The average value of the vehicle speed is graph-ed every 5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hoursare shown in (B).When you press the “MANUAL” function buttonin the auto reset mode, the mode will be changed tothe manual reset mode. When you press the “AU-TO” function button in the manual reset mode, themode will be changed to the auto reset mode.

Auto reset mode

Manual reset mode

NOTEl When you turn the ignition switch to the

“ON” position after turning it from the “ON”position to the “ACC” or “LOCK” positionin the manual reset mode, the auto resetmode will automatically be selected.

l When the average speed cannot be calcula-ted, “---” will be shown.

l The average and momentary speed change de-pending on the driving condition (road condi-tion, driving behavior, etc.). The indicationsmay differ from the actual speed. Therefore,it is recommended to use the indications asreference.

l The unit indication can be changed to your de-sired setting (km/h or mph).Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24.

Resetting the average speedPress the “RESET” function button to reset the aver-age vehicle speed.


3-15

3

NOTEl The average speed can be reset separately for

the auto reset mode and for the manual resetmode.

l When you turn the ignition switch to the“ON” position about 4 hours (or more) afterturning it from the “ON” position to the“ACC” or “LOCK” position in the auto resetmode, the average speed indication will auto-matically be reset.

Outside temperatureE00518500097

The outside temperature is graphed every 5 mi-nutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shown in(A). The current outside temperature is shown in (B).

Resetting the outside temperaturPress the “RESET” function button to reset thegraph of the outside temperature.

NOTEl Depending on factors such as the driving con-

ditions, the displayed temperature may varyfrom the actual outside temperature.

l It is possible to set the display unit to °C or °F.Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24.

Frozen road warningThis shows the temperature outside the vehicle.

When the outside air temperature drops belowabout 3 °C (37 °F), the alarm sounds and the out-side air temperature warning symbol (A) flashesfor about 10 seconds.

CAUTIONl There is a danger the road might be icy,

even when this symbol is not flashing, soplease take care when driving.

AltimeterE00518600069

The current elevation in units of 100 m (400 ft) isshown in (A). The elevation is graphed every5 minutes and the data for up to 4 hours are shownin (B).


3-16

3

To adjust the elevationIt is possible to adjust the currently indicated eleva-tion using the following function buttons:

“+”- Adjustment of elevationThe elevation increases by 100 m(400 ft) every time you lightly pushthe “+” button.If you continue pressing the buttonfor about 2 seconds or more, the ele-vation indication is fast-forwarded.Then the setting is changed to the el-evation selected.

“-”- Adjustment of elevationThe elevation decreases by 100 m(400 ft) every time you lightly pushthe “-” button.If you continue pressing the buttonfor about 2 seconds or more, the ele-vation indication is fast-forwarded.Then the setting is changed to the el-evation selected.

NOTEl The elevation is determined from changes in

atmospheric pressure. Depending on weatherconditions, the indicated elevation may differfrom the actual elevation. Variations in atmos-pheric pressure can cause different elevationsto be shown even in the same location. Thisbehavior does not indicate a fault. Use the in-dication as a guide only.

Resetting the elevationPress the “RESET” function button to reset the ele-vation plotted in graph.


not reset the indication (C).l It is possible to set the display unit to m or ft.

Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24.

BarometerE00518700044

This display shows the atmospheric pressure at thepresent location in (A). The atmospheric pressurevalues are graphed every 5 minutes and the data forup to 4 hours are shown in (B).

Resetting the atmospheric pressurePress the “RESET” function button to reset the at-mospheric pressure plotted in graph.


3-17

3


not reset the indication (C).l It is possible to set the display unit to hPa,

mb, kPa, or inHg.Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24.

CalendarE00518800032

The date is shown. The calendar pattern can bechanged to your desired setting.Refer to “Changing the calendar setting” on page3-23.

Clock-onlyE00518900033

Only the clock is shown. The time notation can bechanged to your desired setting. (12 hour/24 hour)

Refer to “User customization” on page 3-24.

BlankE00519000015

The whole display can be turned into blank. In thiscase, buttons remain illuminated.

NOTEl If you operate the audio system, the audio dis-

play pops up.

Selecting settings displaysE00519100090

Every time the “ADJ” button is pressed lightly, thedisplay can be changed to the following:

CAUTIONl The driver should not operate the display

while the vehicle is in motion.l When operating the system, stop the vehi-

cle in a safe area.

1- Changing the clock settings ® p. 3-192- Adjusting the display brightness ® p. 3-203- Correcting the compass ® p. 3-214- Changing the calendar setting ® p. 3-235- User customization ® p. 3-246- Adjusting the barometer ® p. 3-28


3-18

3

Changing the clock settingsE00519200088

1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the clock set-ting display.

2. It is possible to adjust the clock using the func-tion buttons.

“H”- Adjust “hour”.The indication increases by one hour, ev-ery time you lightly press the “H” func-tion button. If you continue pressing thebutton for about 2 seconds or more, theindication is fast-forwarded, and then thesetting is changed to the hour selected.

“M”- Adjust “minute”.The indication increases by one minute,every time you lightly press the “M” func-tion button. If you continue pressing thebutton for about 2 seconds or more, theindication is fast-forwarded, and then thesetting is changed to the minute selected.

“SET”- To reset the minutes to zero.The time is adjusted as described belowby pressing the function button “SET”.l 10:30-11:29 • • • • change to 11:00l 11:30-12:29 • • • • change to 12:00In this occasion, the display flashes twiceand then the setting is changed.

3. After making the adjustment, press the “IN-FO” button to select the information display.


3-19

3

Adjusting the display brightnessE00519300034

The display brightness can be adjusted at 13 levelsfor both daytime and nighttime.l BRIGHTNESS FOR DAY TIME

The display brightness is adjusted when thelight switch is in the “OFF” position.

l BRIGHTNESS FOR NIGHT TIMEThe display brightness is adjusted when thelight switch is in the “ ” or “ ” position.

1. Press the “ADJ” button to show the bright-ness adjusting display.

2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-lect the setting you wish to adjust (daytimeor nighttime). Then press the “SELECT” func-tion button.

3. Use the function buttons to adjust the bright-ness.

“+”- To make the display brighterThe display becomes brighter by onestep, every time you lightly press the“+” function button. If you continue press-ing the button for about 2 seconds ormore, the indication is fast-forwarded.

“-”- To make the display darkerThe display becomes darker by one step,every time you lightly press the“-” function button. If you continue press-ing the button for about 2 seconds ormore, the indication is fast-forwarded.

“SET”- To set the brightnessPress function button “SET” to set thenew brightness. The display will flashtwice.

NOTEl If you next wish to adjust the other adjust-

ment setting (daytime or nighttime), pressthe “ADJ” button or “BACK” function button.

4. After adjustment, press the “INFO” button toselect the information display.


3-20

3

NOTEl As the display brightness can be adjusted in

the center information display only, the bright-ness inside the meter cannot be changed.

Correcting the compassE00519400178

This compass shows the direction of the vehicle bythe 8 azimuth system.

NOTEl This system uses the earth’s magnetic field,

and so may not show the correct direction de-pending on the traffic condition or in the fol-lowing places where the earth’s magneticfield is disrupted.

• Car parks located in buildings and tunnels• Expressways and underground cables• Area over the subway• Transforming station• Areas along the railroad

In these cases, the correct direction will bedisplayed once the vehicle returns to a placewhere the earth’s magnetic field is stable.

l Do not install ski racks, antennas, etc. whichare attached to the vehicle by means of a mag-net. They affect the operation of the compass.

Setting the declinationThe declination is the difference between truenorth (the direction of the geographic north pole)and where a compass needle points to. Since the dec-lination varies from place to place, it needs to beset for each region. Otherwise the compass will notshow the correct direction.Set the declination by the following steps:

NOTEl The default declination setting is 0 degrees.

In accordance with the illustration, set the dec-lination setting to the declination contour near-est to a region where you drive the vehicle.

l The declination can be set at intervals of1 degrees, from 28 degrees west (W28) to28 degrees east (E28).

With a settings display showing, press the “ADJ”button and select “COMPASS VARIANCE”.

1. Press the function button for “SELECT”.

2. Press the function button for “←” or “→” toset the desired declination. Pressing “←” or “→” for more than 1 sec-ond makes the value change rapidly.


3-21

3

3. When the declination adjustment has beencompleted, press the “SET” function button.

Setting the compassThe compass is usually calibrated automaticallywhen the vehicle is moving. At times when com-plete calibration is not possible, no compass indica-tions are given. Manually set the compass using thefollowing procedure.

NOTEl If your vehicle has a sunroof, keep the sun-

roof closed when calibrating the compass.Having the sunroof open when calibratingthe compass could render the compass un-able to correctly show directions.

With a settings display showing, press the “ADJ”button and select “COMPASS CALIBRATION”.



3. Turn the vehicle slowly through 360 degreesin a safe, open area with no buildings and oth-er vehicles.

NOTEl If you wish to stop calibrating the compass

part-way through the procedure, press the “IN-FO” button or “ADJ” button.


3-22

3

NOTEl The “Completed the calibration”. message

may be displayed even if you terminate theturn before it is complete and return to the ve-hicle’s original direction. The compass maynot be properly calibrated in this case, so youmust turn the vehicle through at least360 degrees.

4. The compass setting will finish automatical-ly and the words “COMPASS CALIBRA-TION COMPLETE” will appear on thescreen.

Changing the calendar settingE00519500036

The date and the calendar indication patterns canbe changed.

Date setting1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the calendar

setting display.

2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-lect “CALENDAR ADJUST”. Then pressthe “SELECT” function button.

3. Use the function buttons to set the calendar.

“→”- Select “YEAR”, “MONTH”, “DAY”you wish to change.“YEAR”, “MONTH”, and “DAY” arechanged over by turns every time youlightly press the “→” function button.

“+”- Change “YEAR”, “MONTH”, “DAY”you have selected.The indication is changed to your de-sired date every time you lightly pressthe “+” function button.If you continue pressing the button forabout 2 seconds or more, the indicationis forwarded.

“SET”- Determine the date.Press the “SET” function button. Thenthe display flashes twice and the settingis changed.

NOTEl The year changes in the following sequence:

2009 → 2010 → … 2099 → 2009.l You can return to the previous display by

pressing the “BACK” function button.


3-23

3

4. After setting the date, press the “INFO” but-ton to return to the information display.

Changing the calendar pattern1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the calendar

setting display. Press the “←” or “→” func-tion button to select “CALENDAR PAT-TERN SELECT”. Then press the “SELECT”function button.

2. Press function button “←” or “→” to selectyour desired indication pattern.

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

3. Press the function button “SET”. The displaywill flash twice, and the indication patternwill be updated.

NOTEl You can return to the previous display by


4. After setting the calendar pattern, press the“INFO” button to return to the informationdisplay.

User customizationE00519600138

You can set the indication of unit, language, andthe time notation.In addition, you can return these settings to the fac-tory default settings.


3-24

3

Selecting the item to set1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the user cus-

tomization display.

2. Press the function button “←” or “→” to se-lect the item you wish to set.l “UNIT”: Changing the unitl “LANGUAGE”: Changing the languagel “12h ↔ 24h”: Changing the time formatl “DEFAULT”: Resetting to factory settingsPush the function button “SELECT”. The set-ting display for your selected item will appear.

Changing display unitsIt is possible to change the display units for the fuelconsumption, driving range, average speed, outsidetemperature, elevation, and atmospheric pressureas shown below.

FUEL ECONOMYkm/L → L/100 km → mpg(UK GALLON) → mpg(US GALLON)

RANGE km → miles

SPEED km/h → mph

OUTSIDE TEM-PERATURE °C → °F

ELEVATION m → ft

BAROMETER hPa → mb → kPa → inHg

l Changing the display unit for fuel consump-

tion

1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-lect “FUEL ECONOMY”. Then press the“SELECT” function button.

2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-lect “km/L”. Then press the “SET” functionbutton. The display will flash twice, and thedisplay unit will be updated to the selectedone.



3. After setting, press the “INFO” button to re-turn to the information display.


3-25

3

Changing the languageIt is possible to set the display language of the cen-tre information display to English, Spanish,French, German, Portuguese or Italian.l To change the display language to English

1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-lect “ENGLISH”. Then press the “SET” func-tion button. The display will flash twice, andthen the setting is completed to the languageselected.



2. After setting the language, press the “INFO”button to return to the information display.

Changing the time notationIt is possible set the time notation to 12-hour or24-hour.

1. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-lect “12h TIME NOTATION” or “24h TIMENOTATION”. Then press the “SET” func-tion button. The display will flash twice, andthe display time notation will be updated tothe selected one.

12-hour 24-hour



2. After setting the time notation, press the “IN-FO” button to return to the information dis-play.

Returning display items to their factory settingsYou can return to the setting of each item to the fac-tory default settings.


3-26

3

NOTEl The factory settings are as follows:

• Fuel consumption: L/100 km• Driving range: km• Average speed: km/h• Outside temperature: °C• Elevation: m• Atmospheric pressure: hPa• Display language: English• Time notation: 12-hour

1. Push the “SELECT” function button.

2. Press the “←” function button to select“YES”.

3. Press the “SELECT” function button.

4. Once more press the “←” function button toselect “YES”.

5. Press the “SET” function button.

6. The display shown below will appear, andthe display items will return to their factorysettings.


3-27

3

NOTEl If the battery terminals are disconnected, the

settings for the date and time may be erased.If this happens, please set the date and timeagain.

Adjusting the barometerE00524400033

It is possible to adjust the barometer indication andreturn it to the factory setting.

NOTEl It is not necessary to adjust the barometer be-

cause it has been adjusted at the factory.However, if you wish, adjust it using an accu-rate barometer.

To adjust the barometer1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the barome-

ter adjustment display.

2. Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-lect the “BAROMETER ADJUST” display.Then press the “SELECT” function button.

3. Adjust the barometer by pressing the func-tion buttons.

“+”- To adjust the barometerEach gentle press of the “+” function but-ton will increase the indicated barometerby 2 hPa. If you continue pressing the but-ton for about 2 seconds or longer, the in-dication is fast-forwarded.

“-”- To adjust the barometerEach gentle press of the “-” function but-ton will decrease the indicated barometerby 2 hPa. If you continue pressing the but-ton for about 2 seconds or longer, the in-dication is fast-forwarded.

“SET”- To set the barometerPress the “SET” function button. The dis-play will flash twice, and the new settingwill be established.




3-28

3

4. After setting the barometer adjust, press the“INFO” button to return to the informationdisplay.

Resetting to the factory setting1. Press the “ADJ” button to select the barome-

ter adjustment display.Press the “←” or “→” function button to se-lect the “BAROMETER DEFAULT” dis-play. Then press the “SELECT” function but-ton.

2. Press the “SET” function button. The displaywill flash twice and the barometer indicationwill return to the factory settings.

NOTEl Although the barometer value is changed to

the factory setting, a barometer unit you haveselected is unchanged.

l You can return to the previous display bypressing the “BACK” function button.

3. After setting the barometer default, press the“INFO” button to return to the informationdisplay.

Care of the monitorE00519700012

If the monitor becomes covered in fingerprints orotherwise dirty, clean it with a soft and dry cloth.

NOTEl Don’t use a wet cloth or abrasive cleaner as

this may cause damage.


3-29

3

Combination headlamps anddipper switch

E00506001728

Headlamps

NOTEl Do not leave the headlamps and other lamps

on for a long time while the engine is station-ary (not running). A run-down battery couldresult.

l When it rains or when the vehicle has beenwashed, the inside of the lens sometimes be-comes foggy. This is the same phenomenonas when window glass mists up on a humidday, and does not indicate a functional prob-lem. When the lamp is switched on, the heatwill remove the fog. However, if water gath-ers inside the lamp, we recommend you tohave it checked.

Type 1Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.

OFF All lamps off

Position, tail, licence plate and instrumentpanel lamps on

Headlamps and other lamps go on

Type 2Rotate the switch to turn on the lamps.

OFF All lamps off

AUTO

With the ignition switch in the “ON” po-sition, headlamps, position, tail, licenceplate, and instrument panel lamps turnon and off automatically in accordancewith outside light level. All lamps turnoff automatically when the ignitionswitch is turned to the “OFF” position.

Position, tail, licence plate and instru-ment panel lamps on

Headlamps and other lamps go on

NOTEl The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-

trol can be adjusted.For further information, we recommend youto consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

l When the headlamps are turned off by the au-tomatic on/off control with the ignitionswitch in the “ON” position, the front foglamps (if so equipped) and rear fog lamp alsogo off. When the headlamps are subsequent-ly turned back on by the automatic on/off con-trol, the front fog lamps also come on but therear fog lamp stays off. If you wish to turnthe rear fog lamp back on, operate the switchagain.

l Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automat-ic on/off control by affixing a sticker or labelto the windscreen.


3-30

3

l If the lamps do not turn on or off with theswitch in the “AUTO” position, manually op-erate the switch and we recommend you tohave your vehicle checked.

[Vehicles with Daytime Running Lamp]When the ignition switch is in the “ON” positionand the lamp switch is set to the “OFF” position,the low beam of the headlamps, tail lamps, etc.,will illuminate.

Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) au-to-cutout functionl If the key is turned to the “LOCK” or

“ACC” position or removed from the igni-tion switch and the lamps will stay on forabout 3 minutes without opening the driver’sdoor while the lamp switch in the “ ” posi-tion, the lamps automatically turn off.

l If the key is turned to the “LOCK” or“ACC” position or removed from the igni-tion switch and the driver’s door is openedwithin 3 minutes while the lamp switch inthe “ ” position, a buzzer will sound towarn the driver that the lamps have not beenturned off, and these lamps will automatical-ly turn off.

NOTEl The lamp auto-cutout will not function when

the lamp switch is in the “ ” position.l When the ignition key has been turned to ei-

ther the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or re-moved from the ignition switch with thelamp switch in the “ ” position, and thelamp switch is returned to the “OFF” posi-tion within approximately 3 minutes, the auto-cutout function will not be activated.

When you want to keep the lamps onl Turn the switch in the “OFF” position to

switch off all lamps while the ignition key isin the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or re-move it from the ignition switch.

l Turn on the lamps with the switch in the“ ” or “ ” position again, then thelamps will remain on.

NOTEl It is possible to alter the auto-cutout function

such that:• Auto-cutout function is never activated.

For details, we recommend you to consult aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

Lamp monitor buzzerE00506100184

If the driver’s door is opened when the ignition keyis in the “LOCK” or “ACC” position or removedfrom the ignition switch while the lamps are on, abuzzer will sound to remind the driver to turn offthe lamps. When the lamp auto-cutout functionacts, the buzzer will stop automatically. When thisfunction does not act, turn off the lamp switch tostop the buzzer.

Dipper (High/Low beam change)E00506200286

When the lamp switch is in the “ ” position, thebeam changes from high to low (or low to high)each time the lever is pulled to (1). While the high-beam is on, the high-beam indication lamp in the in-strument cluster will also illuminate.

Headlamp flasherE00506300157

The high-beams flash when the lever is pulled slight-ly (2), and will go off when it is released.When the high-beam is on, the high-beam indica-tion lamp in the instrument cluster will also illumi-nate.


3-31

3

NOTEl The high-beams can also flash when the

lamp switch is in the “OFF” position.l If you turn the lamps off with the headlamps

set to high-beam illumination, the headlampsare automatically returned to their low-beamsetting when the lamp switch is next turnedto the “ ” position.

Headlamp levelling switchE00506400741

The angle of the headlamp beam varies dependingon the load carried by the vehicle.The headlamp levelling switch can be used to ad-just the headlamp illumination distance (when thelower beam is illuminated) so that the headlamps’glare does not distract other drivers.Set the switch (referring to the following table) tothe appropriate position according to the number ofpeople and the load in the vehicle.

CAUTIONl Always perform adjustments before driv-

ing.Do not attempt to adjust while driving, asit could cause an accident.

NOTEl When adjusting the beam position, first put

the dial in the “0” position (the highest beamposition).

Single cab

Vehicle condi-tion

Switch position “0” “2”

: 1 person:Full luggage loading

Switch position 0- Driver onlySwitch position 2- Driver + Full luggage loading

Club cab

Vehicle condi-tion

Switch position “0” “2” or “3” or“4”



3-32

3


{Vehicles for Russia, Kazakh-stan and Ukraine with heavyduty suspension}

Switch position 3- Driver + Full luggage loading{Vehicles for Russia, Kazakh-stan and Ukraine withoutheavy duty suspension}{Except for vehicles for Rus-sia, Kazakhstan and Ukrainewith heavy duty suspension}

Switch position 4- Driver + Full luggage loading{Except for vehicles for Rus-sia, Kazakhstan and Ukrainewithout heavy duty suspen-sion}

Double cab

Vehicle condi-tion

Switch position “0” “2” or “3” or“4”



{Vehicles for Russia, Kazakh-stan and Ukraine with heavyduty suspension}

Switch position 3- Driver + Full luggage loading{Vehicles for Russia, Kazakh-stan and Ukraine withoutheavy duty suspension}{Except for vehicles for Rus-sia, Kazakhstan and Ukrainewith heavy duty suspension}

Switch position 4- Driver + Full luggage loading{Except for vehicles for Rus-sia, Kazakhstan and Ukrainewithout heavy duty suspen-sion}

Turn-signals leverE00506501114

The turn-signal lamps flash when the lever is oper-ated (with the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-tion). At the same time, the turn-signal indicationlamps flash.

1- Turn-signalsWhen making a normal turn, use position(1). The lever will return automatically whencornering is completed.There are times when the lever will not re-turn after cornering. This occurs when thesteering wheel is turned only slightly.In such cases, return the lever by hand.

2- Lane-change signalsWhen changing lanes, use position (2). Itwill return to the neutral position when re-leased.

NOTEl If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, the

bulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burnedout. We recommend you to have the vehicleinspected.


3-33

3

l It is possible to activate the following func-tions. For further information, we recom-mend you to consult a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.

• Sounding of a buzzer as the turn-signallamps flash.

• Flashing of the turn-signal lamps and theindication lamp in the instrument clusterwhen the lever is operated with the igni-tion switch in the “ACC” position

• Flashing of the turn-signal lamps and theindication lamp in the instrument clusterthree times when you move the lever to(2) slightly then release it

• The time required to operate the lever forthe 3-flash function can be adjusted

Hazard warning flasher switchE00506600802

Use the hazard warning flasher switch when the ve-hicle has to be parked on the road for any emergency.The hazard warning flashers can always be operat-ed, regardless of the position of the ignition key. Push the switch to turn on the hazard warning flash-ers; push the switch again to turn them off.When this switch is operated, all turn-signal lampsflash continuously, as do the turn-signal indicationlamps in the instrument cluster.

NOTEl If the lamps are kept flashing for a long time,

the battery will be discharged, resulting inhard engine starting or no start condition.

l It is possible to cause a buzzer to sound intime with flashing of the turn-signal lamps.For further information, we recommend youto consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

l If the lamp flashes unusually quickly, thebulb in a turn-signal lamp may have burnedout.We recommend you to have the vehicle in-spected.


3-34

3

Front fog lamp switch*E00506800934

The front fog lamps can be used only when the head-lamps or tail lamps are on. Turn the knob once inthe “ON” direction to turn on the front fog lamps.The indication lamp in the instrument cluster willalso come on. To turn the front fog lamps off, turnthe knob once in the “OFF” direction. While therear fog lamp is on, turn the knob twice in the“OFF” direction to turn the front fog lamps off.The knob will automatically return to its original po-sition when you release it.

NOTEl The front fog lamps are automatically turned

off when the headlamps or tail lamps areturned off. To turn the front fog lamps onagain, turn the knob in the “ON” direction af-ter turning on the headlamps or tail lamps.

l Do not use fog lamps except in conditions offog, otherwise excessive lamp glare may tem-porarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.

l In case of vehicles with Daytime RunningLamp, the front fog lamp can be operatedeven if the lamp switch is set to the “OFF”position, because the low beam of the head-lamps, tail lamps, etc. illuminate when the ig-nition key is at the “ON” position.

Rear fog lamp switchE00506900313

The rear fog lamp illuminates only when the head-lamps or front fog lamps (if so equipped) are on.An indication lamp in the instrument cluster comeson when the rear fog lamp is turned on. [Vehicles without front fog lamps]Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turnon the rear fog lamp. To turn the rear fog lamp off,turn the knob once in the “OFF” direction. Theknob will automatically return to its original posi-tion when you release it. [Vehicles with front fog lamps]Turn the knob once in the “ON” direction to turnon the front fog lamps. Turn the knob once more inthe “ON” direction to turn on the rear fog lamp. Toturn the rear fog lamp off, turn the knob once in the“OFF” direction. Turn the knob once more in the“OFF” direction to turn off the front fog lamps.The knob will automatically return to its original po-sition when you release it.


3-35

3

NOTEl The rear fog lamp is automatically turned off

when the headlamps and front fog lamps (ifso equipped) are turned off.

l To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn theknob once in the “ON” direction after turn-ing on the headlamps. (Vehicles withoutfront fog lamps)

l To turn the rear fog lamp on again, turn theknob twice in the “ON” direction after turn-ing on the headlamps. (Vehicles with frontfog lamps)

l In case of vehicles with Daytime RunningLamp, the rear fog lamp can be operatedeven if the lamp switch is set to the “OFF”position, because the low beam of the head-lamps, tail lamps, etc. illuminate when the ig-nition key is at the “ON” position.

Wiper and washer switchE00507101191

CAUTIONl If the washer is used in cold weather, the

washer fluid sprayed against the glassmay freeze, which may hinder visibility.Warm the glass with the defroster or rearwindow demister before using the washer.

Windscreen wipersE00516900303

Except for vehicles with rain sensorThe windscreen wipers can be operated with the ig-nition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do notoperate the wipers until the ice has melted and theblades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may bedamaged.

MIST- Misting functionThe wipers will operate once.

OFF- OffINT- Speed sensitive intermittent operation

Interval between wipers varies in ac-cordance with vehicle speed.

LO- SlowHI- Fast


3-36

3

To adjust intermittent intervalsWith the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive) posi-tion, the intermittent intervals can be adjusted byturning the knob (A).

1- Fast2- Slow

NOTEl The speed-sensitive-operation function of the

windscreen wipers can be deactivated.For further information, we recommend youto consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

Misting functionMove the lever in the direction of the arrow and re-lease, to operate the wipers once.Use this function when you are driving in mist ordrizzle.

If the lever is held in the upward position (MIST),the wipers continue operating until the lever is re-leased.

Vehicles with rain sensorE00526400226

The windscreen wipers can be operated with the ig-nition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do notoperate the wipers until the ice has melted and theblades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may bedamaged.

MIST- Misting functionThe wipers will operate once.

OFF- OffAUTO- Auto-wiper control

Rain sensorThe wipers will automatically oper-ate depending on the degree of wet-ness on the windscreen.

LO- SlowHI- Fast

Rain sensorCan only be used when the ignition switch is in the“ON” position.If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the rainsensor (A) will detect the extent of rain (or snow,other moisture, dust, etc.) and the wipers will oper-ate automatically.Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the wind-screen is dirty and the weather is dry.


3-37

3

Wiper operation under these conditions can scratchthe windscreen and damage the wipers. CAUTION

l With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-tion and the lever in the “AUTO” posi-tion, the wipers may automatically oper-ate in the situations described below.If your hands get trapped, you could suf-fer injuries or the wipers could malfunc-tion. Be sure to turn the ignition switch tothe “OFF” position or move the lever tothe “OFF” position to deactivate the rainsensor.

• When cleaning the outside surface ofthe windscreen, if you touch the rainsensor.

• When cleaning the outside surface ofthe windscreen, if you wipe with acloth the rain sensor.

• When using an automatic car wash.• A physical shock is applied to the wind-

screen.• A physical shock is applied to the rain

sensor.

NOTEl To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this

operation of the wipers does not take placewhen the vehicle is stationary and the ambi-ent temperature is about 0 °C or lower.

l Do not cover the sensor by affixing a stickeror label to the windscreen. Also, do not putany water-repellent coating on the wind-screen. The rain sensor would not be able todetect the extent of rain, and the wipersmight stop working normally.

l In the following cases, the rain sensor maybe malfunctioning.Have the vehicle inspected by aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

• When the wipers operate at a constant in-terval despite changes in the extent of rain.

• When the wipers do not operate eventhough it is raining.

l The wipers may automatically operate whenthings such as rain, dust, mud, insects, treesap, oil or salt are affixed to the windscreenon top of the rain sensor or when the wind-screen is frozen. (Wrong operation may alsooccur due to strong electromagnetic waves,etc.) Objects affixed to the windscreen willstop the wipers when the wipers cannot re-move them.To make the wipers operate again, place thelever in the “LO” or “HI” position.

l Contact a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point when replacing the wind-screen or reinforcing the glass around the sen-sor.


3-38

3

To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensorWith the lever in the “AUTO” (rain sensor) posi-tion, it is possible to adjust the sensitivity of therain sensor by turning the knob (A).

“+”- Higher sensitivity to rain“-”- Lower sensitivity to rain

NOTEl It is possible to activate the following func-

tions. For further information, we recom-mend you to consult a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point.

• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-tive) can be changed to intermittent oper-ation (vehicle-speed sensitive).

• Automatic operation (rain droplet sensi-tive) can be changed to intermittent oper-ation (except vehicle-speed sensitive).

Misting functionMove the lever in the direction of the arrow and re-lease, to operate the wipers once.Use this function when you are driving in mist ordrizzle.

If the lever is held in the upward position (MIST),the wipers continue operating until the lever is re-leased.

The wipers will operate once if the lever is movedto the “AUTO” position and the knob (A) is turnedin the “+” direction when the ignition switch is“ON” position.

Windscreen washerE00507200805

The windscreen washer can be operated with the ig-nition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the wind-screen by pulling the lever towards you. The wip-ers operate automatically several times while thewasher fluid is being sprayed.On a vehicle equipped with a headlamp washer, theheadlamp washer operates together with the wind-screen washer the first time the windscreen washeris used if the headlamps are on.

CAUTIONl If the washer is used in cold weather, the

washer fluid sprayed against the glassmay freeze resulting in poor visibility.Heat the glass with the defroster or demis-ter before using the washer.

NOTEl It is possible to spray washer fluid without ac-

tivating the wipers. To do so, hold the leverin the pulled position and turn the ignitionswitch to the “ON” or “ACC” position.


3-39

3

l It is possible to cause the wipers never to op-erate when washer fluid is sprayed. For fur-ther information, we recommend you to con-sult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.

Headlamp washer switch*E00510100273

The headlamp washer can be operated when the ig-nition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position andthe headlamps are on. Push the button once and the washer fluid will besprayed on to the headlamps.

NOTEl If the ignition switch is in the “ON” or

“ACC” position and the headlamps are on,the headlamp washer operates together withthe windscreen washer the first time the wind-screen washer lever is pulled.

Precautions to observe when using wip-ers and washers

E00507600014

l If the moving wipers become blocked by iceor other deposits on the glass, the motor mayburn out even if the wiper switch is turned toOFF. If obstruction occurs, park your vehiclein a safe place, turn off the ignition, andclean the deposits from the glass so that thewipers operate smoothly.

l Do not use the wipers when the glass is dry.They may scratch the glass surface or theblades may prematurely wear out.

l Before using the wipers in cold weather,check that the wiper blades are not frozen on-to the glass. The motor may burn out if thewipers are used with the blades frozen ontothe glass.

l Avoid using the washer continuously formore than 20 seconds. Do not operate thewasher when the fluid reservoir is empty.Otherwise, the motor may burn out.

l Periodically check the level of washer fluidin the reservoir and refill if required.During cold weather, add a recommendedwasher solution that will not freeze in thewasher reservoir. Failure to do so could re-sult in loss of washer function and frost dam-age to the system components.

Rear window demister switchE00507900961

The rear window demister switch can be operatedwith the ignition switch in the “ON” position.Push the switch to turn on the rear window demis-ter. It will be turned off automatically in about 20minutes. To turn off the demister within about 20minutes, push the switch again.The indication lamp (A) will illuminate while thedemister is on.

Type 1

Type 2


3-40

3

NOTEl If your vehicle is equipped with heated mir-

rors, these operate in conjunction with the de-mister. Refer to “Heated mirror” on page4-09.

l The demister switch is not to melt snow butto clear mist. Remove snow before use of thedemister switch.

l To avoid unnecessary discharge of the bat-tery, do not use the rear window demister dur-ing starting of the engine or when the engineis not running. Turn the demister off immedi-ately after the window is clear.

l When cleaning the inside of the rear win-dow, use a soft cloth and wipe gently alongthe heater wires, being careful not to damagethe wires.

l Do not allow objects to touch the inside ofthe rear window glass, or damaged or brokenwires may result.

Horn switchE00508000608

Press the steering wheel on or around the “ ” mark.

Type 1

Type 2


3-41

3

Economical driving.......................................................................4-02Driving, alcohol and drugs...........................................................4-02Safe driving techniques................................................................4-03Running-in recommendations.......................................................4-03Parking brake................................................................................4-05Parking..........................................................................................4-06Steering wheel height adjustment.................................................4-07Inside rear-view mirror.................................................................4-08Outside rear-view mirrors.............................................................4-08Ignition switch..............................................................................4-10Steering wheel lock......................................................................4-11Starting..........................................................................................4-11Manual transmission.....................................................................4-13Automatic transmission 4A/T.......................................................4-15Automatic transmission Sports Mode 5A/T.................................4-19Easy select 4WD*.........................................................................4-24Super select 4WD*.......................................................................4-28Rear differential lock*..................................................................4-334-wheel drive operation................................................................4-37Inspection and maintenance following rough road oper-

ation..........................................................................................4-39Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles..........................4-39Limited-slip differential*..............................................................4-41Braking.........................................................................................4-41Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*...................................................4-42Power steering system..................................................................4-44Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC)*.............................4-45Cruise control*.............................................................................4-47Cargo loads...................................................................................4-51Trailer towing...............................................................................4-52

Starting and driving

4

Economical drivingE00600100620

For economical driving, there are some technical re-quirements that have to be met. The prerequisitefor low fuel consumption is a properly adjusted en-gine. In order to achieve longer life of the vehicleand the most economical operation, we recommendyou to have the vehicle checked at regular intervalsin accordance with the service standards.Fuel economy and generation of exhaust gas andnoise are highly influenced by personal driving hab-its as well as the particular operating conditions.The following points should be observed in orderto minimize wear of brakes, tyres and engine aswell as to reduce environmental pollution.

StartingAvoid rapid acceleration and sudden starts; such op-eration will result in higher fuel consumption.

ShiftingShift only at an appropriate speed and enginespeed. Always use the highest gear possible.The transfer shift lever should be set to “2H” whendriving 4WD vehicles on normal roads and expressways to obtain best possible fuel economy.

City trafficFrequent starting and stopping increases the aver-age fuel consumption. Use roads with smooth traf-fic flow whenever possible. When driving on con-gested roads, avoid use of a low gear at high en-gine speeds.

IdlingThe vehicle consumes fuel even during idling.Avoid extended idling whenever possible.

SpeedThe higher the vehicle speed, the more fuel con-sumed. Avoid driving at full speed. Even a slight re-lease of the accelerator pedal will save a significantamount of fuel.

Tyre inflation pressureCheck the tyre inflation pressures at regular inter-vals. Low tyre inflation pressure increases road re-sistance and fuel consumption. In addition, lowtyre pressures adversely affect tyre wear and driv-ing stability.

LoadDo not drive with unnecessary articles in the cargoarea. Especially during city driving where frequentstarting and stopping is necessary, the increasedweight of the vehicle will greatly affect fuel con-sumption.

Cold engine startingStarting of a cold engine consumes more fuel.Unnecessary fuel consumption is also caused bykeeping a hot engine running. After the engine isstarted, commence driving as soon as possible.

Air conditioning*The use of the air conditioning will increase thefuel consumption.

Driving, alcohol and drugsE00600200012

Driving after drinking alcohol is one of the most fre-quent causes of accidents.Your driving ability can be seriously impaired evenwith blood alcohol levels far below the legal mini-mum. If you have been drinking, don’t drive. Ridewith a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab ora friend, or use public transportation.Drinking coffee or taking a cold shower will notmake you sober.Similarly, prescription and nonprescription drugs af-fect your alertness, perception and reaction time.Consult with your doctor or pharmacist before driv-ing while under the influence of any of these medi-cations.

WARNINGl NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE.

Your perceptions are less accurate, yourreflexes are slower and your judgment isimpaired.


4-02

4

Safe driving techniquesE00600300491

Driving safety and protection against injury cannotbe fully ensured. However, we recommend thatyou pay extra attention to the following:

Seat beltsBefore starting the vehicle, make sure that you andyour passengers have fastened your seat belts.

Floor mats

WARNINGl Keep floor mats clear of the pedals by cor-

rectly laying floor mats that are suitablefor the vehicle.To prevent the floor mats from slippingout position, securely retain them usingthe hooks etc.Note that laying a floor mat over a pedalor laying one floor mat on top of anothercan obstruct pedal operation and lead toa serious accident.

Carrying children in the vehiclel Never leave your vehicle unattended with the

key in the ignition and children inside the ve-hicle. Children may play with the driving con-trols and this could lead to an accident.

l Make sure that infants and small children areproperly restrained in accordance with thelaws and regulations, and for maximum pro-tection in case of an accident.

l Prevent children from playing in the cargoarea. It is quite dangerous to allow them toplay there while the vehicle is moving.

Running-in recommendationsE00600401910

During the running-in period for the first 1,000 km(620 miles), it is advisable to drive your new vehi-cle using the following precautions as a guidelineto aid long life as well as future economy and per-formance.l Do not race the engine at high speeds.l Avoid rapid starting, accelerating, braking

and prolonged high-speed running.l Keep to the running-in speed limit shown be-

low.Please note that the legal speed limits dis-played must be adhered to.

l Do not exceed loading limits.l Refrain from towing a trailer.

Vehicles with manual transmission


4-03

4

Shift point

Speed limit

2WDVehicles with easy select 4WD Vehicles with super select 4WD

2H, 4H 4L 2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc

1st gear 20 km/h (12 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph) 10 km/h (6 mph)

2nd gear 40 km/h (25 mph) 45 km/h (28 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph) 40 km/h (25 mph) 20 km/h (12 mph)

3rd gear 70 km/h (43 mph) 70 km/h (43 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 70 km/h (43 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph)

4th gear 100 km/h (62 mph) 105 km/h (65 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph) 100 km/h (62 mph) 50 km/h (31 mph)


Vehicles with automatic transmission

Vehicles with 4A/T

Shift point

Speed limit



“L” (LOW) 25 km/h (16 mph) 25 km/h (12 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph) 25 km/h (12 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph)

“2” (SECOND) 65 km/h (40 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph)

“D” (DRIVE)*1 100 km/h (62 mph) 100 km/h (62 mph) 50 km/h (31 mph) 100 km/h (62 mph) 50 km/h (31 mph)

“D” (DRIVE)*2 140 km/h (87 mph) 140 km/h (87 mph) — 135 km/h (84 mph) —*1: With overdrive switched OFF*2: With overdrive switched ON


4-04

4

Vehicles with 5A/T

Shift pointSpeed limit

2H, 4H, 4HLc 4LLc

1st gear 15 km/h(9 mph) 5 km/h (3 mph)

2nd gear 40 km/h(25 mph)

20 km/h(12 mph)

3rd gear 60 km/h(37 mph)

30 km/h(19 mph)

4th gear 85 km/h(53 mph)

45 km/h(28 mph)

5th gear 120 km/h(74 mph) —

NOTEl On 4WD vehicles with automatic transmis-

sion, when the transfer shift lever is in“4LLc”, the transmission will not shift intothe overdrive gear.

CAUTIONl On 4WD vehicles, the “4LLc” range gives

maximum torque for low-speed drivingon steep slopes, as well as sandy, muddy,and other difficult surfaces. On vehicleswith automatic transmission, do not ex-ceed speeds of approximately 70 km/h(43 mph) in “4LLc” range.

Parking brakeE00600501315

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a completestop, fully engage the parking brake, and thenmove the gearshift lever to 1st (on an uphill) or Re-verse (on a downhill) position for vehicles with man-ual transmission or set the selector lever to “P”(PARK) position on automatic transmission vehi-cles.

CAUTIONl Before driving, be sure that the parking

brake is fully released and brake warninglamp is off.If a vehicle is driven without releasing theparking brake, the brake will be overhea-ted, resulting in ineffective braking andpossible brake failure.

l When you intend to apply the parkingbrake, firmly press the brake pedal tobring the vehicle to a complete stop be-fore pulling the parking brake lever. Pull-ing the parking brake lever with the vehi-cle moving could make the rear wheelslock up, thereby making the vehicle unsta-ble. It could also make the parking brakemalfunction.

l If the brake warning lamp does not extin-guish when the parking brake is fully re-leased, the brake system may be an abnor-mal.Have your vehicle checked immediately.For details, refer to “Brake warninglamp” on page 3-08.

Type 1

To apply

1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,then pull the lever up without pushing the but-ton at the end of hand grip.

To release

1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,then pull the lever up slightly.

2- Push the button at the end of hand grip.3- Push the lever downward.


4-05

4

Type 2

To apply

1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,then pull the lever out.

To release

LHD RHD

1- Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal,then push the button (A).

LHD RHD

2- Turn the lever clockwise (LHD) or anticlock-wise (RHD) with the button (A) pushed in.

LHD RHD

3- Push in the lever completely.

ParkingE00600601202

Parking on a hillTo prevent the vehicle from rolling, follow theseprocedures:

Parking on a downhill slopeTurn the front wheels towards the kerb and movethe vehicle forward until the kerb side wheel gentlytouches the kerb.Set the parking brake and place the gearshift leverinto the “R” (Reverse) position (with manual trans-mission) or the selector lever into the “P” (PARK)position (with automatic transmission).If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.

Parking on an uphill slopeTurn the front wheels away from the kerb andmove the vehicle back until the kerb side wheel gen-tly touches the kerb.Set the parking brake and place the gearshift leverinto the 1st position (with manual transmission) orthe selector lever into the “P” (PARK) position(with automatic transmission).If necessary, apply chocks to wheels.


4-06

4

NOTEl If your vehicle is equipped with automatic

transmission, be sure to apply the parkingbrake before moving the selector lever to the“P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec-tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position beforeapplying the parking brake, it may be diffi-cult to disengage the selector lever from the“P” (PARK) position when next you drivethe vehicle, requiring application of a strongforce to the selector lever to move from the“P” (PARK) position.

Parking with the engine runningNever leave the engine running while you take ashort sleep/rest. Also, never leave the engine run-ning in a closed or poorly ventilated place.

WARNINGl Leaving the engine running risks injury

or death from accidentally moving thegearshift lever (on manual transmissionvehicles) or the selector lever (on automat-ic transmission vehicles) or the accumula-tion of toxic exhaust fumes in the passen-ger compartment.

Where you parkYour front bumper can be damaged if you scrape itover kerbs or parking stop blocks. Be careful whentravelling up or down steep slopes where your bump-er can scrape the road.

WARNINGl Do not park your vehicle in areas where

combustible materials such as dry grassor leaves can come in contact with a hotexhaust, since a fire could occur.

When leaving the vehicleAlways remove the key from the ignition switchand lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unatten-ded.Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit area.

Steering wheel height adjustmentE00600700219

To adjust the steering wheel height, release the tiltlock lever while holding the steering wheel byhand, and raise or lower the steering wheel to thedesired height.After adjustment, securely lock the lever by pullingit upward.

1- Locked2- Release

WARNINGl After adjusting to the desired height,

check to be sure that the lever is locked.l Do not attempt to adjust the steering

wheel while you are driving the vehicle.l When releasing the tilt lock lever, move it

to the release position (2) and hold thesteering wheel by hand to prevent it fall-ing to the lowest position.


4-07

4

Inside rear-view mirrorE00600800106

Adjust the rear-view mirror only after making anyseat adjustments so you have a clear view to therear of the vehicle.

WARNINGl Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view

mirror while driving. This can be danger-ous.Always adjust the mirror before driving.

Adjust the rear-view mirror to maximize the viewthrough the rear window.

To adjust the vertical mirror positionIt is possible to move the mirror up and down to ad-just its position.

To reduce the glareThe lever (A) at the bottom of the mirror can beused to adjust the mirror to reduce the glare fromthe headlamps of vehicles behind you during nightdriving.

1- Normal2- Anti-glare

Outside rear-view mirrorsE00600900149

To adjust the mirror positionE00601000482

WARNINGl Do not attempt to adjust the rear-view

mirrors while driving. This can be danger-ous.Always adjust the mirrors before driving.

l Your vehicle is equipped with convextype mirrors.Please take into consideration, that ob-jects you see in the mirror will look small-er and farther away compared to a nor-mal flat mirror.Do not use this mirror to estimate dis-tance of following vehicles when changinglanes.

Manual outside rear-view mirrors*Adjust the mirror surface by hands as indicated bythe arrows.


4-08

4

Electric remote-controlled outside rear-view mir-rors*The electric remote-controlled outside rear-viewmirrors can be operated when the ignition switch isin the “ON” or “ACC” position. Push the switch (A) on the same side as the mirrorwhose adjustment is desired.

Type 1

Type 2

L- Left outside mirror adjustmentR- Right outside mirror adjustment

NOTEl After adjustment, lightly push the switch on

the opposite side to return it to the neutral po-sition.

Press the switch (B) to the left, right, up or down toadjust the mirror position.

1- Up2- Down3- Right4- Left

To fold the mirrorE00601100467

The outside mirror can be folded in towards theside window to prevent damage when parking innarrow areas.

Mirror retractor switch*The mirror retractor switch can be operated withthe ignition switch in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

Push the switch to fold the mirrors inward, andpush the switch again to return them to extended po-sition.

NOTEl It is also possible to fold and return the mir-

rors by hand.l When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail

to operate as intended, please refrain from re-peated pushing of the retractor switch as thisaction can result in burn-out of the mirror mo-tor circuits.

Heated mirror*E00601200253

When the rear window demister switch (C) is press-ed, the outside rear-view mirrors are demisted or de-frosted. Current will flow through the heater ele-ment inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost orcondensation.


4-09

4

The indication lamp (D) will illuminate while thedemister is on. The heater will be turned off auto-matically in about 20 minutes.

Type 2

Type 1Type 1

Type 2

Ignition switchE00601401467

LOCKThe engine is stopped and the steering wheellocked. The key can only be inserted and removedwhen the switch is in this position.

ACCThe engine is stopped, but the electrical devicessuch as the radio and cigarette lighter can be operat-ed.

ONThe engine is running, and all the vehicle’s electri-cal devices can be operated.

STARTThe starter motor operates. After the engine has star-ted, release the key and it will automatically returnto the “ON” position.

NOTEl If your vehicle is equipped with ignition

switch illumination:• The ignition switch illumination comes

on while the driver’s door is opened andremains on for about 30 seconds after thedriver’s door is closed.

• [On vehicles with keyless entry system]When you remove the ignition key fromignition switch, it will be illuminated forabout 30 seconds. However, it will go off even while the il-lumination comes on if the ignitionswitch is turned to “ON” position.

l If your vehicle is equipped with the DaytimeRunning Lamp, when the ignition switch isin the “ON”, the headlamp low beams etc.are turned on.Refer to “Headlamps” on page 3-30.

l Your vehicle is equipped with an electronicimmobilizer. To start the engine, the ID codewhich the transponder inside the key sendsmust match the one registered in the immobil-izer computer.(Refer to “Electronic immobilizer” on page1-03.)


4-10

4

To remove the keyPush in the key at the “ACC” position and keep itdepressed until it is turned to the “LOCK” position,and remove it.

CAUTIONl Do not remove the ignition key from the

ignition switch while driving. The steer-ing wheel will be locked, causing loss ofcontrol.

l If the engine is stopped while driving, thebrake servomechanism will cease to func-tion and braking efficiency will deterio-rate. Also, the power steering system willnot function and it will require greatermanual effort to operate the steering.

l Do not leave the key in the “ON” positionfor a long time when the engine is not run-ning, doing so will cause the battery to bedischarged.

l Do not turn the key to the “START” posi-tion when the engine is running, doing socould damage the starter motor.

Steering wheel lockE00601500227

To lockRemove the key at the “LOCK” position.Turn the steering wheel until it is locked.

To unlockTurn the key to the “ACC” position while movingthe steering wheel slightly.

CAUTIONl Remove the key when leaving the vehicle.

NOTEl If the front wheels are turned, the anti-theft

lock may sometimes make it difficult to turnthe key from “LOCK” position to “ACC” po-sition. Firmly turn the steering wheel to theleft or to the right as you turn the key.

StartingE00601600404

Tips for startingl Do not operate the starter motor continuous-

ly for anything longer than 10 seconds; do-ing so could run down the battery. If the en-gine does not start, turn the ignition switchback to “LOCK” position, wait a few sec-onds, and then try again.Trying repeatedly with the starter motor stillturning will damage the starter mechanism.

l If the engine cannot be started because thebattery is weak or dead, refer to the “Emer-gency starting” section for instructions onstarting the engine.

l The engine is well warmed up if the coolanttemperature gauge needle starts to move (theengine speed decreases). Extended warming-up operation will result in excessive fuel con-sumption.

WARNINGl Never run the engine in a closed or poor-

ly ventilated area any longer than is nee-ded to move your vehicle in or out of thearea. Carbon monoxide gases are odour-less and can be fatal.


4-11

4

CAUTIONl Never attempt to start the engine by push-

ing or pulling the vehicle. Especially theautomatic transmission, since the struc-ture is different from a manual transmis-sion, it is not possible to start the engineby using this technique. Never attemptthis or it could damage the automatictransmission.

l Do not run the engine at high rpm ordrive the vehicle at high speed until the en-gine has had a chance to warm up.

l Release the ignition key as soon as the en-gine starts to avoid damaging the startermotor.

l Do not stop the engine immediately afterhigh-speed or uphill driving. First allowthe engine to idle to give the turbocharg-er a chance to cool down.

Starting the engineE00601701792

1. Insert the ignition key and fasten the seat belt.2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.3. Depress and hold the brake pedal.4. On vehicles with manual transmission, place

the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-tion and depress the clutch pedal all the way.

On vehicles with automatic transmission,make sure the selector lever in the “P”(PARK) position.

Vehicles with manualtransmission

Vehicles with automatictransmission

NOTEl On vehicles with automatic transmission, the

engine will not start if the selector lever is inany position other than “P” (PARK) or “N”(NEUTRAL) position.For safety, start the engine with the selectorlever in the “P” (PARK) position because inthis position the rear wheels are locked inplace.

5. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position.The diesel preheat indication lamp will firstilluminate, and then after a short time go out,indicating that preheating is completed.

NOTEl If the engine is cold, the diesel preheat indi-

cation lamp is on for a longer time.

l When the engine has not been started withinabout 5 seconds after the diesel preheat indi-cation lamp went out, return the ignition keyto the “LOCK” position. Then, turn the keyto the “ON” position to preheat the engineagain.

l When the engine is warm, the diesel preheatindication lamp does not come on even if theignition key is placed in the “ON” position.Start the engine by turning the ignition keyright to the “START” position.

6. Operate the accelerator pedal as described be-low in accordance with the atmospheric tem-perature and/or engine condition and thenstart the engine.l When the atmospheric temperature is

moderate or the engine is warm, start theengine without depressing the acceleratorpedal.

l When the atmospheric temperature is lowand the engine is cold, start the enginewhile depressing the accelerator pedal.

Fuel injection amount learning processE00616000028

To keep exhaust emissions and engine noise low,the engine very occasionally performs a learningprocess for the fuel injection amount.The engine sounds slightly different from usualwhile the learning process is taking place. Thechange in the engine sound does not indicate a fault.


4-12

4

Manual transmissionE00602000199

The shift pattern is shown on the gearshift leverknob. Be sure to always fully depress the clutch ped-al before attempting to shift the lever.

CAUTIONl Do not move the gearshift lever into re-

verse while the vehicle is moving for-ward; doing so will damage the transmis-sion.

l Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedalwhile driving as this will cause prematureclutch wear or damage.

CAUTIONl If the clutch is engaged suddenly while

the engine revolution is high, an extreme-ly large load will be applied instantaneous-ly to the power train, possibly leading tothe breakage of that component. Please en-sure, therefore, that the clutch pedal is al-ways applied in a slow yet firm manner.Your vehicle has a special feature to pro-tect the power train from damage; the en-gine is controlled in such a way that exces-sive increase in engine revolution is pre-vented in situations where the acceleratorpedal is depressed while the gearshift lev-er is in the 1st position and the clutch ped-al has been depressed.

NOTEl If it is hard to shift into 1st, depress the

clutch pedal again; the shift will then be eas-ier to make.

l To shift into reverse from 5th gear, move thegearshift lever to the “N” (Neutral) position,and then shift it into reverse.

Changing gearsE00610600136

Always take care to change the gear with the vehi-cle speed matched to the engine speed. Proper shift-ing will prolong engine life.Avoid shifting down at high speed, as this maycause excessive engine speed (the tachometer nee-dle into the red zone) and damage the engine.


4-13

4

Possible driving speedE00610801151

Shift point

Speed limit



1st gear 30 km/h (19 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 15 km/h (9 mph)

2nd gear 60 km/h (37 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 35 km/h (22 mph) 65 km/h (40 mph) 30 km/h (19 mph)

3rd gear 100 km/h (62 mph) 105 km/h (65 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph) 105 km/h (65 mph) 55 km/h (34 mph)


5th gear is an overdrive ratio and its use reduces engine speed below that of the 4th gear. Use 5 th gear whenever vehicle speed allows, for maximum fuel economy.


4-14

4

Automatic transmission 4A/TE00603200619

NOTEl During running-in period or immediately af-

ter reconnection of the battery cable, theremay be a case where gear shifts are not madesmoothly. This does not indicate a faulty trans-mission.Gear shifts will become smooth after the trans-mission has been shifted several times by theelectronic control system.

Selector lever operationE00603300968

The transmission has 4 forward gears and 1 reversegear.The individual gears are selected automatically, de-pending on the position of the gear selector lever,the speed of the vehicle and the position of the ac-celerator pedal.The selector lever has 6 positions, and is equippedwith a lock button (A) to avoid inadvertent selec-tion of the wrong gear.

LHD RHD

Lock button must be pushed to movethe selector lever.

Lock button need not be pushed tomove the selector lever.

WARNINGl If the lock button is always pushed to op-

erate the selector lever, the selector levermay be accidentally shifted into the fol-lowing position:LHD: “P”, “R”, “2” or “L”RHD: “P”, “R” or “L”Be sure not to push the lock button whenperforming the operations indicated by

in the illustration.

WARNINGl Always depress the brake pedal when

shifting the selector lever into a gearfrom the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEU-TRAL) position.When beginning to drive, do not shift theselector lever from the “P” (PARK) or“N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress-ing the accelerator pedal, doing so is dan-gerous because the vehicle will “jump” for-ward or backward.

Selector lever position indicatorE00603500797

When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-sition, the currently position of the selector lever isindicated by the indicator (A) shown on the instru-ment cluster {i.e. “P” (PARK), “R” (REVERSE),“N” (NEUTRAL), “D” (DRIVE), “2” (SECOND)or “L” (LOW)}.


4-15

4

Selector lever positionsE00603800572

“P” PARKThis position locks the transmission to prevent thevehicle from moving. The engine can be started inthis position.

“R” REVERSEThis position is to back up.

CAUTIONl Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”

(REVERSE) position while the vehicle isin motion to avoid transmission damage.

“N” NEUTRALAt this position the transmission is disengaged. It isthe same as the neutral position on a manual trans-mission, and should be used when the vehicle is sta-tionary for an extended length of time during driv-ing, such as in a traffic jam.

WARNINGl Never move the selector lever to the “N”

(NEUTRAL) position while driving. A se-rious accident could occur since youcould accidentally move the selector leverinto the “P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE)position or you will lose engine braking.

l On a gradient the engine should be star-ted in the “P” (PARK) position, not in the“N” (NEUTRAL) position.

WARNINGl Always keep your right foot on the brake

pedal when the vehicle is in “N” (NEU-TRAL) position, or when shifting into orout of “N” (NEUTRAL) position, to mini-mize the risk of loss of control.

“D” DRIVEThis position is for normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitable gear for yourspeed and acceleration.

“2” SECONDThis position is for extra power when driving upmoderately steep hills, and for engine brakingwhen descending moderately steep gradients.

“L” LOWThis position is for driving up very steep hills andfor engine braking at low speeds when descendingsteep gradients.

WARNINGl This position can be used for maximum

engine braking.Be very careful not to shift into “L”(LOW) position suddenly. Sudden enginebraking may cause the tyres to skid. Toavoid erroneous operation, move the selec-tor lever firmly into each position andbriefly hold it there.Select this position according to the roadconditions and vehicle speed.

NOTEl The automatic transmission has a control func-

tion that prevents over-revving. As a result,it may not perform a shift when the selectorlever is moved from the “D” (DRIVE) posi-tion to the “2” (SECOND) position or fromthe “2” (SECOND) position to the “L”(LOW) position.

Overdrive control switchE00604000089

The overdrive control switch can be used while theselector lever is in the “D” (DRIVE) position.

During normal drivingPress the overdrive control switch to turn the over-drive function on. The transmission will shift auto-matically among the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears, ena-bling fuel-efficient, economical driving.

During hilly roads drivingPress the overdrive control switch to turn the over-drive function off. The transmission will shift auto-matically among the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd gears, andlight engine braking will be available on downhillroads.


4-16

4

Overdrive OFF indication lampE00614600017

When the overdrive control switch is in the OFF po-sition, the overdrive OFF indication lamp in the me-ter cluster comes on.

When a malfunction occurs in the au-tomatic transmission

E00615100019

When the selector lever position indicator blinksE00615200036

When the selector lever position indicator blinkswhile you are driving, there could be a malfunctionin the automatic transmission system.

or or

NOTEl If the selector lever position is in the “P”

(PARK), “R” (REVERSE) or “N” (NEU-TRAL) position, the indicator does not blink.

CAUTIONl If the selector lever position indicator

blinks while you are driving, it is likelythat a safety device is operating becauseof a malfunction in the automatic trans-mission. We recommend you to haveyour vehicle inspected as soon as possible.{The selector lever position indicatorwarning function does not operate withthe selector lever in the “P” (PARK), “R”(REVERSE) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-tion.}

When the A/T (automatic transmission) fluid tem-perature warning lamp comes on

E00615300037

The automatic transmission fluid temperature warn-ing lamp comes on when the automatic transmis-sion fluid temperature becomes abnormally highwith the ignition switch “ON” position.Normally the warning lamp comes on when the ig-nition switch is turned to the “ON” position, andthen will go out after a few seconds.


4-17

4

CAUTIONl If the warning lamp comes on, reduce the

engine speed and stop the vehicle in a safearea.Then set the selector lever to “P” (PARK)position and idle the engine until the warn-ing lamp goes off.When the warning lamp goes off, resumenormal driving.If the warning lamp does not go off, werecommend you to have your vehicle in-spected.

Operation of the automatic transmis-sion

E00604200212

CAUTIONl Before selecting a gear with the engine

running and the vehicle stationary, fullydepress the brake pedal to prevent the ve-hicle from creeping.The vehicle will begin to move as soon asthe gear is engaged, especially when theengine speed is high, at fast idle or withthe air conditioning operating, the brakesshould only be released when you areready to drive away.

l Depress the brake pedal with the rightfoot at all times.Using the left foot could cause driver move-ment delay in case of an emergency.

CAUTIONl To prevent sudden acceleration, never

race the engine when shifting from the“P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.

l Operating the accelerator pedal while theother foot is resting on the brake pedalwill affect braking efficiency and maycause premature wear of brake pads.Do not race the engine with brake pedalpressed.This can damage the transmission.

Passing accelerationE00604500127

To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) posi-tion (when passing another vehicle), push the accel-erator to the floor. The automatic transmission willautomatically downshift.

WaitingE00604600128

For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signals,the vehicle can be left in gear and held stationarywith the service brake.For longer waiting periods with the engine running,the selector lever should be placed in the “N” (NEU-TRAL) position.

CAUTIONl Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill

using the accelerator pedal (without us-ing the brake pedal). Always apply theparking brake and/or service brakes.

CAUTIONl Unexpected acceleration may occur if the

selector lever is in a position other than“P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.Prior to moving off after having stoppedthe vehicle, make sure that the selector lev-er is in “D” (DRIVE) position.

ParkingE00604700246

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a completestop, fully engage the parking brake, and thenmove the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position.If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, al-ways switch off the engine and remove the ignitionkey.

NOTEl On a slope, be sure to apply the parking

brake before moving the selector lever to the“P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec-tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position beforeapplying the parking brake, it may be diffi-cult to disengage the selector lever from the“P” (PARK) position when next you drivethe vehicle, requiring application of a strongforce to the selector lever to move from the“P” (PARK) position.


4-18

4

When the automatic transmission makes no speedchange

E00604800478

If the transmission does not change speeds whiledriving, or your vehicle does not pick up enoughspeed when starting on an uphill slope, it may bethat there is something unusual happening in thetransmission, causing a safety device to activate.We recommend you to have your checked as soonas possible.

NOTEl When the selector lever position indicator in

the instrument panel blinks, it means thatthere is an abnormal condition in the trans-mission. Refer to “When the selector lever po-sition indicator blinks” on page 4-17.

Automatic transmission SportsMode 5A/T

E00603200576

NOTEl During running-in period or immediately af-

ter reconnection of the battery cable, theremay be a case where gear shifts are not madesmoothly. This does not indicate a faulty trans-mission.Gear shifts will become smooth after the trans-mission has been shifted several times by theelectronic control system.

Selector lever operationE00603300867

The transmission has 5 forward gears and 1 reversegear.The individual gears are selected automatically, de-pending on the position of the gear selector lever,the speed of the vehicle and the position of the ac-celerator pedal.The selector lever has 2 gates; the main gate (1)and the manual gate (2).

NOTEl For information on manual gate operation,

please refer to “Sports mode” on page 4-21.

In the main gate, selector lever has 4 positions, andis equipped with a lock button (A) to avoid inadver-tent selection of the wrong gear.

The lock button must be pushed to move theselector lever.

The lock button need not be pushed to movethe selector lever.


4-19

4

WARNINGl If the lock button is always pushed to op-

erate the selector lever, the lever may beaccidentally shifted into the “P” (PARK)or “R” (REVERSE) position. Be sure notto push the lock button when performingthe operations indicated by in the illus-tration.

l Always depress the brake pedal whenshifting the selector lever into a gearfrom the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEU-TRAL) position.When beginning to drive, do not shift theselector lever from the “P” (PARK) or“N” (NEUTRAL) position while depress-ing the accelerator pedal, doing so is dan-gerous because the vehicle will “jump” for-ward or backward.

Selector lever position indicatorE00603500726

When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-sition, the currently position of the selector lever isindicated by the indicator (A) shown on the instru-ment cluster {i.e. “P” (PARK), “R” (REVERSE),“N” (NEUTRAL), “D” (DRIVE)}.

Selector lever positions (Main gate)E00603800585

“P” PARKThis position locks the transmission to prevent thevehicle from moving. The engine can be started inthis position.

“R” REVERSEThis position is to back up.

CAUTIONl Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R”

(REVERSE) position while the vehicle isin motion to avoid a transmission damage.

“N” NEUTRALAt this position the transmission is disengaged. It isthe same as the neutral position on a M/T, andshould only be used when the vehicle is stationaryfor an extended length of time during driving, suchas in a traffic jam.

WARNINGl Never move the selector lever to the “N”

(NEUTRAL) position while driving. A se-rious accident could occur since youcould accidentally move the lever into the“P” (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) positionor you will lose engine braking.

l On a gradient the engine should be star-ted in the “P” (PARK) position, not in the“N” (NEUTRAL) position.

l Always keep your right foot on the brakepedal when shifting into or out of “N”(NEUTRAL), to minimize the risk of lossof control.

“D” DRIVEThis position is for normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitable gear ratio foryour speed and acceleration.

CAUTIONl Never shift into the “D” (DRIVE) posi-

tion from the “R” (REVERSE) positionwhile the vehicle is in motion to avoidtransmission damage.


4-20

4

Sports modeE00603901088

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion,sports mode is selected by gently pushing the selec-tor lever from the “D” (DRIVE) position into themanual gate (A). To return to “D” range operation,gently push the selector lever back into the maingate (B). In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rapidly sim-ply by moving the selector lever backward and for-ward. In contrast to a manual transmission, thesports mode allows gear shifts with the acceleratorpedal depressed.

SHIFT UP

SHIFT DOWN

+ (SHIFT UP)Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear. - (SHIFT DOWN)Pull the lever backward once to shift down onegear.

CAUTIONl In sports mode, the driver must execute

upward shifts in accordance with prevail-ing road conditions, taking care to keepthe engine speed below the red zone.

l By rapidly moving the selector lever back-ward (SHIFT DOWN) twice, it is possibleto skip one gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd

or 5th to 3rd. Since sudden engine brakingand/or rapid acceleration can cause a lossof traction, downshifts must be made care-fully in accordance with the vehicle’sspeed.

NOTEl The upward shift may be made automatically

in sports mode when the engine revolutionsrises and approaches the tachometer’s redzone (the red-coloured part of the tachometerdial).

l In sports mode, only the 5 forward gears canbe selected. To reverse or park the vehicle,move the selector lever to the “R” (RE-VERSE) or “P” (PARK) position as required.

l To maintain good running performance, thetransmission may refuse to perform an up-shift when the selector lever is moved to the“+ (SHIFT UP)” position at certain vehiclespeeds. Also, to prevent over-revving of theengine, the transmission may refuse to per-form a downshift when the lever is moved tothe “- (SHIFT DOWN)” position at certainvehicle speeds.

l In sports mode, downward shifts are made au-tomatically when the vehicle slows down.When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-cally selected.

l When driving away on a slippery road, pushthe selector lever forward into the “+ (SHIFTUP)” position. This causes the transmissionto shift into the 2nd gear which is better forsmooth driving away on a slippery road.Push the selector lever to the “- (SHIFTDOWN)” side to shift back to the 1st gear.

Sports mode indicatorE00612300355

In sports mode, the currently selected position is in-dicated by the indicator (A) shown on the instru-ment panel.


4-21

4

When a malfunction occurs in the au-tomatic transmission

E00615100152

When the selector lever position indicator blinksE00615200081

When the selector lever position indicator blinkswhile you are driving, there could be a malfunctionin the automatic transmission system.

throughor

NOTEl If the selector lever position is in the “P”

(PARK), “R” (REVERSE) or “N” (NEU-TRAL) position, the indicator does not blink.

CAUTIONl If the selector lever position indicator

blinks while you are driving, it is likelythat a safety device is operating becauseof a malfunction in the automatic trans-mission. We recommend you to haveyour vehicle inspected as soon as possible.{The selector lever position indicatorwarning function does not operate withthe selector lever in the “P” (PARK), “R”(REVERSE) or “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-tion.}

When the A/T (automatic transmission) fluid tem-perature warning lamp comes on

E00615300141

The automatic transmission fluid temperature warn-ing lamp comes on when the automatic transmis-sion fluid temperature becomes abnormally high.Normally the warning lamp comes on when the ig-nition switch is turned to the “ON” position, andthen will go out after a few seconds.

CAUTIONl If the lamp comes on, reduce the engine

speed and stop the vehicle in a safe area.Then set the selector lever to the “P”(PARK) position and idle the engine untilthe warning lamp goes off. When the warn-ing lamp goes off, resume normal driving.If the warning lamp does not go off, werecommend you to have your vehicle in-spected.

Operation of the automatic transmis-sion

E00604200414

CAUTIONl Before selecting a gear with the engine

running and the vehicle stationary, fullydepress the brake pedal to prevent the ve-hicle from creeping.The vehicle will begin to move as soon asthe gear is engaged, especially when theengine speed is high, at fast idle or withthe air conditioning operating, the brakesshould only be released when you areready to drive away.

l Depress the brake pedal with the rightfoot at all times.Using the left foot could cause driver move-ment delay in case of an emergency.

l To prevent sudden acceleration, neverrace the engine when shifting from the“P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL) position.


4-22

4

CAUTIONl Operating the accelerator pedal while the

other foot is resting on the brake pedalwill affect braking efficiency and maycause premature wear of brake pads.

l Do not race the engine with brake pedalpressed when the vehicle is stationary.This can damage the automatic transmis-sion.

Passing accelerationE00604500257

To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE) posi-tion, push the accelerator to the floor. The automat-ic transmission will automatically downshift.

NOTEl In “Sports mode”, downshifts do not take

place when the accelerator is depressed allthe way to the floor.

WaitingE00604600304

For short waiting periods, such as at traffic signals,the vehicle can be left in gear and held stationarywith the service brake.For longer waiting periods with the engine running,place the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) po-sition..

CAUTIONl Never hold the vehicle stationary on a hill

using the accelerator pedal (without us-ing the brake pedal). Always apply theparking brake and/or service brakes.

l Unexpected acceleration may occur if theselector lever is in a position other than“P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL). Priorto moving off after having stopped the ve-hicle, make sure that the selector lever isin the “D” (DRIVE) position.

ParkingE00604700262

To park the vehicle, first bring it to a completestop, fully engage the parking brake, and thenmove the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position.If you are going to leave the vehicle unattended, al-ways switch off the engine and remove the ignitionkey.

NOTEl On a slope, be sure to apply the parking

brake before moving the selector lever to the“P” (PARK) position. If you move the selec-tor lever to the “P” (PARK) position beforeapplying the parking brake, it may be diffi-cult to disengage the selector lever from the“P” (PARK) position when next you drivethe vehicle, requiring application of a strongforce to the selector lever to move from the“P” (PARK) position.

When the automatic transmission makes no speedchange

E00604800683

If the transmission does not change speeds whiledriving, or your vehicle does not pick up enoughspeed when starting on an uphill slope, it may bethat there is something unusual happening in thetransmission, causing a safety device to activate.We recommend you to have your checked as soonas possible.

1. If your vehicle has difficulty moving uphill,shift the selector lever into 2nd gear of the“Sports mode”.This method might not work depending onthe type of transmission malfunction.

2. Once the vehicle is moving on a level road,move the selector lever back to “D” (DRIVE).

NOTEl When the selector lever position indicator in

the instrument panel blinks, it means thatthere is an abnormal condition in the trans-mission. Refer to “When the selector lever po-sition indicator blinks” on page 4-17.


4-23

4

Easy select 4WD*E00614700119

Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive canbe made by operating the transfer shift lever (A).Shift the transfer shift lever to an appropriate posi-tion according to the road surface conditions. In ad-dition, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp in-dicates the transfer shift lever shifting state. Referto “2WD/4WD operation indication lamp” on page4-26.



Transfer shift lever position and 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp

E00614800080

Transfer shift leverposition

2WD/4WDoperation in-dication lamp

Driving con-ditions

2H Rear-wheeldrive

When driv-ing on drypaved road.

4H 4-wheeldrive

When driv-ing on rough,sand or snowcoveredroads.

4L Low range 4-wheel drive

When driv-ing up ordown steephills, onrough ormuddy roads(especiallywhen in-creased tor-que is re-quired).

: Illuminate: Remain off

NOTEl On vehicles with automatic transmission,

when the transfer shift lever is in “4L”, thetransmission will not shift into the overdrivegear.

CAUTIONl The “4L” range gives maximum torque

for lowspeed driving on steep slopes, aswell as sandy, muddy, and other difficultsurfaces. On vehicles with automatictransmission, do not exceed speeds of ap-proximately 70 km/h (43 mph) in “4L”range.

l Do not drive your vehicle in the “4H” or“4L” on dry paved roads and highways.Doing so may result in excessive tyrewear, increased fuel consumption, andpossible noise generation. It may also in-crease the differential oil temperature,which may damage the drive system. Fur-ther, the drive train will be subjected toexcessive loading, resulting in oil leakage,component seizure, or other serious prob-lems. On dry paved roads and highways,drive the vehicle in “2H” only.


4-24

4

Transfer shift lever operationE00614900111

The shift pattern is shown on the transfer shift lev-er knob.

The transfer shift lever should be positioned in ac-cordance with the following operating conditions:

To shift from ToProcedure

Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicles with automatic transmission

2H 4H The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle iseither moving or stationary.When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the gearshift leverto the “N” (Neutral) position before operating the transfershift lever.When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can besteered straight ahead, release the accelerator pedal beforeoperating the transfer shift lever.

The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicleis either moving or stationary.When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the selector leverto the “N” (NEUTRAL) position before operating thetransfer shift lever.When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can besteered straight ahead, shift the selector lever to the “D”(DRIVE) position, and release the accelerator pedal be-fore operating the transfer shift lever.

4H 2H

4H 4L

Stop the vehicle, depress the clutch pedal to the floor andoperate the transfer shift lever.

Stop the vehicle, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-TRAL) position, and operate the transfer shift lever.If operation is made with the selector lever placed in anyother position than “N” (NEUTRAL) position, a gearnoise may be generated, with a possible failure to shift in-to a proper gear.

4L 4H


4-25

4

NOTEl Shifting of the transfer shift lever between

“2H” ↔ “4H” should only be done at speedsbelow 100 km/h (62 mph).

l During driving, never attempt to shift from“4H” to “4L”.

l When shifting from “2H” to “4H” in coldweather while the vehicle is in motion, thetransmission gear may make some noise. Incold weather, try to shift the gear while thevehicle is stopped.

l There may be a case that the transfer shift lev-er feels heavy when it is moved from “4H”to “2H” with the steering wheel in turned po-sition.This is normal and not any indication of trou-ble.

CAUTIONl Do not operate the transfer shift lever

while the rear wheels of the vehicle areslipping on snow or ice.

2WD/4WD operation indication lampE00615000092

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp showsthe shifting condition. The 2WD/4WD operation in-dication lamp comes on at each transfer shift leverposition as follows:

Except for vehicles for Russia and Ukraine

“2H” ↔ “4H”

Transfer shift lever posi-tion

2WD/4WD operationindication lamp

2H

Drive mode switchingin progress

4H

: Blink


4-26

4


NOTEl The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp

blinks while the selection is in process. Takethe following precautions when the indica-tion lamp is blinking or remains off.

• Keep the steering wheel in the straightahead position while making range selec-tions. If you attempt to drive forwardwith the steering wheel turned, gear rat-tling may occur and the desired rangemay not actually be selected.

• If the 2WD/4WD operation indicationlamp continues blinking after a “2H” ↔“4H” selection has been made with the ve-hicle moving, hold the steering wheel inthe straight ahead position and slowly de-press the accelerator pedal several times.

Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine

“2H” ↔ “4H”

Transfer shiftlever position

2WD/4WD operation indicationlamp

2H

Drive modeswitching in

progress

4H


NOTEl When the transfer shift lever is shifted be-

tween 2H ↔ 4H, the 2WD/4WD operation in-dication lamp does not switch to illuminateor remain off while the selection is in proc-ess. Take the following precautions when theindication lamp is remains on or off.


• When the transfer shift lever is shifted be-tween “2H” ↔ “4H” while the vehicle isstopped, the 2WD/4WD operation indica-tion lamp does not switch to illuminate orremain off while the selection is in proc-ess. Drive slowly and normally after con-firming that the lamp is switched.

• Do not move the selector lever while the2WD/4WD operation indication lamp isswitched.

• If the 2WD/4WD operation indicationlamp does not switch after a “2H” ↔“4H” selection has been made with the ve-hicle moving, hold the steering wheel inthe straight ahead position and slowly de-press the accelerator pedal several times.


4-27

4

“4H” ↔ “4L”



4H


4L



will go out momentarily during shifting proc-ess from “4H” to “4L” or vice versa, as thetransfer shift lever passes through the neutralposition.Be sure to operate the transfer shift lever un-til the 2WD/4WD operation indication lampilluminates again.

l If, after a “4H” ↔ “4L” selection has beenmade, the 2WD/4WD operation indicationlamp remains off and the desired range is notactually selected, return the transfer shift lev-er to its previous position. Place the steeringwheel in the straight ahead position, drivethe vehicle forward, and release the accelera-tor pedal. Next, hold down the clutch pedal(with manual transmission) or place the selec-tor lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position(with automatic transmission) and make therange selection again.

Super select 4WD*E00605700197

Shifting to rear-wheel drive or 4-wheel drive canbe made by operating the transfer shift lever (A).Shift the transfer shift lever to an appropriate posi-tion according to the road surface conditions. In ad-dition, the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp in-dicates the transfer shift lever shifting state. Referto “2WD/4WD operation indication lamp” on page4-31.




4-28

4

Transfer shift lever position and 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp

E00605800228

Transfer shift leverposition

2WD/4WDoperation in-

dicationlamp

Driving con-ditions

2H Rear-wheeldrive

When driv-ing on drypaved road.

4H Full-time 4-wheel drive

The basicposition forsuper select4WD.When driv-ing on drypaved orslipperyroads.

4HLc

Centre dif-ferential

lock engag-ed 4-wheel

drive

When driv-ing onrough, sandor snow cov-ered roads.

4LLc

Low rangecentre differ-ential lockengaged 4-wheel drive

When driv-ing up ordown steephills, onrough ormuddyroads (espe-cially whenincreasedtorque is re-quired).


NOTEl On vehicles with automatic transmission,

when the transfer shift lever is in “4LLc”, thetransmission will not shift into the overdrivegear.

CAUTIONl The “4LLc” range gives maximum tor-

que for low-speed driving on steep slopes,as well as sandy, muddy, and other diffi-cult surfaces. On vehicles with automatictransmission, do not exceed speeds of ap-proximately 70 km/h (43 mph) in “4LLc”range.

l Do not drive your vehicle in the “4HLc”or “4LLc” on dry paved roads and high-ways. Doing so may result in excessivetyre wear, increased fuel consumption,and possible noise generation. It may alsoincrease the differential oil temperature,which may damage the drive system. Fur-ther, the drive train will be subjected toexcessive loading, resulting in oil leakage,component seizure, or other serious prob-lems. On dry paved roads and highways,drive the vehicle in “2H” or “4H” only.

Transfer shift lever operationE00605900173

The shift pattern is shown on the transfer shift lev-er knob.

The transfer shift lever should be positioned in ac-cordance with the following operating conditions:

: Not push down the transfer shift lever: Push down the transfer shift lever


4-29

4

To shift from To Procedure

Vehicles with manual transmission Vehicles with automatic transmission

2H 4H The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicle iseither moving or stationary.When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the gearshift leverto the “N” (Neutral) position before operating the transfershift lever.When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can besteered straight ahead, release the accelerator pedal beforeoperating the transfer shift lever.

The transfer shift lever can be operated while the vehicleis either moving or stationary.When the vehicle is not in motion, shift the selector leverto the “N” (NEUTRAL) position before operating thetransfer shift lever.When the vehicle is moving, and only while it can besteered straight ahead, shift the selector lever to the “D”(DRIVE) position, and release the accelerator pedal be-fore operating the transfer shift lever.

4H 2H or 4HLc

4HLc 4H

4HLc 4LLc Stop the vehicle, depress the clutch pedal to the floor andoperate the transfer shift lever while keeping the transfershift lever pushed down.Keep depressing the clutch pedal while the 2WD/4WD op-eration indication lamp continues to blink.

Stop the vehicle, shift the selector lever to the “N” (NEU-TRAL) position, and operate the transfer shift leverwhile keeping the transfer shift lever pushed down.If operation is made with the selector lever placed in anyother position than “N” (NEUTRAL) position, a gearnoise may be generated, with a possible failure to shift in-to a proper gear.

4LLc 4HLc

NOTEl Shifting of the transfer shift lever between

“2H” ↔ “4H” should only be done at speedsbelow 100 km/h (62 mph).

l During driving, never attempt to shift from“4HLc” to “4LLc”.

l When shifting from “2H” to “4H” in coldweather while the vehicle is in motion, thetransmission gear may make some noise. Incold weather, try to shift the gear while thevehicle is stopped.

l When the transfer shift lever is shifted from“4H” to “4HLc” while the vehicle is stopped,the 2WD/4WD operation indication lampblinks while the selection is in process. Driveslowly and normally after confirming thatthe lamp is illuminated. (Refer to “2WD/4WD operation indication lamp” on page4-31.)

l Do not move the selector lever while the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp is blinking.

l The 2WD/4WD operation indication lampwill go out momentarily during shifting proc-ess from “4HLc” to “4LLc” or vice versa, asthe transfer shift lever passes through the neu-tral position.Be sure to operate the transfer shift lever un-til the 2WD/4WD operation indication lampilluminates again.

l There may be a case that the transfer shift lev-er feels heavy when it is moved from “2H”to “4H” with the steering wheel in turned po-sition.This is normal and not any indication of trou-ble.

CAUTIONl Do not operate the transfer shift lever

while the rear wheels of the vehicle areslipping on snow or ice.


4-30

4

2WD/4WD operation indication lampE00625900036

A- Front wheel lampB- Centre differential lock lampC- Rear wheel lamp

When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,the 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp showsthe shifting condition. The 2WD/4WD operation in-dication lamp comes on at each transfer shift leverposition as follows:

“2H” ↔ “4H”



2H


4H

: Blink: Illuminate: Remain off

“4H” ↔ “4HLc”



4H


4HLc



4-31

4

“4HLc” ↔ “4LLc”



4HLc


4LLc



blinks while the selection is in process. Take

the following precautions when the indica-tion lamp is blinking or remains off.


• If you move the transfer shift lever from“4H” to “4HLc” while the vehicle is sta-tionary, keep your speed initially verylow when you subsequently make a stand-ing start. Before driving at normalspeeds, confirm that the centre differen-tial lock lamp has changed from blinkingto steady illumination.

• If you move the transfer shift lever from“4HLc” to “4H” and the centre differen-tial lock lamp does not stop blinking,place the steering wheel in the straightahead position and slowly depress the ac-celerator pedal several times.

• If you move the transfer shift lever from“4H” to “2H” and the front wheel lampdoes not stop blinking, confirm safetyaround the vehicle then accelerate, decel-erate, and reverse until the front wheellamp goes off. When the front wheellamp goes off, you can then proceed todrive the vehicle.If you accelerate, decelerate, and reversebut the front wheel lamp still does notstop blinking, return the transfer shift lev-er to “4H” then have your vehicle inspec-ted.

l When you move the transfer shift lever from“4H” to “4HLc”, there may be a slight delaybefore the centre differential lock lamp illu-minates.


4-32

4

Rear differential lock*E00606200115

If one wheel starts to spin freely and the vehicle be-comes stuck and cannot be freed even using 4-wheel drive, the rear differential lock switch (A)can be used to activate the rear differential lock forextra traction.

Operating the rear differential lock1. Move the transfer shift lever to “4L” or “4H”

position (easy select 4WD), “4LLc” or“4HLc” position (super select 4WD).

2. To activate the rear differential lock, pressthe rear differential lock switch (1).

3. To deactivate the rear differential lock, pressthe rear differential lock switch (2).

CAUTIONl Operate the rear differential lock switch

after the wheels are stopped. Operatingthe switch with the wheels turning maycause the vehicle to dart in unexpected di-rections.

NOTEl The rear differential lock does not operate

when the transfer shift lever is in “2H” posi-tion (easy select 4WD), “2H” or “4H” posi-tion (super select 4WD).

l When the rear differential is locked with thetransfer shift lever in “4L” or “4H” position(easy select 4WD), “4LLc” or “4HLc” posi-tion (super select 4WD) changing the shiftlever to “2H” position (easy select 4WD),“2H” or “4H” position (super select 4WD)makes the rear differential unlock automati-cally.

The rear differential lock indicationlamp

E00606300291

When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-sition, the rear differential lock indication lamp (A)in the meter cluster illuminates for a few secondsthen indicates the rear differential lock’s operatingstatus (activated or deactivated).

Easy select 4WD

Super select 4WD


4-33

4

NOTEl The 2WD/4WD operation indication lamp al-

so illuminates for a few seconds when the ig-nition switch is turned to the “ON” position.Refer to “2WD/4WD operation indicationlamp” on pages 4-26, 4-31.The status of the rear differential lock (result-ing from depression of the rear differentiallock switch) is shown by blinking or steadyillumination of the rear differential lock indi-cation lamp.

Transfer shiftlever position

Rear differential lock indicationlamp

Easy select4WD

Super select4WD

Rear differen-tial lock deacti-

vated

Switching inprogress

Rear differen-tial lock activa-

ted

: Blink: Illuminate (steady): Remain off

NOTEl The indication lamp blinks while the rear dif-

ferential lock is being switched between itsactivated and deactivated conditions. Whenthe switching operation is complete, the indi-cation lamp is either illuminated steadily ornot illuminated.

l On vehicles with the active stability & trac-tion control (ASTC) and anti-lock brake sys-tem (ABS), the ASTC and ABS functionsare suspended while the rear differential lockis activated. ASTC indication lamp, ASTCOFF indication lamp and ABS warning lampare illuminated while these functions are sus-pended. It dose not indicate a problem. Whenthe rear differential lock is disengaged, theselamps go out and function again.Refer to “ABS warning lamp” on page 4-43,“ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indica-tion lamp” on page 4-46.

l On vehicles with the anti-lock brake system(ABS), the ABS function is suspended whilethe rear differential lock is activated.ABS warning lamp is illuminated while thisfunction is suspended.Refer to “ABS warning lamp” on page 4-43.

l If the indication lamp continues blinking af-ter the switch has been pressed to deactivatethe rear differential lock, hold the steeringwheel in the straight ahead position then slow-ly depress and release the accelerator pedalseveral times.

l If the indication lamp continues blinking af-ter the switch has been pressed to activatethe rear differential lock, bear in mind the fol-lowing instructions:


4-34

4

• If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h (7 mph)or higher, decelerate to a speed of 6 km/h(4 mph) or lower. The indication lampwill illuminate steadily and the rear differ-ential lock will be activated.

• If the vehicle speed is 12 km/h (7 mph)or lower, turn the steering wheel fromside to side until the indication lamp illu-minates steadily. If the vehicle is stuck insoft ground, make sure the area aroundthe vehicle is clear then repeatedly at-tempt to drive forward and backward.The indication lamp will illuminate stead-ily and the rear differential lock will be ac-tivated.

Examples of effective use of the reardifferential lock

E00606400058

CAUTIONl Use the rear differential lock only as an

emergency measure when the vehicle isstuck and cannot be freed with the trans-fer shift lever in “4L” or “4H” position(easy select 4WD) or in “4LLc” or“4HLc” position (super select 4WD). De-activate the rear differential lock immedi-ately after using it.

When one of the wheels has fallen in a ditch

When driving on rocky roadsWhen the vehicle is unable to move because one ofthe wheels is suspended in the air.

When getting out of snowWhen the vehicle is unable to get going becauseone of the wheels is on the snow and the other on apaved road.

Examples of incorrect use of the reardifferential lock

E00606500059

WARNINGl If the “4L” or “4H” position (easy select

4WD), “4LLc” or “4HLc” position (superselect 4WD) is selected along with therear differential lock, the following phe-nomena appear and it is very dangerous.Please be sure to release the rear differen-tial lock on normal roads.


4-35

4

WARNING• If the rear differential lock is used by

mistake when driving on a pavedroad: With the rear differential lockon, the power to drive the vehiclestraight ahead becomes very strong,which may make it difficult to turnthe steering wheel.

WARNINGl If the rear differential lock is used by mis-

take when turning a curve or making aright or left turn at a crossing or the like:The vehicle is unable to make a turn andmay go straight ahead.

WARNINGl If the rear differential lock is used by mis-

take except when making an emergencyescape on snow or frozen road: It be-comes difficult to make a steady turn.

l In the case where the condition of theroad is different for the right tyre todrive from the left tyre (such as one tyreon a paved road and the other on ice), di-rection of the vehicle may change abrupt-ly when engine braking or accelerating.Do not use the rear differential lock ex-cept when making an emergency escapeon a snow or frozen road, but drive with4WD.


4-36

4

4-wheel drive operationE00606600441

By selecting 4-wheel drive, both axles of the vehi-cle are rigidly connected with each other. This im-proves the traction characteristics. When turningsharp corners or moving forward and backward re-peatedly, however, the drive line is stressed, whichis felt as a braking effect. A 4-wheel drive vehiclecan accelerate more quickly and smoothly.However, note that the braking distance is not short-er than that of a rear-wheel drive vehicle.When using 4-wheel drive on rough roads (snow,mud, sand, etc.), it is important to operate the vehi-cle correctly.

NOTEl The driving posture should be more upright

and closer to the wheel than usual; adjust theseat to a good position for easy steering andpedal operation. Be sure to wear the seat belt.

l After driving on rough roads, check eachpart of the vehicle and wash it thoroughlywith water. Refer to the “Vehicle care” sec-tion and “Inspection and maintenance follow-ing rough road operation” on page 4-39.

Driving on dry paved road and highwaySelect “2H” position (easy select 4WD), “2H” or“4H” position (super select 4WD) to drive on thedry paved road. Especially on dry highway, neverselect the “4H” or “4L” position (easy select4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” position (super select4WD).

CAUTIONl Selecting “4H” or “4L” position (easy se-

lect 4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” position (su-per select 4WD) to drive on dry pavedroad will increase the fuel consumptionwith possible noise generation and earlytyre wear.It may also increase the differential oiltemperature, resulting in possible dam-age to the driving system.Further, the drive train will be subjectedto excessive loading, possibly leading tooil leakage, component seizure, or otherserious faults.

Driving on snowy or icy roadsSet the transfer shift lever to “4H” or “4L” position(easy select 4WD), “4H” or “4HLc” position (su-per select 4WD) in accordance with the road condi-tions, and then gradually depress the accelerator ped-al for a smooth start.

NOTEl The use of snow tyres and/or tyre chains is

recommended.l Maintain a safe distance between vehicles,

avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak-ing (downshifting).

CAUTIONl Avoid sudden braking, sudden accelera-

tion, and sharp turning; such operationscould cause skidding and spinouts.

Driving on sandy or muddy roadsSet the transfer shift lever to “4H” or “4L” position(easy select 4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” position (su-per select 4WD) and then gradually depress the ac-celerator pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pres-sure on the accelerator pedal as constant as possi-ble, and drive at low speed.

CAUTIONl Do not force the vehicle or drive reckless-

ly on sandy surfaces. In comparison withnormal road surfaces, the engine and oth-er drive-system components are put un-der excessive strain when driving on sucha surface, and this could lead to accidents.

l If any of following conditions occur whilethe vehicle is being driven, immediatelypark your vehicle in a safe place and fol-low these procedures:

• The needle in the temperature gaugeapproaches the overheating zone.Refer to “Engine overheating” onpage 6-04.

• Automatic transmission fluid temper-ature warning lamp comes on.Refer to “When the A/T (automatictransmission) fluid temperature warn-ing lamp comes on” on page 4-17.


4-37

4

WARNINGl When attempting to rock your vehicle out

of a stuck position, be sure that the areaaround the vehicle is clear of people andphysical objects. The rocking motion maycause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-ward or backward, causing injury or dam-age to nearby people or objects.

NOTEl Avoid sudden braking, acceleration, and turn-

ing; such operations could result in the vehi-cle becoming stuck.

l If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or mud-dy roads, it can often be moved a rocking mo-tion. Move the selector lever rhythmically be-tween the “D” (DRIVE) and “R” (RE-VERSE) position (with manual transmission,between 1st and Reverse), while applyingslight pressure to the accelerator pedal.

l It is recommended to start the vehicle withparking brake partially, but not completely,applied by slightly pulling the parking brakelever.After the vehicle has become free, do not for-get to release the parking brake.

l If it is necessary to drive in extremely muddyconditions, the use of tyre chains is recom-mended. Because the extent of muddy condi-tions is difficult to judge and the vehiclecould become bogged down very deeply, op-eration should be at a low speed. If possible,get out of the vehicle and check the condi-tions ahead before proceeding.

l Driving over roads in coastal areas or roadson which anti-skid preparations have beenspread can cause rust on the vehicle; washthe vehicle thoroughly as soon as possible af-ter such use.

Climbing sharp gradesSet the transfer shift lever to “4L” position (easy se-lect 4WD), “4LLc” position (super select 4WD) tomaximize the engine torque.

WARNINGl Go straight up. Do not try to traverse

across a steep slope.l If you begin to lose traction, ease off the

accelerator pedal and gently turn thesteering wheel alternatively left and rightto regain adequate traction again.

NOTEl Choose as smooth a slope as possible with

few stones or other obstacles.l Before attempting to drive up the slope, walk

up it to confirm that the vehicle can handlethe grade.

Descending sharp gradesSet the transfer shift lever to “4L” position (easy se-lect 4WD), “4LLc” position (super select 4WD),use the engine brake (downshifting) and descendslowly.

WARNINGl Avoid snaking down a sharp grade. De-

scend the grade as straight as possible.

NOTEl When descending a sharp grade, if the brakes

are applied suddenly because of an obstacleencountered, control of the vehicle could belost. Before descending the slope, walk downit and confirm the path.

l Before descending a grade, it is necessary tochoose the appropriate gear. Avoid changinggears or depressing the clutch while descend-ing the grade.

l MITSUBISHI MOTORS is not responsibleto the operator for any damage or injurycaused or liability incurred by the improperand negligent operation of a vehicle. All tech-niques of vehicle operation described hereindepend on the skill and experience of the op-erator and other participating parties and anydeviation from the recommended operationinstructions above is at their own risk.

Turning sharp cornersWhen turning a sharp corner in “4H” or “4L” posi-tion (easy select 4WD), “4HLc” or “4LLc” posi-tion (super select 4WD) at low speed, a slight dif-ference in steering may be experienced similar toas if the brakes were applied. This is called tight cor-ner braking and results from each of the 4 tyres be-ing at a different distance from the corner.The phenomenon is peculiar to 4-wheel drive vehi-cles. If this occurs, either straighten the steeringwheel, or change to rear-wheel drive.


4-38

4

Crossing a stream4-wheel drive vehicles are not necessarily water-proof. If the electrical circuits become wet, furtheroperation of the vehicle will be impossible; there-fore, avoid crossing streams unless absolutely nec-essary. If crossing a stream is unavoidable, use thefollowing procedure:

1. Check depths of a stream and geographicalfeatures before attempting to cross a streamand ford the stream where the water is as shal-low as practicable.

2. Set the transfer shift lever to “4L” position(easy select 4WD), “4LLc” position (super se-lect 4WD).

3. Drive slowly at a speed of approximately5 km/h (3 mph) to avoid splashing too muchwater.

CAUTIONl Never cross a stream where the water is

deep.Do not change gears while crossing thestream.Frequent crossing of streams can adverse-ly affect the life span of the vehicle; we rec-ommend you to take the necessary meas-ures to prepare, inspect, and repair the ve-hicle.

After crossing a stream, apply the brakes to be surethey are functioning properly. If the brakes are wetand not functioning properly, dry them out by driv-ing slowly while lightly depressing the brake pedal.Inspect each part of the vehicle carefully.

Inspection and maintenancefollowing rough road operation

E00606700048

After operating the vehicle in rough road condi-tions, be sure to perform the following inspectionand maintenance procedures:l Check that the vehicle has not been damaged

by rocks, gravel, etc.l Carefully wash the vehicle with water.

After washing, drive the vehicle slowlywhile lightly depressing the brake pedal in or-der to dry out the brakes. If the brakes stilldo not function properly, we recommend youto have the brakes checked as soon as possible.

l Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog-ging the radiator core.

l After crossing a stream, be sure to have thefollowing items inspected at a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point and takethe necessary measures.

• Check the brake system and, if necessary,have it serviced.

• Check the engine, transmission, transfer,and differential oil or grease level and tur-bidity. If the oil or grease is milky, it indi-cates water contamination. Replace itwith new oil or grease.

• Grease the propeller shaft.• Check the inside of the vehicle. If ingress

of water is found, dry the carpet etc.• Inspect the headlamps. If the headlamp

bulb is flooded with water, we recom-mend you to have it drained.

Cautions on handling of 4-wheeldrive vehicles

E00606800368

Tyres and wheelsSince the driving torque can be applied to the 4wheels, the performance of the vehicle when oper-ating in 4-wheel drive is greatly affected by the con-dition of the tyres. Pay close attention to the tyres.l Install specified tyres on all wheels. Refer to

“Tyres and wheels” on page 9-17.l Be sure to fit all 4 tyres and wheels of the

same size and type.When replacement of any of the tyres orwheels is necessary, replace all of them.

l All tyres should be rotated whenever thewear difference between the front and reartyres is recognizable.

Good vehicle performance cannot be expected ifthere is a difference in wear between tyres. Refer to“Tyre rotation” on page 8-12.l Check the tyre inflation pressure regularly.


4-39

4

CAUTIONl Always use tyres of the same size, same

type, and same brand which have nowear differences. Using the tyres whichdiffer in size, type, brands or the degreeof wear will increase the differential oiltemperature, resulting in possible dam-age to the driving system. Further, thedrive train will be subjected to excessiveloading, possibly leading to oil leakage,component seizure, or other serious faults.

TowingIf towing is necessary, we recommend you to haveit done by your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service.In the following cases, transport the vehicle using atow truck.l The engine runs but the vehicle does not

move or abnormal noise is produced.l Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals

that oil or some other fluid is leaking.

Only when you cannot receive a towing servicefrom a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-ice Point or commercial tow truck service, towyour vehicle carefully in accordance with the in-structions given in “Towing” on page 6-20.

CAUTIONl Be sure to shift the transfer shift lever to

“2H” position and transport the vehiclewith the driving wheels on a carriage(Type A, C or D) as illustrated. Never tryto tow with the transfer shift lever in“4H” or “4L” position (easy select 4WD),“4H”, “4HLc” or “4LLc” position (superselect 4WD) and with the front or rearwheels on the ground (Type A or B) as il-lustrated. This could result in damage tothe drivetrain, or unstable towing.If you cannot shift the transfer shift leverto “2H” position or the transmission ismalfunctioning or damaged, transportthe vehicle with all the wheels on a car-riage (Type C or D) as illustrated.

Jacking up 4-wheel drive vehicles

WARNINGl Do not crank the engine while jacking up

the vehicle.The tyre on the ground may turn and thevehicle may roll off the jack.

Clutch operationQuick or slight clutch engagement made while theengine is running at high speed will cause damageto the clutch and transmission because the tractiveforce is very great.Operate the pedal slowly and positively.


4-40

4

Limited-slip differential*E00606900037

A limited-slip differential is applied for the rearwheel differential only. The features of this limited-slip differential are described below: Just as with a conventional differential, the wheelon one side is allowed to turn at a different speedfrom the wheel on the other side when the vehicleis cornering. The difference between the limited-slip differential and a conventional differential isthat if the wheel on one side of the vehicle loses trac-tion, a greater amount of torque is applied to thewheel on the other side to improve traction.

NOTEl Even if there is a difference in the amount of

traction the wheels can get, if both of themare spinning, the limited-slip differential willnot be effective.

CAUTIONl Never start the engine while one of the

rear wheels is jacked up and the other incontact with the ground; doing so maycause the vehicle to jump forward.

l When attempting to extract the vehiclefrom snow, mud, etc., and the engine isrun continuously at high speed, the limi-ted-slip differential will be adversely af-fected.

BrakingE00607001494

All the parts of the brake system are critical to safe-ty. We recommend you to have the vehiclechecked at regular intervals according to the serv-ice booklet.

CAUTIONl Avoid driving habits that cause heavy

braking and never “ride” the brakes byresting your foot on the brake pedalwhile driving.It causes brake overheating and fade.

Brake systemThe service brake is divided into two brake cir-cuits. And your vehicle is equipped with powerbrakes. If one brake circuit fails, the other is availa-ble to stop the vehicle. If you should lose the pow-er assist for some reason, the brakes will still work.In these situations, even if the brake pedal movesdown to the very end of its possible stroke or re-sists being depressed, keep depressing the brake ped-al down harder and further than usual; stop drivingas soon as possible and have the brake system re-paired.

WARNINGl Do not turn off the engine while your ve-

hicle is in motion. If you turn off the en-gine while driving, the power assistancefor the braking system will stop workingand your brakes will not work effectively.

WARNINGl If the power assist is lost or if either

brake hydraulic system stops workingproperly, have your vehicle checked im-mediately.

Warning lampThe brake warning lamp illuminates to indicate afault in the braking system. Refer to “Brake warn-ing lamp” on page 3-08.

When brakes are wetCheck the brake system while driving at a lowspeed immediately after starting, especially whenthe brakes are wet, to confirm they work normally.A film of water can be formed on the brake discsor brake drums and prevent normal braking afterdriving in heavy rain or through large puddles, orafter the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry thebrakes out by driving slowly while lightly depress-ing the brake pedal.

When driving downhillIt is important to take advantage of the engine brak-ing by shifting to a lower shift position while driv-ing on steep downhill roads in order to prevent thebrakes from overheating.


4-41

4

WARNINGl Do not leave any objects near the brake

pedal or let a floor mat slide under it; do-ing so could prevent the full pedal strokethat would be necessary in an emergency.Make sure that the pedal can be operatedfreely at all times. Make sure the floormat is securely held in place.

Brake pads and liningsl Avoid hard braking situations.

New brakes need to be broken-in by moder-ate use for the first 200 km (124 miles).

l The disc brakes are provided with a warningdevice which emits a shrieking metallicsound while braking if the brake pads havereached their wear limit.If you hear this sound, have the brake pads re-placed immediately.

WARNINGl Driving with worn brake pads will make

it harder to stop, and can cause an acci-dent.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)*E00607100775

Environmental conditions can have an effect onbraking. During sudden braking when there issnow, ice, oil, water etc. on the road surface, a skidmay occur. In this situation, steering control andbraking effectiveness is reduced and the stoppingdistance is increased. The vehicle may also go intoan uncontrolled spin.The ABS helps prevent the wheels from locking dur-ing braking, thus maintaining directional stability,ensuring controllability and providing optimumbraking force.

Driving hintsl With ABS fitted, steering during sudden brak-

ing (when the ABS functions) differs slightlyfrom when the brakes are not being applied.Steer the vehicle carefully in these conditions.

l Always maintain the same distance from thevehicle in front of you as you would for a ve-hicle not equipped with ABS.Compared with vehicles not fitted with ABS,your vehicle may require a longer stoppingdistance in the following cases:

• Driving on gravel or snow-covered roads.• Driving with tyre chains installed.• Driving on roads where the road surface

is pitted or has other differences in sur-face height.

• Driving on bumpy roads or other poor driv-ing surfaces.

l Operation of ABS is not restricted to situa-tions where brakes are applied suddenly.This system may also operate to preventwheel lock when you are driving over man-holes, steel road-work plates, or the vehicleis driven over steps or level differences inthe road, road markings, or other surfaceswhich are difficult for the wheels to grip.

l When the ABS is activated, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsation and hear a characteris-tic noise. Also at this time, you may feel as ifthe pedal attempts to resist being depressed.In this situation, to let the ABS work foryou, just hold the brake pedal down morefirmly. Do not pump the brake. This pump-ing will result in reduced braking perform-ance.

CAUTIONl Even the ABS cannot prevent the natural

laws of physics from acting on the vehi-cle. It cannot for instance avoid accidentsthat may result from excessive speed onbends or following another vehicle tooclosely or aquaplaning. It should remainthe driver’s task to observe safety precau-tions to judge speeds and brake applica-tions correctly in such conditions.

l Be sure to use tyres of the same type andsize on 4 wheels.If tyre types or sizes are mixed, ABS maynot function normally.


4-42

4

CAUTIONl Never install a limited-slip differential,

which is not a MITSUBISHI MOTORSgenuine part, as the ABS may not func-tion normally.We recommend you to consult aMITSUBISHI MOTORS AuthorizedService Point.

ABS warning lampE00607200910

The ABS warning lamp should illuminate when theignition switch is turned “ON”, and should go offin a few seconds.

CAUTIONl If the warning lamp stays on or does not

illuminate when you start the vehicle, it in-dicates that the ABS is not functioningand that only the standard brake systemis in operation. (In this condition the stand-ard hydraulic brake system will still func-tion.) We recommend you to have your ve-hicle inspected as soon as possible.

NOTEl On vehicles with the rear differential lock,

ABS and the active stability & traction con-trol (ASTC) functions are suspended whilethe rear differential lock is activated.ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indica-tion lamp, ABS warning lamp and brake warn-ing lamp are illuminated while these func-tions are suspended.It does not indicate a problem. When the reardifferential lock is disengaged, these lampsgo out and function again. Refer to “ABSwarning lamp” on page 4-43, “ASTC indica-tion lamp, ASTC OFF indication lamp” onpage 4-46.

l On vehicles with rear differential lock, ABSfunctionality is suspended while the rear dif-ferential lock is operating.The ABS warning lamp is illuminated whileABS functionality is suspended. It does notindicate a problem. When the rear differen-tial lock is disengaged, the ABS warninglamp goes off and the ABS functions again.Refer to “Rear differential lock” on page4-33.

If the warning lamp illuminates whiledriving

E00607300663

If only the ABS warning lamp illuminatesl Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place.Restart the engine and check to see whetherthe lamp goes out after a few minutes driv-ing; if it then remains off during driving,there is no problem.However, if the lamp does not go out, or if itlights up again when the vehicle is driven,we recommend you to have the vehiclechecked as soon as possible.

l The ABS warning lamp can illuminate if thebattery voltage is insufficient when the en-gine is started. In this case, it does not indi-cate an ABS fault.Charge the battery by allowing the engine toidle for a while.If the battery has been charged but the ABSwarning lamp continues to illuminate or illu-minates intermittently, have the vehicle in-spected.

If the ABS warning lamp and brake warninglamp illuminate at the same timel The ABS and brake force distribution func-

tion may not work, so hard braking couldmake the vehicle unstable.Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.


4-43

4

NOTEl Immediately after the vehicle starts moving

after engine start up, a whining sound of a mo-tor will be heard from the engine compart-ment. If the brake pedal is depressed at thatmoment, you can feel the brake pedal pulsat-ing.This pulsation is due to the self-diagnosis op-eration of the ABS and does not indicate amalfunction.

l After driving on snowy roads, remove anysnow and ice which may have become ad-hered to the wheel areas.When doing this, be careful not to damagethe wheel speed sensors (A) and cables loca-ted at each wheel on vehicles equipped withan ABS.

Front

Rear

l The ABS becomes operative after the vehiclehas accelerated to a speed in excess of approx-imately 10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operatingwhen the vehicle decelerates to a speed be-low approximately 7 km/h (4 mph).

Power steering systemE00607400071

When the engine is stopped, the power steering sys-tem will not function and it will require greater man-ual effort to operate the steering wheel. Keep thisin mind in particular when towing the vehicle. Nev-er turn off the engine while driving.Periodically check the power steering fluid level.

CAUTIONl Do not hold the steering wheel in the fully

turned position (either left or right), forlonger than 10 seconds.This can cause damage to the power steer-ing system.


4-44

4

Active Stability & TractionControl (ASTC)*

E00616700285

The active stability & traction control (ASTC)takes overall control of the anti-lock brake system,traction control function and Active Stability Con-trol function to help maintain the vehicle’s controland traction. Please read this section in conjunctionwith the page on the anti-lock brake system, trac-tion control function and Active Stability Controlfunction. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ® p. 4-42Active Traction Control function ® p. 4-46Active Stability Control function ® p. 4-45

CAUTIONl Do not over-rely on the ASTC. This sys-

tem, like any other system, has limits andcannot help you to maintain traction andcontrol of the vehicle in all circumstan-ces. Reckless driving may lead to acci-dents. Always drive carefully, taking intoaccount the traffic, road and environmen-tal conditions.

l Be sure to use the same specified type andsize of tyre on all 4 wheels. Otherwise, theASTC may not work correctly.

NOTEl After your vehicle is driven a short distance

after starting the engine, a click is heard fromthe engine compartment; however, this is on-ly the sound of ASTC being checked.

l Some vibration will be felt in the vehiclebody and a whining sound of a motor will beheard from the engine compartment whenthe ASTC functions. This is a normal resultof the ASTC operation, and does not indicatea malfunction.

l The ASTC does not operate while the ABSwarning lamp is illuminated.

l On vehicles with the rear differential lock,the ASTC and ABS functions are suspendedwhile the rear differential lock is activated.ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF indica-tion lamp and ABS warning lamp are illumi-nated while these functions are suspended. Itdose not indicate a problem. When the reardifferential lock is disengaged, these lampsgo out and function again.Refer to “Brake warning lamp” on page 3-08,“ABS warning lamp” on page 4-43, “ASTCindication lamp, ASTC OFF indicationlamp” on page 4-46.

Driving hintsE00616800039

When extricating the vehicle from mud, sand orfresh snow, you may find that operation of theASTC prevents the engine speed from increasingin response to depression of the accelerator pedal.If this happens and the vehicle remains stuck as aresult, deactivate the ASC function by pressing the“ASC OFF” switch. The vehicle will then be easierto extricate. (Brake control of the ATC function isstill working to prevent wheel spins when the ASCfunction is deactivated by pressing the “ASC OFF”switch.)

Active Stability Control functionE00616900056

The Active Stability Control function is designedto improve the vehicle’s stability by restraining itstendency to slip sideways (for example, when round-ing a curve in slippery conditions, or when the driv-er takes rapid steering action to avoid an obstacle).It works by controlling the engine output and brakeon each wheel.

NOTEl On vehicles with the rear differential lock,

the Active Stability Control function doesnot operate when the rear differential lock isactivated.


4-45

4

“ASC OFF” switchThe Active Stability Control function is automati-cally activated when the ignition switch is turned tothe “ON” position. You can deactivate the systemby pressing the “ASC OFF” switch when the vehi-cle speed is below about 40 km/h (25 mph). To re-activate the Active Stability Control function, pressthe “ASC OFF” switch again. It is strongly recom-mended that the Active Stability Control functionnormally be kept activated.

Type 1

Type 2

NOTEl If the vehicle speed increases to about

120 km/h (74 mph) with the Active StabilityControl function deactivated, the Active Sta-bility Control function automatically starts op-erating. To subsequently stop the Active Sta-bility Control function, stop the vehicle andpress the “ASC OFF” switch again.

Active Traction Control functionE00617000025

On slippery surfaces, active traction control func-tion prevents the drive wheels from excessive spin-ning, thus helping the vehicle to start moving froma stop. It also provides sufficient driving force andsteering performance as the vehicle turns at acceler-ated speeds.

CAUTIONl When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy

road, be sure to install snow tyres anddrive the vehicle at moderate speeds.

ASTC indication lamp, ASTC OFF in-dication lamp

E00617100071

The Active Stability Control function and activetraction control function share the same indicationlamp.The indication lamps should illuminate when the ig-nition switch is turned to the “ON” position, andshould go off after a few seconds.If the indication lamps stay on or do not illuminatewhen the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” po-sition, we recommend you to have your vehicle in-spected as soon as possible.

indication lamp blinks when the Active Stabili-ty Control function or active traction control func-tion is operating.

indication lamp is illuminated when the ActiveStability Control function is OFF.

CAUTIONl When indication lamp blinks, ASC

function or ATC function is operating,which means that the road is slippery orthat your vehicle’s wheels are slipping ex-cessively. If this happens, drive slowerwith less accelerator input.

CAUTIONl If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-

tem while driving, the indication lampwill illuminate.In these cases, follow these procedures:


4-46

4

CAUTION• If the temperature in the braking sys-

tem continues to increase due to con-tinuous brake control on a slipperyroad surface, the indication lampwill illuminate, and operation of theASC function and ATC function willbe suspended to protect the brake sys-tem. (Normal operation of the vehiclewill not be affected.) Park your vehi-cle in a safe place. When the tempera-ture in the braking system has comedown, the indication lamp will gooff and the ASC function and ATCfunction will start operating again.

• If the indication lamp does not goout even through the above procedureis followed, there could be a problemin the system.Stop the engine and start the engineagain and check whether the indi-cation lamp goes out. If the indicationlamp goes out, there is no abnormalcondition.If the indication lamp illuminateseven after your vehicle is driven ashort distance after restarting the en-gine, we recommend you to have yourvehicle checked as soon as possible.

CAUTIONl If the vehicle is towed with the ignition

switch in the “ON” position and only thefront wheels or only the rear wheelsraised off the ground, the ASTC may op-erate, resulting in an accident. When tow-ing the vehicle with the front wheelsraised, keep the ignition switch in the“LOCK” or “ACC” position. When tow-ing the vehicle with the rear wheelsraised, keep the ignition switch in the“ACC” position.Refer to “Towing” on page 6-20.

Cruise control*E00609100779

Cruise control is an automatic speed control systemthat keeps a set speed. It can be activated at about40 km/h (25 mph) or more.

CAUTIONl When you do not wish to drive at a set

speed, turn off the cruise control for safety.l Do not use cruise control when driving

conditions will not allow you to stay atthe same speed, such as in heavy trafficor on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet, slippery, on a steep down-hill slope.

l On vehicles with manual transmission, donot move the gearshift lever to the “N”(Neutral) position while driving at a setspeed without depressing the clutch ped-al. The engine will run too fast and mightbe damaged.

NOTEl Cruise control may not be able to keep your

speed on uphills or downhills.l Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill.

You may use the accelerator pedal if youwant to stay at your set speed.

l Your speed may increase to more than theset speed on a steep downhill. You must usethe brake to control your speed. As a result,the set speed driving is deactivated.


4-47

4

Cruise control switchesE00624100103

A- “ON OFF” switchUsed to turn on and off the cruise control. B- “COAST SET” switchUsed to reduce the set speed and to set the desiredspeed. C- “ACC RES” switchUsed to increase the set speed and to return to theoriginal set speed. D- “CANCEL” switchUsed to deactivate the set speed driving.

NOTEl When operating the cruise control switches,

press the cruise control switches correctly.The set speed driving may be deactivated au-tomatically if two or more switches of thecruise control are pressed at the same time.

To activateE00609300771

1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi-tion, press the “ON OFF” switch (A) to turnon the cruise control. The “CRUISE” indica-tion lamp in the meter cluster will come on.

NOTEl If the cruise control is on when the ignition

switch is turned to the “LOCK” or “ACC” po-sition, cruise control will be on automaticallythe next time you start the engine. The“CRUISE” indication lamp will also be on.

l If the battery voltage is insufficient, the mem-ory data for the cruise control may be erased.As a result, the “CRUISE” indication lampmay not come on when you restart the engine.If this happens, press the “ON OFF” switchonce again to turn on the cruise control.

2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desiredspeed, then press and release the “COASTSET” switch (B) when the “CRUISE” indica-tion lamp is illuminated. The vehicle willthen maintain the desired speed.

NOTEl When you release the “COAST SET”

switch, the vehicle speed will be set.

To increase the set speedE00609400570

There are 2 ways to increase the set speed.

“ACC RES” switchPress and hold the “ACC RES” switch (C) whiledriving at the set speed, and your speed will thengradually increase.


4-48

4

When you reach your desired speed, release theswitch. Your new cruising speed is now set.

To increase your speed in small amounts, press the“ACC RES” switch for less than about 1 secondand release it. Each time you press the “ACC RES”switch, your vehicle will go about 1.6 km/h(1 mph) faster.

Accelerator pedalWhile driving at the set speed, use the acceleratorpedal to reach your desired speed and then pressthe “COAST SET” switch (B) and release theswitch momentarily to set a new desired cruisingspeed.

To decrease the set speedE00609500500

There are 2 ways to decrease the set speed.

“COAST SET” switchPress and hold the “COAST SET” switch (B) whiledriving at the set speed, and your speed will slowdown gradually.

When you reach your desired speed, release theswitch. Your new cruising speed is now set.

To slow down your speed in small amounts, pressthe “COAST SET” switch for less than about 1 sec-ond and release it.Each time you press the “COAST SET” switch,your vehicle will slow down by about 1.6 km/h(1 mph).


4-49

4

Brake pedalWhile driving at the set speed, use the brake pedal,which disengages the cruise control, then press the“COAST SET” switch (B) and release the switchmomentarily to set a new desired cruising speed.

To temporarily increase or decreasethe speed

E00619500154

To temporarily increase the speedDepress the accelerator pedal as you would normal-ly. When you release the pedal, you will return toyour set speed.

To temporarily decrease the speedDepress the brake pedal to decrease the speed. Toreturn to the previously set speed, press the “ACCRES” switch (C).Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page 4-51.

To deactivateE00609701088

The set speed driving can be deactivated as follows:l Press the “ON OFF” switch (A). (Cruise con-

trol will be turned off.)l Press the “CANCEL” switch (D).l Depress the brake pedal.

The set speed driving is deactivated automaticallyin any of the following ways.l When you depress the clutch pedal (on vehi-

cles with manual transmission).l When your speed slows to about 15 km/h

(9 mph) or more below the set speed becauseof a hill, etc.

l When your speed slows to about 40 km/h(25 mph) or less.

l When the active stability & traction control(ASTC) starts operating. (if so equipped)Refer to “Active Stability & Traction Con-trol (ASTC)” on page 4-45.


4-50

4

WARNINGl On vehicles with automatic transmission,

although, the set speed driving will be de-activated when shifting to the “N” (NEU-TRAL) position, never move the selectorlever to the “N” (NEUTRAL) positionwhile driving.You would have no engine braking andcould cause a serious accident.

Also, the set speed driving may be deactivated asfollows:l When the engine speed rises and approaches

the tachometer’s red zone (the red-colouredpart of the tachometer dial).

CAUTIONl When the set speed driving is deactivated

automatically in any situation other thanthose listed above, there may be a systemmalfunction.Press the “ON OFF” switch to turn offthe cruise control and have it inspectedby a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.

To resume the set speedE00609800561

If the set speed driving is deactivated by the condi-tion described in “To deactivate” on page 4-50,you can resume the previously set speed by press-ing the “ACC RES” switch (C) while driving at aspeed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or higher.

Under either of the following conditions, however,using the switch does not allow you to resume thepreviously set speed. In these situations, repeat thespeed setting procedure:l The “ON OFF” switch is pressed.l The ignition switch is turned OFF.l “CRUISE” indication lamp is turned OFF.

Cargo loadsE00609901123

Cargo loads precautions

CAUTIONl When loading luggage, be careful to the

following.• Stow cargo and luggage in the cargo

area whenever possible.• Distribute cargo or luggage evenly not

to be unbalanced in weight of a load.• Do not place cargo or luggage on the

instrument panel.Also, do not stack up cargo or luggageon the front passenger’s seat or therear seat.Having the driver’s vision blocked,and your cargo being thrown insidethe cabin if you suddenly have tobrake can cause a serious accident orinjury.


4-51

4

Trailer towingE00610000433

In order to tow a trailer with your vehicle, when hav-ing a trailer towing device mounted that meets allrelevant regulations in your area, consult aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point.The regulations concerning the towing of a trailermay differ from country to country. You are ad-vised to obey the regulations in each area.

CAUTIONl Danger of Accident!

A towing bar should be fitted accordingto MITSUBISHI MOTORS guidelines.

NOTEl If you are going to tow a trailer, pay careful

attention to the following points.

Maximum towable weight with brakeand maximum trailer-nose weightNever exceed the maximum towable weight withbrake and the maximum trailer-nose weight as lis-ted in the specifications. (Refer to “Vehicleweight” on page 9-10.)If you tow a trailer at an altitude of more than1,000 m above sea-level, reduce your weight by10 % of the gross combination weight for every in-crease of 1,000 m above sea-level, as the engine out-put is lowered owing to decrease in atmosphericpressure.

Towing bar mounting specificationsSee the following table for fixing points (A) for thetowing bar.

Club cab

Single cab, Double cab


4-52

4

Club cab Single cab, Double cab(Vehicles without long bed)

Double cab(Vehicles with long bed)

1 30 mm 30 mm 30 mm

2 55 mm 55 mm 55 mm

3 115 mm 60 mm 60 mm

4 872 mm 812 mm 812 mm

5 20 mm 20 mm 20 mm

6 85 mm 85 mm 85 mm

7 699 - 712 mm 687 - 701 mm, 586 - 591 mm* 680 - 716 mm, 588 mm*

8 656 - 669 mm 644 - 658 mm, 543 - 548 mm* 637 - 673 mm, 545 mm*

9 626 - 639 mm 614 - 628 mm, 513 - 518 mm* 607 - 643 mm, 515 mm*

10 410 - 423 mm 398 - 412 mm, 292 - 297 mm* 399 - 418 mm, 304 mm*

11 486 - 499 mm 474 - 488 mm, 483 - 488 mm* 475 - 494 mm, 485 mm*

12 897 mm 897 mm 897 mm

13 1,251 mm 1,136 mm 1,316 mm

14 70 mm 70 mm 70 mm

15 502.5 mm 502.5 mm 502.5 mm

16 540.5 mm 540.5 mm 540.5 mm

Item 7, 8, 9, 10, 11: at kerb weight*: 2WD vehicles with 15 inch tyres

NOTEl The values under item 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 are applicable to unladen vehicles. These values can also be varied depending on the tyre size, optional equipment and

suspension conditions.


4-53

4

Operating hintsl Do not let the clutch slip (vehicles with a man-

ual transmission only) and do not increasethe engine speed more than necessary whenstarting.

l Be sure that the driving speed does not ex-ceed the maximum speed for trailer operation.

l To prevent shocks from the overrun brake, de-press the brake pedal lightly at first and thenmore strongly.

l To make full use of engine braking, changeto a lower gear before descending a slope.

l The body, brakes, clutch, and chassis will beunder additional strain when towing a trailer.

l The heavier weight and higher rolling and airresistance will increase fuel consumption.

Additional precautions for vehicles equipped withan automatic transmissionIt is recommended to use the “2” (SECOND) posi-tion (4A/T) or 2nd gear in sports mode (5A/T) onslopes or at low speed. Use the “L” (LOW) posi-tion (4A/T) or the 1st gear in sports mode (5A/T) inmountainous areas in order to make better use of en-gine braking and to assist the brake system. Howev-er, be sure that the speed does not exceed the maxi-mum speed limit for the selected gear.


4-54

4

Ventilators....................................................................................5-02Heater/Manual air conditioning*..................................................5-04Automatic air conditioning*.........................................................5-08Important operation tips for the air conditioning..........................5-12Air purifier (with deodorizing function)*.....................................5-13LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player*................5-14To use the external audio input function*....................................5-28Steering wheel remote control switch*........................................5-29Error codes....................................................................................5-31Audio system anti-theft feature....................................................5-33Handling of compact discs...........................................................5-33Antenna.........................................................................................5-35Sun visors.....................................................................................5-36Vanity mirror*..............................................................................5-37Ashtray..........................................................................................5-37Cigarette lighter............................................................................5-38Accessory socket*........................................................................5-39Digital clock*...............................................................................5-40Interior lamps................................................................................5-40Storage spaces...............................................................................5-42Cup holder*..................................................................................5-45Bottle holder.................................................................................5-46Convenient hook...........................................................................5-47Coat hook*....................................................................................5-47First-aid kit and warning triangle securing bands*......................5-47

For pleasant driving

5

VentilatorsE00700100344

1- Centre ventilators2- Side ventilators

Air flow and direction adjustmentsE00700200749

Centre ventilatorsAdjust the direction of the air flow by moving theknob (A).

Side ventilatorsThe ventilator can be opened and closed with the di-al (B).( ) - Open( ) - CloseAdjust the direction of the air flow by moving theknob (C).

LHD RHD

NOTEl On air conditioned vehicles, the cool air

from the ventilators may appear as a mist.This is due to moist air being suddenlycooled by the air conditioning. This willclear after a few moments.

Changing the mode selectionE00700301008

To change the position and amount of air flowingfrom the ventilators, turn the mode selection dial.(Refer to “Mode selection dial” on pages 5-04,5-10.)These symbols are used in the next several illustra-tions to demonstrate the quantity of air comingfrom the ventilators.

: Small amount of air from the ventilators

: Medium amount of air from the ventilators: Large amount of air from the ventilators

Face positionAir flows only to the upper part of the passengercompartment.

Foot/Face positionAir flows to the upper part of the passenger com-partment, and flows to the leg area.

: Optional equipment


5-02

5

NOTEl With the mode selection dial between the

“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainlyto the upper part of the passenger compart-ment. With the mode selection dial betweenthe “ ” and “ ” positions, air flows main-ly to the leg area.

Foot positionAir flows mainly to the leg area.


Foot/Demister positionAir flows to the leg area, the windscreen and thedoor windows.


NOTEl With the mode selection dial between the

“ ” and “ ” positions, air flows mainlyto the leg area. With the mode selection dialbetween the “ ” and “ ” positions, airflows mainly to the windscreen and door win-dows.

Demister positionAir flows mainly to the windscreen and the doorwindows.


5-03

5

Heater/Manual air conditioning*E00700500410

The heater/air conditioning can only be used whilethe engine is running.

Control panelE00700600280

LHD

RHD

1- Mode selection dial2- Rear window demister switch ® p. 3-403- Blower speed selection dial4- Air conditioning switch*5- Temperature control dial6- Air selection lever

Blower speed selection dialE00700700119

Select the blower speed by turning the blowerspeed selection dial clockwise or anticlockwise.The blower speed will gradually increase as the di-al is turned to the right.When the blower speed selection dial is set to the“OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow will stop.

Temperature control dialE00700900209

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise tomake the air warmer. Turn it anticlockwise tomake the air cooler.

NOTEl While the engine coolant temperature is low,

the temperature of the air from the heaterwill be cool/cold until the engine warms up,even if you have selected warm air with thedial.

Mode selection dialE00701100266

To change the position and amount of air flowingfrom the ventilators, turn the mode selection dial.(Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page5-02.)

Air selection leverE00701300460

To change the air selection, use the air selection lev-er.l “ ” Outside air

Outside air is introduced into the passengercompartment.

l “ ” Recirculated air


5-04

5

Air is recirculated inside the passenger com-partment.

LHD

RHD

CAUTIONl Normally, use the “ ” (outside) posi-

tion to keep the windscreen and side win-dows clear and quickly remove fog orfrost from the windscreen.If high cooling performance is desired, orif the outside air is dusty or otherwise con-taminated, use the “ ” (recirculation)position. Set the air selection lever to the“ ” (outside) position periodically to in-crease ventilation so that the windows donot become fogged up.

l Use of the “ ” (recirculation) positionfor extended time may cause the windowsto fog up.

Air conditioning switch*E00701500781

Push the switch, and the air conditioning compres-sor will turn on. The air conditioning indicationlamp (A) will come on.

LHD

RHD

Push the switch again and the air conditioning com-pressor will stop and the indication lamp goes off.

CAUTIONl When using the air conditioning, the

idling speed may slightly increase as theair conditioning compressor is switchedon/off automatically. While the vehiclewith an A/T is stationary, fully depressthe brake pedal to prevent the vehiclefrom creeping.

Operating the air conditioning systemE00701800247

HeatingSet the mode selection dial to the “ ” positionand set the air selection lever to the “ ” (out-side) position.


5-05

5

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise or anti-clockwise to the desired temperature. Select the de-sired blower speed.

LHD

RHD

NOTEl For maximum heat, set the blower speed at

the 3rd position.

Cooling (vehicles with air conditioning)E00701900424

LHD

RHD

1. Set the mode selection dial to the “ ” posi-tion.

2. Set the air selection lever to the “ ” (out-side) position.

3. Push the air conditioning switch (B).4. Change the temperature by turning the con-

trol dial clockwise or anticlockwise.5. Select the desired blower speed.

CAUTIONl If the outside air is dusty or otherwise con-

taminated, or if high cooling performanceis desired, set air selection lever to the“ ” (recirculation) position and the tem-perature control dial all the way to the left.Set to the “ ” (outside) position period-ically to increase ventilation so that thewindows do not become fogged up.

Combination of unheated air and heated airE00702000246

Select the mode selection dial to the positionshown in the illustration and set the air selection lev-er to the “ ” (outside) position.The air flow will be directed to the leg area and theupper part of the passenger compartment. Selectthe desired blower speed.

LHD


5-06

5

RHD

Warm air flows to the leg area and unheated orslightly warm air (depending upon temperature set-ting) flows to the upper part of the passenger com-partment.

Demisting of the windscreen and door windowsE00702100579

CAUTIONl For safety, make sure you have a clear

view through all the windows.

To remove frost or mist from the windscreen anddoor windows, use the mode selection dial (“ ”or “ ”).

For ordinary demistingUse this setting to keep the windscreen and doorwindows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heat-ed (when driving in rain or snow).

LHD

RHD



3. Select your desired blower speed by turningthe blower speed selection dial.

4. Select your desired temperature by turningthe temperature control dial.

5. Push the air conditioning switch (B).(vehicles with air conditioning)

For quick demisting

LHD


5-07

5

RHD



3. Set the blower to the maximum speed.4. Set the temperature to the maximum temper-

ature position.5. Push the air conditioning switch (B).

(vehicles with air conditioning)

NOTEl To demist effectively, direct the air flow

from the side ventilators towards the door win-dows.

l Do not set the temperature control dial to themax. cool position. Cool air will blowagainst the window glasses and form mist onthem.

Introduction of outside airE00702200235

To introduce air into the vehicle during hot weath-er, set the air selection lever to the “ ” (outside)position and set the temperature control dial to thepositions shown in the illustration. Be sure to setthe temperature control dial all the way to the left.Select the desired blower speed.

LHD

RHD

NOTEl Turn the mode selection dial clockwise and

air will flow to the leg area and the windscreen.

Automatic air conditioning*E00702400110

The air conditioning can only be used while the en-gine is running.

Control panelE00702501192

Type 1

Type 2

1- Mode selection dial2- Blower speed selection dial3- Temperature control dial4- Rear window demister switch ® p. 3-405- Air conditioning switch6- Air selection switch


5-08

5

NOTEl There is an interior air temperature sensor

(A) in the illustrated position.Never place anything on top of the sensor,since doing so will prevent it from function-ing properly.

LHD RHD

Blower speed selection dialE00702800273

Select the blower speed by turning the blowerspeed selection dial clockwise or anticlockwise.The blower speed will gradually increase as the di-al is turned to the right.

When the blower speed selection dial is set to the“OFF” position, all fan-driven airflow will stop.

Temperature control dialE00703000575

Turn the temperature control dial clockwise tomake the air warmer. Turn it anticlockwise tomake the air cooler.

Type 1

Type 2


5-09

5

NOTEl While the engine coolant temperature is low,

the temperature of the air from the heaterwill be cool/cold until the engine warms up,even if you have selected warm air with thedial.

Mode selection dialE00703200274

To change the position and amount of air flowingfrom the ventilators, turn the mode selection dial.(Refer to “Changing the mode selection” on page5-02.)

Air selection switchE00703400638

To change the air selection, simply press the air se-lection switch.l Outside air {Indication lamp (A) is OFF}

Outside air is introduced into the passengercompartment.

l Recirculated air {Indication lamp (A) is ON}Air is recirculated inside the passenger com-partment.

CAUTIONl Normally, use the outside position to keep

the windscreen and side windows clearand quickly remove fog or frost from thewindscreen.If high cooling performance is desired, orif the outside air is dusty or otherwise con-taminated use the recirculation position.Switch to the outside position periodicallyto increase ventilation so that the win-dows do not become fogged up.

l Use of the recirculation position for exten-ded time may cause the windows to fog up.

Air conditioning switchE00703501128

Push the switch, and the air conditioning compres-sor will turn on. The air conditioning indicationlamp (A) will come on.

Push the switch again and the air conditioning com-pressor will stop and the indication lamp goes off.

CAUTIONl When using the air conditioning, the

idling speed may slightly increase as theair conditioning compressor is switchedon/off automatically. While the vehiclewith an A/T is stationary, fully depressthe brake pedal to prevent the vehiclefrom creeping.


5-10

5

Operating the system in automaticmode

E00704100919

In normal conditions, use the system in the AUTOmode and follow these procedures:

1. Set the blower speed selection dial to the “AU-TO” position.

2. Select the temperature control dial to the de-sired temperature. The temperature can beset within a range of 17 to 27 (Type 1) or 20to 30 (Type 2). The temperature will gradual-ly increase as the dial is turned to the right.

3. Set the mode selection dial to the “AUTO”position.

4. Push the air conditioning switch to operatethe air conditioning. When the air condition-ing operates, the indication lamp (A) in the di-al will come on.

The outlet port (except “ ”) and blower speed,and ON/OFF of air conditioning will be controlledautomatically.

NOTEl Set the temperature at about 22 (Type 1) or

25 (Type 2) under normal conditions.l When the temperature is set to the highest or

the lowest setting under the AUTO opera-tion, the air selection, mode selection, blowerspeed and the air conditioning will be auto-matically changed as follows.Also, if manually operated after an automaticchangeover, manual operation will be selec-ted.

• Quick Heating (When the temperature isset to the highest setting)Outside air will be introduced, the airflow will select foot position, and the airconditioning will stop.

• Quick Cooling (When the temperature isset to the lowest setting)Inside air will be recirculated, the airflow will select face position, and the airconditioning will operate.

Operating the system in manual modeE00704200040

Blower speed and ventilator mode may be control-led manually by setting the blower speed selectiondial and the mode selection dial to the desired posi-tions. To return to automatic operation, set the dialsto the “AUTO” position.

Demisting of the windscreen and door windowsE00704300689

CAUTIONl For safety, make sure you have a clear

view through all the windows.

To remove frost or mist from the windscreen anddoor windows, use the mode selection dial (“ ”or “ ”).

For ordinary demistingUse this setting to keep the windscreen and doorwindows clear of mist, and to keep the leg area heat-ed (when driving in rain or snow).

1. Set the air selection switch (A) to the outsideposition.


3. Select your desired blower speed by turningthe blower speed selection dial.

4. Select your desired temperature by turningthe temperature control dial.

5. Push the air conditioning switch (B).


5-11

5

For quick demisting


2. Set the blower to the maximum speed.3. Set the temperature to the highest position.

NOTEl While the mode selection dial is set to the

“ ” position, the air conditioning will oper-ate automatically and the outside air positionwill also be selected automatically.

l To demist effectively, direct the air flowfrom the side ventilators towards the door win-dows.

l Do not set the temperature control dial to themax. cool position. Cool air will blowagainst the window glasses and form mist onthem.

Important operation tips for theair conditioning

E00708300951

l Park the vehicle in the shade.Parking in the hot sun will make the vehicleinside extremely hot, and it will require moretime to cool the interior.If it is necessary to park in the sun, open thewindows for the first few minutes of air con-ditioning operation to expel the hot air.

l Close the windows when the air conditioningis in use. The entry of outside air throughopen windows will reduce the cooling effi-ciency.

l Too much cooling is not good for the health.The inside air temperature should only be 5to 6 °C below the outside air temperature.

l When operating the system, make sure theair intake, which is located in front of thewindscreen, is free of obstructions such asleaves and snow. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum may reduce air flow and plugthe plenum water drains.

Air conditioning system refrigerantand lubricant recommendationsIf the air conditioning seems less effective than usu-al, the cause might be a refrigerant leak. We recom-mend you to have the system inspected.The air conditioning system in your vehicle mustbe charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a and thelubricant ZXL-100PG.Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will causesevere damage which will result in the need to re-place your vehicle’s entire air conditioning system.The release of refrigerant into the atmosphereshould be prevented.

It is recommended that the refrigerant be recoveredand recycled for further use.

During a long period of disuseThe air conditioning should be operated for at leastfive minutes each week, even in cold weather. Thisis to prevent poor lubrication of the compressor in-ternal parts and to maintain the air conditioning inthe best operating condition.


5-12

5

Air purifier (with deodorizingfunction)*

E00708400620

An air filter is incorporated into the air condition-ing system to remove pollen, dust, tobacco smellsand exhaust smells.The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and dirt is re-duced as it becomes dirty, so replace it periodical-ly. For the maintenance interval, refer to the “SERV-ICE BOOKLET”.

NOTEl Operation in certain conditions such as driv-

ing on a dusty road and frequent use of theair conditioning can lead to reduction of serv-ice life of the filter. When the air flow ratesuddenly drops or when the windscreen orwindows start to fog up easily, the air filterrequires replacement. We recommend you tohave it checked.


5-13

5

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD player*E00708501745

The audio system can be used when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

A- Display window B- Audio system

NOTEl To listen to the audio system while the engine is stopped, turn the ignition key to the “ACC” position.l If a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, it may create noise from the audio equipment. This does not mean that anything is wrong with your audio

equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far away as possible from the audio equipment.l If foreign objects or water get into the audio equipment, or if smoke or a strange odour comes from it, immediately turn off the audio system. We recom-

mend your to have it checked. Never try to repair it by yourself. Avoid continuous usage without inspection by a qualified person.l The audio system’s control knob can be removed to deter thieves. For details, refer to “Audio system anti-theft feature” on page 5-33.l The audio amplifier (if so equipped) is located under the front right seat.

Do not subject the amplifier to a strong impact.It could damage the amplifier or malfunctioning could result.


5-14

5

Volume and tone control panelE00708601049

1- PWR (On-Off) switch2- VOL (Volume control) knob3- Memory select buttons4- DISP (Display) button

5- AUDIO button6- Audio adjust button7- Display


5-15

5

To adjust the volumeE00708700548

VOL (Volume control)Turn the VOL knob (2) clockwise to increase thevolume; anticlockwise to decrease the volume. Thestatus will be displayed in the display (7).

NOTEl The volume control mode will shut off auto-

matically if either the radio or CD is selec-ted, or if no adjustment is made within about2 seconds.

To adjust the toneE00708801070

Press the AUDIO button (5) to select BASS TRE-BLE FADER BALANCE Audio adjustmode off. The status will be displayed in the dis-play (7).

BASS (Bass tone control)Press the audio adjust button (6) either or to select the desired bass tone quality.

TREBLE (Treble tone control)Press the audio adjust button (6) either or to select the desired treble tone quality.

FADER (Front/Rear balance control)Press the audio adjust button (6) either or to balance the volume of sound from the front andthe rear speakers.

BALANCE (Left/Right balance control)Press the audio adjust button (6) either or to balance the volume of sound from the left andthe right speakers.

NOTEl Audio adjust mode will be cancelled when ra-

dio or CD operation is performed or no ad-justment is performed for more than7 seconds.

To enter audio tone settings into the memoryE00733000040

It is possible to enter the audio adjustment condi-tion (BASS, TREBLE, FADER, BALANCE) intothe memory.

1. Make the desired adjustments in the audio ad-just mode. Refer to “To adjust the tone” onpage 5-16.

2. In the audio adjust mode, press and hold oneof the memory select buttons (3) [1-6]. Thedisplay will show the button number[SOUND1-SOUND6] for which the settingswere memorized.

3. In future, when you gently press the memoryselect button in the audio adjust mode, the au-dio adjustment condition memorized for thatbutton will take effect.

To change the information displayE00735100032

Press the DISP button (4) to change the informa-tion display. The display switches in the followingsequence: Audio information → Average fuel con-sumption → Driving range → Average speed →Outside temperature → Altimeter → Barometer →Calendar → Clock-only → Blank. For details, referto “Changing the information display” on page3-12.

NOTEl Audio information is displayed when the au-

dio system is on.


5-16

5

Radio control panel and displayE00708901084

1- PWR (On-Off) switch2- Memory select buttons3- TUNE/SEEK (Down-step/Down-seek) button4- TUNE/SEEK (Up-step/Up-seek) button5- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button

6- FM/MW/LW indicator7- Preset memory number display8- ST (Stereo) indicator9- Frequency display window


5-17

5

To listen to the radioE00709000463

1. Press the PWR switch (1) to turn the audiosystem ON and OFF. The system turns on inthe last mode used.

2. Press the AM/FM buttons (5) to select the de-sired band.

3. Press the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) totune to a station, or press one of the memoryselect buttons (2) to recall a station memo-rised for that button.

To tune the radioE00709100451

Automatic tuningAfter keeping the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) de-pressed, release the button, and the selected stationreception will start.

Manual tuningThe frequency changes every time the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) is pressed. Press the button toselect the desired station.

To enter frequencies into the memoryE00716101102

Manual settingYou can assign to the memory select buttons (2) amaximum of 18 stations in the FM band (6 FM1, 6FM2 and 6 FM3 stations) and 6 stations each in theMW and LW band. (Stations already assigned tothe memory select buttons are replaced by any new-ly assigned stations.)

Follow the steps described below.1. Press either the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4)

to tune the frequency to be entered in the mem-ory.

2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2)for 2 seconds or longer.The number of the button corresponding tothe entry in the memory and the frequencyare displayed.

3. The preset memory setting is retrieved bypressing the button and then releasing it with-in 2 seconds.

Automatic settingWith the method, all manually set stations in theband currently selected for reception are replacedwith stations in the same band that are automatical-ly selected in order of signal strength. The radio au-tomatically selects 6 stations in the FM band (FM3station only) and 6 stations each in the MW andLW band. Follow the steps described below.

1. With the radio mode selected, hold down theAM/FM button (5) for 2 seconds or longer.The 6 stations with the best signal strengthwill automatically be assigned to the memo-ry select buttons (2), with the lowest-frequen-cy station being assigned to the lowest-num-ber button.

2. When you subsequently press a memory se-lect button to select a channel number, the ra-dio will begin receiving the station assignedto that number.

NOTEl If you press the AM/FM button (5) for 2 sec-

onds or longer while tuning in the FM1 orFM2 band, the radio will automaticallyswitch to the FM3 band, where the automaticseeking/storing will be activated.


5-18

5

Radio data system (RDS)E00709200393

1- PWR (On-Off) switch2- Memory select buttons3- TUNE/SEEK (Down-step/Down-seek) button4- TUNE/SEEK (Up-step/Up-seek) button5- AM/FM (FM/MW/LW selection) button6- TP (Traffic program) button7- PTY (Program type) button8- Menu button

9- RDS (Radio data system) indicator10- PTY (Program type) indicator11- REG (Regional program) indicator12- AF (Alternative frequencies) indicator13- TP (Traffic program identification) indicator14- CT (Clock time) indicator15- Display

RDS uses PI (program identification) signal and AF (alternative frequency) list transmitted in addition to the normal FM broadcasting programs, and picks up theFM stations that are transmitting the same program from the AF list and automatically tunes to the station with the strongest signal intensity.Therefore, you can continue listening to one program in, for example, a long distance driving without retuning to the other station transmitting the same programwhen you are leaving the service area of the currently receiving station.The RDS radio also features the limited reception of the program types, the break-in reception of the traffic announcement to the EON (enhanced other network)and emergency broadcast, and the limited/unlimited reception of the regional programs.


5-19

5

AF (Alternative Frequencies) functionE00720900061

The AF function finds a station broadcasting thesame program and selects the station with the stron-gest signal of AF lists.The AF function is turned on (with the AF indica-tor (12) shown on the display) at all times unlessyou manually switch it off. The AF function can be turned ON and OFF.Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-22.

CT (Clock Time) functionE00721000131

The clock can be set automatically by using the sig-nal from the local RDS stations. Refer to “Adjust-ing the time” on page 3-12.

REG (Regional) functionE00721100057

REG function limits to receive the stations broad-casting regional programs.Regional programming and regional networks areorganized differently depending on the country orarea (they may be changed according to the hour,state, or broadcast area), so if you don’t want to re-ceive the regional programs automatically, you canset up REG ON not to receive regional programs. The REG function can be turned ON and OFF.Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-22.

PI (Program Identification) search functionE00721200188

When travelling long distance and the recalled pre-set station is weak, the radio searches another fre-quency broadcasting the same programming withthe same PI code in AF list.

If there are no frequencies broadcasting the sameprogramming, the radio searches a frequency broad-casting the regional programming. The radio suc-ceeds in searching the regional programming, thenthe display shows the REG indicator (11).If the radio does not succeed in searching the re-gional programming, the radio returns to the recal-led preset station.

PTY (Program Type)E00721300293

RDS broadcasts are classified according to pro-gram type (PTY) as follows. Use the TUNE/SEEKbutton (3 or 4) to select your desired PTY.

1. NEWS2. AFFAIRS (Current affairs)3. INFO (Information)4. SPORT5. EDUCATE (Education)6. DRAMA7. CULTURE8. SCIENCE9. VARIED

10. POP M (Pop music)11. ROCK M (Rock music)12. EASY M (Easy music)13. LIGHT M (Light classics)14. CLASSICS15. OTHER M (Other music)16. WEATHER (Weather information)17. FINANCE18. CHILDREN19. SOCIAL20. RELIGION21. PHONE IN22. TRAVEL23. LEISURE24. JAZZ25. COUNTRY

26. NATION M (National music)27. OLDIES28. FOLK M (Folk music)29. DOCUMENT

To search for a broadcast of desired program type:1. Press the PTY button (7).2. Press the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) for

less than 1 second repeatedly to select yourdesired PTY.

3. Two seconds after a desired PTY has been se-lected, the radio will begin to search for abroadcast of your selected PTY. Duringsearch, the selected PTY on the display blinks.

4. When the radio picks up a station with yourdesired PTY, the display will show the nameof the station.

NOTEl If the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4) is pressed

for more than 1 second, the radio will try tofind out another broadcast of the same pro-gram type as currently selected.


5-20

5

l If no station is found with your desired PTY,the display will show “EMPTY” for about5 seconds and the radio will return to the pre-vious station.

How to enter PTYs in the memoryE00721400135

As many as 6 PTYs can be entered in the memory.Follow the steps described below.

1. Press either the TUNE/SEEK button (3 or 4)to tune the PTY to be entered in the memory.

2. Press one of the memory select buttons (2)for 2 seconds or longer. The number of thebutton corresponding to the entry into thememory and the PTY are displayed.

3. The preset memory setting is retrieved bypressing the button and then releasing it with-in about 2 seconds.

Traffic informationE00721600238

The radio will automatically tune in to traffic infor-mation broadcasts while receiving FM broadcastsor playing compact discs.To select this function, follow the instructions below.

1. Press the TP button (6). The display willshow “TP” (13). If the RDS data can be read,the display will show “RDS” (9). If not, thedisplay will show “NO RDS” for about 5 sec-onds.

2. If the radio detects traffic information on ei-ther the station currently selected or anotherstation, the display will show “TRAF INF”for 5 seconds followed by a 2-second indica-tion of the frequency. Then, it will show thename of the station broadcasting the traffic in-formation to which you will listen. The vol-ume level is set separately for listening to nor-mal audio programs and for listening to traf-fic information. The volume level will there-fore change automatically to that set whentraffic information was last received. Whenthe traffic information broadcast is over, theradio will return to the previously receivedprogram and to the corresponding volume lev-el.

3. Press the TP button (6) to return to the previ-ous condition.

NOTEl While “TP” is illuminated, the radio stops on-

ly at TP stations even if the TUNE/SEEK but-ton (3 or 4) is pressed.

TP (Traffic information Program) search functionE00721800168

The traffic information program standby functionis turned on (with the TP indicator (13) shown onthe display) and after about 45 seconds since theRDS indicator (9) turns off due to weak signal orthe tuning station is changed over from a TP sta-tion to a station which does not broadcast traffic in-formation, and seeks out a TP station in all frequen-cies automatically. The TP search function can be turned ON and OFF.Refer to “Function setup mode” on page 5-22.


5-21

5

Emergency broadcastsE00721700213

If an emergency broadcast is caught while receiv-ing a FM broadcast or playing back a compact discwith the ignition switch in “ACC” or “ON” posi-tion, the display will show “ALARM” and the emer-gency broadcast will interrupt the current program.The volume level is set separately for listening tonormal audio programs and for listening to emer-gency broadcasts. The volume level will thereforechange automatically to that set when an emergen-cy broadcast or traffic information broadcast waslast received. When the emergency broadcast isover, the radio will return to the previously re-ceived program and to the corresponding volumelevel.

Function setup modeE00722500364

It is possible to change the following functions:l AF

l CTl REGl TP-S

1. Press the “MENU” button to select the func-tion setup mode.

2. Press the “MENU” button repeatedly to se-lect the mode you wish to change.


5-22

5

The order is: AF CT REG TP-S PH MUTE Function setup mode

OFF.

NOTEl Although “PH” and “MUTE” appear on the

display, the PH and MUTE functions are in-operative.

3. Select the desired setting for each mode to beturned ON and OFF as shown below.

The setting will be shown on the display. NOTEl After selecting a mode, you can leave the func-

tion setup mode by taking either of the fol-lowing steps:

• Press the “MENU” button for at least 2seconds.

• Make no entry for 7 seconds.


5-23

5

CD control panel and displayE00709501117

1- CD eject button2- Disc-loading slot3- FOLDER (Folder down) button4- FOLDER (Folder up) button5- TEXT (Title display) button6- PAGE (Title scroll) button7- TRACK (Track down/up) button8- PWR (On-Off) switch

9- CD (CD mode changeover) button10- SCAN button11- RPT/RDM (Repeat/Random) button12- SCAN/RPT/RDM indicator13- TRACK indicator14- Track play time indicator15- CD indicator


5-24

5

To listen to a CDE00709601903

1. Insert a disc with the label facing up, and theCD player will begin playing even if the ra-dio is being used. The CD indicator (15), thetrack number, the playing time will appearon the display. The CD player will also startplayback when the CD button (9) is pressedwith a disc in the player.

2. To adjust the volume and tone, refer to “Toadjust the volume” on page 5-16 and “To ad-just the tone” on page 5-16.

3. To stop the CD, turn off the power by press-ing the PWR switch (8) or change over to ra-dio mode by pressing the AM/FM buttons, oreject the disc by pressing the eject button (1).

NOTEl When an 8 cm compact disc is used, the adapt-

er is not needed for playback. Insert the discin the centre of the disc-loading slot.

l For information concerning the handling ofcompact discs, refer to “Handling of compactdiscs” on page 5-33.

To fast-forward/fast-reverse the discTo fast-forward or fast-reverse the disc, press theTRACK button (7).

Fast-forwardYou can fast-forward the disc by pressing the side of the TRACK button (7). While the button iskept pressed, the disc will be fast-forwarded.

Fast-reverseYou can fast-reverse the disc by pressing the side of the TRACK button (7). While the button iskept pressed, the disc will be fast-reversed.

NOTEl When you have fast-forwarded/fast-reversed

the disc, the playing-time may be shownwith deviation.

To listen to an MP3 CDThis CD player allows you to play MP3 (MPEG Au-dio Layer-3) files recorded on CD-ROMs, CD-Rs(recordable CDs), and CD-RWs (rewritable CDs)in ISO9660 Level 1/Level 2, Joliet, and Romeo for-mats. Each disc may have a maximum of 16 trees,100 folders, and 255 files per disc. During MP3playback, the unit can display ID3 tag information.For information concerning ID3 tag, refer to “CDtext and MP3 title display” on page 5-27.

1. Insert a disc containing MP3 files into the slot.2. The display shows the folder number and the

file number, then playback will begin.

NOTEl While listening to a disc on which CD-DA

(CD-Digital Audio) and MP3 files have bothbeen recorded, you can switch between read-ing of the CD-DA, reading of the MP3 files,and the external audio input mode (AUX) bypressing the CD button for 2 seconds or longer.

l With a disc that contains both CD-DA andMP3 files, the CD-DA files are automatical-ly played first.

l The playback sound quality differs depend-ing on the encoding software and the bit rate.For details, refer to the user manual of yourencoding software.

l Depending on file/folder configurations on adisc, it may take some time before playbackstarts.

l MP3 encoding software and writing softwareare not supplied with this unit.

l You may encounter trouble in playing anMP3 or displaying the information of MP3files recorded with certain writing softwareor CD recorders (CD-R/RW drivers).

l If you record too many folders or files otherthan MP3 onto a disc, it may take some timebefore playback starts.

l This unit does not record MP3 files.l For information concerning CD-Rs/RWs, re-

fer to “Notes on CD-Rs/RWs” on page 5-34.

CAUTIONl Attempting to play a file not in the MP3

format which has a “.mp3” file name mayproduce noise from the speakers andspeaker damage, and can damage yourhearing.


5-25

5

Folder selection order/MP3 file playback order(Example)

Root folder (root directory)

Tree 4Tree 3Tree 2Tree 1

Folder selectionIn the order

File selectionIn the order

To select a desired folder (MP3 CDs only)You can select your desired folder by pressing theFOLDER buttons (3 or 4).

Folder upPress the FOLDER button (4) until the desired fold-er number appears on the display.

Folder downPress the FOLDER button (3) until the desired fold-er number appears on the display.

To select a desired trackYou can select your desired track by using theTRACK button (7).

Track upPress the side of the TRACK button (7) repeat-edly until the desired track number appears on thedisplay.

Track downPress the side of the TRACK button (7) repeat-edly until the desired track number appears on thedisplay.

NOTEl Pressing the side of the TRACK button

(7) once during the song will cause the CDplayer to restart playback from the beginningof the song.

To repeat the same track or change the order oftracks for playbackPress the RPT/RDM button (11) to select RPT RDM RPT/RDM mode off.

To repeat the same trackSelect the RPT mode, and the RPT indicator (12)will come on. You can listen to the same track re-peatedly.To exit the repeat mode, press the RPT button twotimes.

Repeat mode

CD-DA

MP3

NOTEl The repeat mode will be cancelled by press-

ing the track button (7), the SCAN button(10) or eject button (1).


5-26

5

To change the order of tracks for playbackSelect the RDM mode, and the RDM indicator (18)will come on. Tracks on the currently selected discwill be played in a random sequence.To exit the random mode, press the RPT/RDM but-ton (11) again.

Random mode

MP3

CD-DA

NOTEl With a disc that contains both CD-DA and

MP3 files, the random mode causes onlyfiles of the same format (CDDA only orMP3 files only) to be played in a random se-quence.

To find the start of each track on a disc for playbackPress the SCAN button (10). “SCAN” will appearon the display and the CD player will play back thefirst 10 seconds of each track on the selected disc.The track number will blink while the scan mode isselected. To exit the scan mode, press the SCANbutton again.

NOTEl Once all tracks on the disc have been scan-

ned, playback of the disc will restart from thebeginning of the track that was playing whenscanning started.

l The scan mode will be cancelled when radioor CD operation is selected.

l With a disc that contains both CD-DA andMP3 files, the scan mode causes only files ofthe same format (CD-DA only or MP3 filesonly) to be played.

To eject a discWhen the CD eject button (1) is pressed, the discautomatically stops and is ejected. The system auto-matically switches to radio mode.

CD text and MP3 title displayE00725000546

This CD player can display CD text and MP3 titlesincluding ID3 tag information.

CD textThe CD player can display disc and track titles fordiscs encoded with disc and track title information.Press the TEXT button (5) repeatedly to make se-lections in the following sequence: disc name track name normal display mode.

Example

Discname

Trackname

NOTEl The display can show up to 16 characters. If

a disc name or track name has more than 16characters, press the PAGE button (6) toview the next 16 characters.

l When there is no title information to be dis-played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.

l Characters that the CD player cannot displayare shown as “ ”.


5-27

5

MP3 titleThe CD player can display folder and file titles fordiscs encoded with folder and file information.Press the TEXT button (5) for less than 1 second re-peatedly to make selections in the following se-quence: folder name file name normal dis-play mode.

Example

Foldername

Filename

ID3 tag informationThe CD player can display ID3 tag information forfiles that have been recorded with ID3 tag informa-tion.

1. Press the TEXT button (5) for 2 seconds orlonger to switch to the ID3 tag information.

2. Then press the TEXT button for less than1 second repeatedly to make selections in thefollowing sequence: album name titlename artist name normal display mode.

NOTEl To return from ID3 tag information to the

folder name, press the TEXT button (5)again for 2 seconds or longer.

l When there is no title information to be dis-played, the display shows “NO TITLE”.

l The display can show up to 16 characters. Ifa folder name, track name, or item of ID3 taginformation has more than 16 characters,press the PAGE button (6) to view the next16 characters.

l Folder names and track names can each bedisplayed up to a length of 16 characters.Items of ID3 tag information can each be dis-played up to a length of 16 characters.

l Characters that the CD player cannot displayare shown as “ ”.

To use the external audio inputfunction*

E00732200566

Auxiliary Audio connector(RCA)

Auxiliary Video connector(RCA)

Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA)A- Left audio input connector (white)B- Right audio input connector (red) Auxiliary Video connector (RCA)A- Left audio input connector (white)B- Right audio input connector (red)C- Video input connector (yellow)

You can listen to commercially available audioequipment, such as a portable audio system, fromyour vehicle’s speakers, by connecting the audioequipment to the audio input connectors, which areexternal input connectors (pin jacks).


5-28

5

NOTEl On vehicles equipped with MITSUBISHI

Multi-Communication system (MMCS), re-fer to the separate owner’s manual for aMITSUBISHI Multi-Communication Sys-tem.

To activate the external audio inputmode

1. Use a commercially available audio cable toconnect the audio equipment to the externalaudio input connector.

2. Press the CD button (D) for more than 2 sec-onds. The display (E) will show “AUX” andthen the external audio input mode will be ac-tivated.

3. To deactivate the external audio input mode,press the AM/FM button (F) or the CD but-ton (D) to switch to another mode.

CAUTIONl Do not operate the connected audio equip-

ment while driving.This could distract you and an accidentmight occur.

NOTEl The connected audio equipment cannot be op-

erated with the vehicle’s audio system.l Depending on the connected audio equip-

ment, it may produce noise from the speakers.l Use the connected audio equipment’s own

power source, such as its battery.Noise may be produced from the speakers ifthe connected audio equipment is used whilecharging it using the accessory socket of thevehicle.

l Do not activate the external audio inputmode when no audio equipment is connected.Otherwise, noise may be produced from thespeakers.

l Connect audio equipment when the externalaudio input mode is deactivated or lower thevehicle’s speaker volume before connecting it.Noise may be produced from the speakers ifaudio equipment is connected after the exter-nal audio input mode is activated.

l For information on how to connect and oper-ate the audio equipment, refer to the owner’smanual for the equipment.

Steering wheel remote controlswitch*

E00710000694

The remote control switches are located on the leftside of the steering wheel.These switches can be used when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

1- Volume up button2- Volume down button3- PWR (ON-OFF)/Mode change button4- Seek up/Track up/Fast-forward button5- Seek down/Track down/Fast-reverse button

NOTEl Do not push two or more of the steering

wheel remote control switches at the sametime.

To turn on the power

PWR (ON-OFF) button - 3When the power is off, press this button to turn thepower on. To turn the power off, press this buttonfor 2 seconds or longer.


5-29

5

To adjust the volume

Volume up button - 1The volume will increase when this button is pressed.

Volume down button - 2The volume will decrease when this button is press-ed.

To listen to the audio systemSelect the desired mode by lightly pressing themode change button (3).The mode switches between the radio and CD witheach push of the button.

To listen to the radio

To select FM/MW/LW modeMode change button — 3Select the desired band by pressing this button.The order is: FM1 → FM2 → FM3 → MW → LW→ CD → FM1.

Automatic radio tuningSeek up button - 4/Seek down button - 5After pressing these buttons, the reception of the se-lected station will begin.

To listen to a CD

To fast-forward/fast-reverse the discTo fast-forward or fast-reverse the disc, press thefast-forward button (4) or the fast-reverse button (5). Fast-forward button - 4You can fast-forward the disc by pressing the fast-forward button. While the button is kept pressed,the disc will be fast-forwarded.

Fast-reverse button - 5You can fast-reverse the disc by pressing the fast-reverse button. While the button is kept pressed,the disc will be fastreversed.

NOTEl In the case of an MP3 CD, you can fast-for-

ward and fastreverse tracks in the same folder.

To select a desired trackTrack up button - 4Press the button repeatedly until the desired tracknumber appears on the display. Track down button - 5Press the button repeatedly until the desired tracknumber appears on the display.


5-30

5

Error codesE00710101142

If an error code (1) appears in the display, take action in accordance with the table below.


5-31

5

Error display Problem Description Repair

NO DISC No disc inserted Disc is not in CD player. Insert disc.

ERROR 01 Focus error Disc is not loaded correctly, or condensation ondisc.

Insert disc with label facing up. Removemoisture from disc.

ERROR 02 Disc error Disc is dirty, scratched, or deformed; or exces-sive vehicle vibration.

Clean or replace disc. Retry when vibra-tions stop.

ERROR 03 Mechanism error Loading or eject error. Pick-up is out of position. Eject disc and reload. If disc will not eject,have the equipment inspected.

ERROR HOT High temperature Internal protection against high temperatures. Allow CD player to cool by waiting about30 minutes.

ERROR Communication or power supplyerror

Communication error between external deviceand audio equipment.Power supply error of external device.

Consult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point.


5-32

5

Audio system anti-theft featureE00710200306

To prevent theft of the audio system, the controlknob can be removed. Always remove the controlknob when you leave the vehicle.

Removing the control knobSlide the release button (A) to the right and removethe control knob from the audio system.Anti-theft function operates in two ways dependingon the position of the ignition key.

1. With the key in the “ON” or “ACC” posi-tion“Please refit the control panel.” indicator willappear on the display. Any audio system op-eration will be disabled while the “Please re-fit the control panel.” indicator is displayed.

2. With the key in the “LOCK” positionThe lamp (B) will start flashing to deterthieves.

NOTEl When sliding the release button, place one

hand on the control knob to prevent it fromfalling out.

Refitting the control knobPut the control knob back into the original positionand then push it until it clicks. The “Please refit thecontrol panel.” indicator will disappear or the lamp(B) will stop flashing.

NOTEl Do not leave the control knob in any place

where it may become hot (for example, thedashboard) or in any place where it may be-come wet.

l If you lose the control knob, contact aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized ServicePoint.

Handling of compact discsE00723000034

l Use only the type of compact discs that havethe mark shown in the illustration below.(Playback of CD-R or CD-RW discs maycause problems.)


5-33

5

l The use of special shaped, damaged compactdiscs (like cracked discs) or low-quality com-pact discs (like warped discs or burrs on thediscs) such as those shown will damage theCD player.

l In the following circumstances, moisture canform on discs and inside the audio system,preventing normal operation.

• When there is high humidity (for exam-ple, when it is raining).

• When the temperature suddenly rises,such as right after the heater is turned onin cold weather. In this case, wait until the moisture hashad time to dry out.

l When the CD player is subjected to violent vi-brations, such as during off-road driving, thetracking may not work.

l When storing compact discs, always storethem in their separate cases. Never place com-pact discs in direct sunlight, or in any placewhere the temperature or humidity is high.

l Never touch the flat surface of the disc with-out a label. This will damage the disc surfaceand could affect the sound quality. When han-dling a compact disc, always hold it by theouter edge and the centre hole.

l To clean a disc, use a soft, clean, dry cloth.Wipe directly from the centre hole towardsthe outer edge. Do not wipe in a circle. Nev-er use any chemicals such as benzine, paintthinner, a disc spray cleaner, or an anti-staticagent on the disc.

l Do not use a ball point pen, felt pen, pencil,etc. to write on the label surface of the disc.

l Do not put additional labels (A) or stickers(B) on compact discs. Also, do not use anycompact disc on which a label or sticker hasstarted to peel off or any compact disc thathas stickiness or other contamination left bya peeled-off label or sticker. If you use sucha compact disc, the CD player may stop work-ing properly and you may not be able to ejectthe compact disc.

Notes on CD-Rs/RWsE00725100039

l You may have trouble playing back someCD-R/RW discs recorded on CD recorders(CD-R/RW drives), either due to their record-ing characteristics or dirt, fingerprints,scratches, etc. on the disc surface.

l CD-R/RW discs are less resistant to high tem-peratures and high humidity than ordinary mu-sic CDs. Leaving them inside a vehicle for ex-tended periods may damage them and makeplayback impossible.


5-34

5

l The unit may not successfully play back aCD-R/RW that was made by the combina-tion of writing software, a CD recorder(CD-R/RW drive) and a disc if they are in-compatible with one another.

l This player cannot play the CD-R/RW discsif the session is not closed.

l This player cannot play CD-R/RW discswhich contain other than CD-DA or MP3 da-ta (Video CD, etc.).

l Be sure to observe the handling instructionsfor the CD-R/RW disc.

WARNINGl Operating the CD player in a manner oth-

er than specifically instructed herein mayresult in hazardous radiation exposure.Do not remove the cover and attempt torepair the CD player by yourself. Thereare no user serviceable parts inside. Incase of malfunction, we recommend youto have it checked.

AntennaE00710500022

Pillar antenna*E00710700109

When listening to the radio, fully extend the antenna.

NOTEl Be sure to retract the pillar antenna in the fol-

lowing cases:• When entering a place with low clearance.• When using an automatic car wash.• When placing a car cover over the vehicle.

Roof antenna*E00710900071

When listening to the radio, raise the antenna up un-til you hear it click.

To removeTurn the pole (A) anticlockwise.

To installScrew the pole (A) clockwise into the base (B) un-til it is securely retained.


5-35

5

NOTEl Be sure to remove the roof antenna in the fol-

lowing cases:• When using an automatic car wash.• When placing a car cover over the vehicle.

l Before driving into a structure that has a lowceiling, fold down the antenna to prevent itfrom hitting the ceiling.

Sun visorsE00711200693

1- To eliminate front glare2- To eliminate side glare

Ticket holder*The driver’s sun visor is provided with a ticket hold-er (A) on the backside.

Card holder*Cards can be slipped into the front (A) of the lid ofthe passenger side vanity mirror.


5-36

5

Vanity mirror*E00711300489

A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun visoron the passenger side.

AshtrayE00711400826

CAUTIONl Put out matches and cigarettes before

they are placed in the ashtray.l Don’t put papers and other things that

burn into your ashtrays. If you do, ciga-rettes or other smoking materials couldset them on fire, causing damage.

l Always close the ashtray. If left open, oth-er cigarette butts in the ashtray may be re-kindled.

Type 1 (fixed position)To use the ashtray, pull it out.

To remove the ashtray, pull it out while pressingthe stop (A).

Type 2 (moveable)To use the moveable ashtray, open the lid.

Mounting position for moveable ashtrayThe moveable ashtray can be fitted at the indicatedposition.


5-37

5

Refer to “Cup holder” on page 5-45.

For the front seat

For the rear seat

Cigarette lighterE00711501257

The cigarette lighter can be used while the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.

Type 1

Type 2

1- Push all the way in.

The lighter will automatically return to its originalposition with a “click” when ready. Pull it out foruse.After use, insert the lighter to its original positionin the socket.

NOTEl Do not leave the cigarette lighter removed

from its socket, because the socket might be-come clogged by foreign material and beshort-circuited.

CAUTIONl Do not touch heating element or lighter

housing. Hold only the knob to preventburns.

l Do not allow children to operate or playwith the cigarette lighter as burns may oc-cur.

l Something is wrong with the cigarettelighter if it does not pop back out withinapproximately 30 seconds of being push-ed in.Leaving the cigarette lighter pushed infor an extended period could cause fire. Ifit does not pop out by itself, we recom-mend you to have it checked.

l Do not leave the cigarette lighter pushedin or insert the cigarette lighter from an-other vehicle. Otherwise, the lighter mayoverheat and cause fire.

l It is recommended that only the lighterbe inserted in its socket.Use of “plug-in” type accessories maydamage the socket and result in poor re-tention of the lighter.


5-38

5

CAUTIONl When the cigarette lighter socket is used

as a power source for an electric appli-ance, be sure that the electric applianceoperates at 12 V and has an electric ca-pacity of 120 W or less. In addition, longuse of the electric appliance without run-ning the engine may run down the battery.

Accessory socket*E00711601160

The accessory socket can be used while the igni-tion switch is in the “ON” or “ACC” position.Open the cap (A) to uncover the socket. Use it toplug in an electrical device.

Type 1

Type 2

CAUTIONl When you connect an electrical device,

make sure it is rated at 12 V and its elec-trical capacity does not exceed 120 W. Re-member that prolonged use of an electri-cal device with the engine off could rundown the battery.

l When the accessory socket is not in use,be sure to close the cap, because the sock-et might become clogged by foreign mate-rial and be short-circuited.

NOTEl Long use of the electric appliance without run-

ning the engine may run down the battery.Especially avoid using it with the cigarettelighter.


5-39

5

Digital clock*E00711700193

The digital clock indicates the time with the igni-tion switch in either “ON” or “ACC” position.

To set the timeSet the time by pressing the various buttons as de-scribed below.

1- To adjust the hour2- To adjust the minutes3- To reset the minutes to zero

10:30 - 11:29 …… Changes to 11:0011:30 - 12:29 …… Changes to 12:00

NOTEl If the battery cables are disconnected during

repairs or for any other reason, reset theclock to the correct time after they are recon-nected.

Interior lampsE00712000917

1- Room lamp (Front)*Personal lamps*

2- Room lamp (Rear)*3- Door courtesy lamps*4- Centre console downlight

NOTEl If you leave the lamps on without running

the engine, you will run down the battery. Be-fore you leave the vehicle, make sure that allthe lamps are off.

Room lampsE00712101016

Front*

Rear (Type 1)*


5-40

5

Rear (Type 2)*

1 (ON) - The lamp illuminates.

2 ( ) - [Vehicles without central door lockssystem]The room lamp goes on when a dooris opened. When all doors areclosed, the room lamp is illuminatedand dimmed gradually for 7 secondsthen goes out.However, the lamp goes out immedi-ately without being dimmed whenthe ignition switch is turned to the“ON” position.[Vehicles with central door locks sys-tem]The room lamp goes on when a dooris opened. When all doors areclosed, the room lamp is illuminatedand dimmed gradually for 15 sec-onds then goes out.However, the lamp goes out immedi-ately without being dimmed in caseof the followings:l All doors are closed and the ig-

nition switch is turned to the“ON” position.

l All doors are locked using thekey mechanism of the driver’sdoor, the lock knob of the driv-er’s door, or the remote con-trol switch of the keyless entrysystem (if so equipped).

NOTEl On vehicles with keyless entry

system, when the ignition keyis removed with the doorsclosed, the lamp is illuminatedand after about 15 seconds itgoes off.The dimming period is also ad-justable.For further information, werecommend you to consult aMITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point.

3 (OFF) - The lamp goes off.

Personal lamps*E00712500156

Push the switch (A) to turn on the lamp. Push itagain to turn it off.


5-41

5

Door courtesy lamps*E00717500034

Each door courtesy lamp comes on when the rele-vant door is opened and goes off when the door isclosed.

Centre console downlightE00733300043

The centre console downlight go on when the lampswitch is in the “ ” or the “ ” position.Refer to “Combination headlamps and dipperswitch” on page 3-30.

Type 1

Type 2 Storage spacesE00713101404

CAUTIONl Never leave lighters, cans of carbonated

drink, and spectacles in the cabin whenparking the vehicle in hot sunshine. Thecabin will become extremely hot, so light-ers and other flammable items may catchfire and unopened drink cans (includingbeer cans) may rupture. The heat may al-so deform or crack plastic spectacle len-ses and other spectacle parts that aremade of plastic.

l Keep the lids of storage spaces closedwhile driving the vehicle. A lid or the con-tents of a storage space could otherwisecause injuries.

NOTEl Do not leave valuables in any storage space

when leaving the vehicle.


5-42

5

1- Utility box*2- Glove box3- Sunglasses holder*4- Seat under tray*5- Front console box*6- Floor console box*7- Secret box (Club cab)

Glove boxE00717601090

NOTEl When the lamp switch is in the “ ” or

“ ” position, the glove box lamp illumi-nates.

Type 1To open, pull the lever (A).

Type 2The glove box can be locked and unlocked usingthe key.

1- To lock2- To unlock3- To open, pull the lever

Front console box*E00733400161

To open, pull up the knob (A).

Floor console box*E00723300633

Type 1To open, raise the lid.

Type 2Upper and lower boxes are located inside the floorconsole box.


5-43

5

The floor console box can also be used as an armrest.

1- Upper box2- Lower box

NOTEl The Auxiliary Audio connector (RCA) or the

Auxiliary Video connector (RCA) is locatedin the lower box (if so equipped). For details,refer to “To use the external audio input func-tion” on page 5-28.

Upper boxTo open the upper box, lift the right release lever(A) and raise the lid.

Lower boxTo open the lower box, lift the left release lever (B)and raise the lid.

Utility box*E00717900100

To open, pull up the knob (A).

Sunglasses holder*E00718600250

Push the lid to open.

Close the lid by pushing it till it clicks.

CAUTIONl The holder should not be used to store any-

thing heavier than sunglasses. These ob-jects could drop out.

NOTEl The holder may not be able to accomodate ev-

ery possible size and shape of sunglasses; itis advisable to check compatibility before use.

Secret box (Club cab)E00724900043

The secret box is in the floor behind the seat.


5-44

5

To use the box, open the lid.

Seat under tray (under front passen-ger’s seat)*

E00725700035

A tray is provided underneath passenger’s seat.

To useDraw out the tray.

To storePush in the tray positively until it is fully locked.

To removePull off the tray while lifting upward.

Cup holder*E00714500802

CAUTIONl Do not drink beverages while driving the

vehicle; doing so could distract you andresult in an accident.

For the front seatThe cup holder is located between the front seats.

Type 1

Type 2


5-45

5

NOTEl The cup holder adapter (A) can be removed

to enable the cup holder to hold relativelylarge cup. Remove the cup holder adapterwhen necessary.

Type 3

For the rear seat (Double cab)E00716900389

In order to use the cup holder, allow the armrest todrop down.

Bottle holderE00718200171

CAUTIONl Do not drink beverages while driving the

vehicle; doing so could distract you andresult in an accident.

l Beverages can spill due to vibration or oth-er movement during vehicle operation.Be careful not to get scalded by a hot bev-erage if spilled

NOTEl Make sure the cap of any plastic bottle

placed in a bottle holder is tightly closed.l The bottle holders may not accommodate bot-

tles of certain shapes and sizes.

For the front seatThe bottle holders are provided at both sides.

For the rear seat (Double cab)The bottle holders are provided at both sides.


5-46

5

Convenient hookE00732900071

Light items of luggage can be hung from the hook.

NOTEl Do not hang heavy luggage (more than about

4 kg) on the hook.Doing so could cause damage to the hook.

Coat hook*E00725600438

There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist grip.

Type 1 Type 2

WARNINGl Do not put a hanger or any heavy or poin-

ted object on the coat hook. If the curtainairbag was activated, any such item couldbe propelled away with great force andcould prevent the curtain airbag from in-flating correctly. Hang clothes directly onthe coat hook (without using a hanger).Make sure there are no heavy or sharp ob-jects in the pockets of clothes that youhang on the coat hook.

First-aid kit and warningtriangle securing bands*

E00717200028

A first-aid kit and a warning triangle can be se-cured with the band(s) installed in the illustrated po-sition.

Single cab, Double cabThe wall behind the seat is provided with a bandfor securing a first-aid kit and a warning triangle.

Single cab, Double cab* Double cab*


5-47

5

Club cabA band for securing a first-aid kit is installed in thesecret box.

A band for securing a warning triangle is installedleft under the rear seat.


5-48

5

If the vehicle breaks down............................................................6-02Emergency starting.......................................................................6-02Engine overheating.......................................................................6-04Bleeding the fuel system...............................................................6-05Removal of water from the fuel filter...........................................6-06Tools, jack and jack handle..........................................................6-07Jacking up the vehicle...................................................................6-13Spare wheel...................................................................................6-16How to change a tyre....................................................................6-17Towing..........................................................................................6-20Operation under adverse driving conditions.................................6-24

For emergencies

6

If the vehicle breaks downE00800100794

If the vehicle breaks down on the road, move it tothe shoulder and use the hazard warning flashers and/or the warning triangle etc.Refer to “Hazard warning flasher switch” on page3-34.

If the engine stops/failsVehicle operation and control are affected if the en-gine stops.Before moving the vehicle to a safe area, be awareof the following:l The brake booster becomes inoperative and

the pedal effort will increase. Press down thebrake pedal harder than usual.

l Since the power steering pump is no longeroperative, the steering wheel feels heavywhen turning it. Turn the wheel with more ef-fort than usual.

Emergency startingE00800502112

If the engine cannot be started because the batteryis weak or dead, the battery from another vehiclecan be used with jumper cables to start the engine.

WARNINGl To start the engine using jumper cables

connected from another vehicle, performthe correct procedures according to the in-struction manual. Incorrect procedurescould result in a fire or explosion or dam-age to the vehicles.

1. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehiclesaren’t touching each other. If they are, itcould cause a ground connection you don’twant. The vehicle will not start, and the badgrounding could damage the electrical sys-tems.

CAUTIONl Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-

volt battery.If the other system isn’t 12-volt, shortingcan damage both vehicles.

2. You could be injured if the vehicles move.Set the parking brake firmly on each vehicle.Put an automatic transmission in “P”(PARK) or a manual transmission in “N”(Neutral). Turn off the ignition switch.

WARNINGl Turn off the ignition on both vehicles be-

forehand. Take care to make sure thatthe cables or your clothes are nevercaught by the fan or drive belt. Personalinjury could result.

NOTEl Turn off all lamps, heater and other electrical

loads. This will avoid sparks and help saveboth batteries.

3. Make sure battery electrolyte is at the properlevel.Refer to “Battery” on page 8-09.

WARNINGl If electrolyte fluid is not visible, or ap-

pears to be frozen, Do Not Attempt JumpStarting!A battery might rupture or explode if thetemperature is below the freezing pointor if it is not filled to the proper level.

4. Connect one end of one jumper cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the discharged bat-tery (A), and the other end to the positive (+)terminal of the booster battery (B).

For emergencies

6-02

6

Vehicles with 1 battery

Vehicles with 2 batteries

5. Connect one end of the other jumper cable tothe negative (-) terminal of the booster bat-tery (B), and the other end to the engineblock of the vehicle with the discharged bat-tery at the point farthest from the battery.

NOTEl Open the cover before connecting the jumper

cable to the positive (+) terminal of the battery.(Refer to “Battery” on page 8-09.)

WARNINGl Be sure to observe the connecting se-

quence of .l Make sure that the connection is made

to the appointed position (shown in the il-lustration). If the connection is made di-rectly to the negative side of the battery,the inflammable gasses generated fromthe battery might catch fire and explode.

l When connecting the jumper cable, donot connect the positive (+) cable to thenegative (-) terminal. Otherwise sparksmight cause explosion of the battery.

CAUTIONl Take care not to get the jumper cable

caught in the cooling fan or other rotat-ing part in the engine compartment.

l Use the proper cables suitable for the bat-tery size. Otherwise heat damage to the ca-bles could result.

l Check the jumper cables for damage andcorrosion before use.

6. Start the engine in the vehicle which has thebooster battery, let the engine idle a few mi-nutes, then start the engine in the vehiclewith the discharged battery.

CAUTIONl Keep the engine of the vehicle giving assis-

tance running.

7. After the engine is started, disconnect the ca-bles in the reverse order.

WARNINGl Charging the battery while it is installed

in the vehicle might cause the battery tocatch fire and explode. Or damage to thevehicle could result. If it has to be charg-ed in that condition for unavoidable rea-sons, disconnect the vehicle side negative(-) terminal connected to the battery.

l Keep sparks, cigarettes and flames awayfrom the battery because the battery mayproduce an explosion.

l Use adequate ventilation when chargingor using the battery in an enclosed space.

l Remove all the caps before charging thebattery.

l Electrolyte is corrosive diluted sulphuricacid.If electrolyte (battery acid) comes into con-tact with your hands, eyes, clothes andthe painted surface of your vehicle, itshould be thoroughly flushed with water.If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush themwith water immediately and thoroughly,and get prompt medical attention.

CAUTIONl Do not attempt to start the engine by pull-

ing or pushing the vehicle.It could damage your vehicle.

l Always wear protective eye goggles whenworking near the battery.

For emergencies

6-03

6

CAUTIONl Keep the battery out of the reach of chil-

dren.

NOTEl On vehicles with anti-lock brake system, if

the vehicle is put in motion without fullycharging the battery, it might cause the lossof smooth engine operation and the antilockbrake warning lamp to illuminate.Refer to “Anti-lock brake system (ABS)” onpage 4-42.

Engine overheatingE00800601985

If the water temperature gauge indication remainsin the overheating zone for a long time, the enginemay be overheating. If this occurs, take the follow-ing corrective measures:

1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.2. Check whether steam is coming from the en-

gine compartment. [If steam does not come from the engine com-partment]With the engine still running, raise the bon-net to ventilate the engine compartment. [If steam is coming from the engine compart-ment]Stop the engine, and when the steam stops,raise the bonnet to ventilate the engine com-partment. Restart the engine.

WARNINGl Do not open the bonnet while steam is com-

ing from the engine compartment. Itcould cause steam or hot water to spurtout, causing burns. Hot water could spurtout even when there is no steam comingout, and some parts will be very hot. Bevery careful when opening the bonnet.

l Be careful of hot steam, which could beblowing off the reserve tank cap.

l Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap while the engine is hot.

3. Confirm that the cooling fan is turning. If thefan is not turning, stop the engine immediate-ly and have it checked.

A- Radiator cap C- Reserve tankB- Cooling fan *: if so equipped

WARNINGl Be careful not to get your hands or

clothes caught in the cooling fans.

For emergencies

6-04

6

4. After the engine coolant temperature has drop-ped to the normal temperature, stop the engine.

5. Check the coolant level in the reserve tank.

WARNINGl If there is none, make sure that the en-

gine has cooled down before removingthe radiator cap, because hot steam or boil-ing water otherwise will gush from the fill-er port and may scald you.

6. Add coolant to the radiator and/or reservetank if necessary (refer to the “Maintenance”section.)

CAUTIONl Do not add coolant while the engine is

hot. Suddenly adding cold coolant coulddamage the engine. Wait for the engine tocool down, then add coolant a little at atime.

7. Examine the radiator hoses for coolant leak-age and the drive belt for looseness or damage.If there is anything wrong with the coolingsystem or drive belt, we recommend you tohave it checked and repaired.

Bleeding the fuel systemE00800700178

The fuel system should be bled to remove air as de-scribed below if the fuel supply is exhausted duringtravel.

Type 11. Loosen the air plug (A) at the top of the fuel

filter.

For emergencies

6-05

6

2. Pump the hand pump (B) until there are nomore bubbles in the fuel coming out of theair plug (A). When doing this, place a clotharound the air plug (A) to prevent the escap-ing fuel from spraying out.

3. Tighten the air plug (A) when there are nomore bubbles in the fuel.

4. Continue pumping until the hand pump (B)becomes stiff.

5. Finally, check to be sure that there is no leak-age of fuel.If in doubt, we recommend you to consult aspecialist for necessary information.

Type 2Pump the hand pump (A) at the top of the fuel fil-ter until the hand pump becomes stiff.Then try again to start the engine.

If the engine does not start, repeat the process above.

CAUTIONl Do not smoke or have any other open

flame near the vehicle while bleeding thefuel system.

l Be sure to carefully clean away any spiltfuel which could ignite and cause a fire.

Removal of water from the fuelfilter

E00800800267

If the fuel filter indication lamp in the instrumentpanel illuminates during driving, it indicates that wa-ter has accumulated in the fuel filter. If this occurs,remove the water as described below.

Type 11. Loosen the drain plug (A) at the bottom of

the fuel filter.

For emergencies

6-06

6

2. Operate the hand pump (B) slowly 6 or 7times in order to force the water out throughthe drain plug (A).

3. Tighten the drain plug (A) when water no lon-ger comes out.

4. Loosen the air plug and bleed the air.(Refer to “Bleeding the fuel system” on page6-05.)

5. Check to be sure that the fuel filter indicationlamp illuminates when the ignition switch isturned to “ON”, and that it goes off when theengine is started. If in doubt, we recommendyou to consult a specialist for necessary infor-mation.

CAUTIONl Do not smoke or have any other open

flame near the vehicle while bleeding thefuel system.

l Be sure to carefully clean away any waterdrained out because any fuel mixed withthe water could ignite and cause a fire.

Type 2

Take your vehicle to a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Au-thorized Service Point to remove the water fromthe fuel filter.

Tools, jack and jack handleE00800900819

StorageThe storage location of the tools, jack and jack han-dle should be remembered in case of an emergency.

Single cab

Type 1

A- Tool (wheel nut wrench)B- Jack handleC- Jack

For emergencies

6-07

6

Type 2

A- ToolsB- Jack handleC- Jack

Club cab

A- ToolsB- JackC- Jack handle

Double cab

Except for vehicles with rear retracta-ble power window

Type 1

A- Tool (wheel nut wrench)B- Jack handleC- Jack

Type 2

A- ToolsB- Jack handleC- Jack

Vehicles with rear retractable powerwindow

Type 1

A- Tool (wheel nut wrench)B- JackC- Jack handle

Type 2

A- ToolsB- JackC- Wheel nut wrenchD- Jack handle

For emergencies

6-08

6

ToolsE00801900382

Type 1

Single cab, Double cab Club cab

Single cab, Double cab1- Wheel nut wrench

Club cab1- Tool bag2- Wheel nut wrench

Type 2

Single cab, Club cab, Double cab1- Tool bag2- Wheel nut wrench3- Plier4- Driver5- Spanner

Removing and storing the tools, jackand jack handle

E00802300240

Single cabThe tools, jack, and jack handle are located behindthe seat.

1. Tip forward the seatback.(Refer to “Folding the seatback forward” onpage 2-06.)

2. <Type 1>Remove the wheel nut wrench (A) from theholder (B), and take out the wrench.<Type 2>Remove the securing band (C), and then takeout the tools (D).

3. Remove the securing nut (E), and then takeout the jack (F).

4. Remove the jack handle (G) from the holder(H), and take out the handle.

5. Reverse the removing procedure when stor-ing the tool, jack and jack handle.

For emergencies

6-09

6

NOTEl When stowing the jack handle, align the black-

marked part (I) of the jack handle with theholder (J).

Club cabThe tools, jack, and jack handle are stored underthe floor on the left-hand side of the cargo space.

1. Raise the left side seat cushion. Refer to“Folding up the seat cushion (Club cab)” onpage 2-07.Tip forward the seatback of the driver seat.Slide the driver seat forward.

2. Open the lid.

3. Remove the securing band (A), and then takeout the tools (B).

4. Remove the securing nut (C), and then takeout the jack (D).

5. Remove the jack handle (E) from the holder(F), and then take out the jack handle.

6. Reverse the removing procedure when stor-ing the tools, jack and jack handle.

NOTEl When stowing the jack handle, align the col-

oured marking on the jack handle with thaton the holder, and fit the jack in the holder.

Double cab

Except for vehicles with rear retractable powerwindowThe tool (wheel nut wrench only), jack, and jackhandle are located behind the rear seat.

1. Tip forward the seatback of the rear seat.(Refer to “Folding the seatback forward” onpage 2-07.)

2. <Type 1>Remove the wheel nut wrench (A) from theholder (B), and take out the wrench.<Type 2>

For emergencies

6-10

6

Remove the securing band (C), and then takeout the tools (D).


4. Remove the jack handle (G) from the holder(H), and take out the handle.


NOTEl When stowing the jack handle, align the black-

marked part (I) of the jack handle with theholder (H).

Vehicles with rear retractable power windowThe tools, jack, and jack handle are located behindthe rear seat.

1. Tip forward the seatback of the rear seat.(Refer to “Folding the seatback forward” onpage 2-07.)

2. <Type 1>Remove the wheel nut wrench (A) from theholder of the back panel (B), and take out thewrench.<Type 2>Take out the tools (C) from the rear backtrim (D).


For emergencies

6-11

6

4. Remove the jack handle (G) from the holderof the back panel (H), and take out the handle.


NOTEl When stowing the wheel nut wrench, insert it

into the holder on the back panel as illustrated.

To use the jack handle (Club cab, Dou-ble cab with rear retractable powerwindow only)

E00802400124

1. While pressing the snap pin (A) on the han-dle that has a black marking, withdraw and re-move the inner handle (B).

2. Reverse the inner handle (B) then, while press-ing the snap pin (C), insert it into the outerhandle (D) until it is locked by snap pin as il-lustrated.

3. While pressing the snap pin (F) on the assem-bled handle (E), insert the white-marked han-dle (G) until it is locked by snap pin as illus-trated.

For emergencies

6-12

6

Jacking up the vehicleE00801001335

1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.2. Set the parking brake firmly.3. On vehicles with manual transmission, turn

the ignition key to the “LOCK” position,move the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse)position.On vehicles with automatic transmission,move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) po-sition, turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position.

4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and setup a warning triangle, flashing signal lamp,etc., at an adequate distance from the vehi-cle, and have all your passengers leave the ve-hicle.

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when itis raised on the jack, place chocks or blocks(A) at the tyre that is diagonally oppositefrom the tyre (B) you are changing.

WARNINGl Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the

correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle.If the vehicle moves while jacked up, thejack could slip out of position, leading toan accident.

NOTEl The chocks shown in the illustration do not

come with your vehicle. It is recommendedthat you keep one in the vehicle for use if nee-ded.

l If chocks are not available, use stones or anyother objects that are large enough to holdthe wheel in position.

6. Get the spare wheel, jack and jack handleready.

7. Place the jack under one of the jackingpoints shown in the illustration. Use the jack-ing point closest to the tyre you wish tochange.

2WD vehicles with 15 inch wheels

C- Front jacking point (2WD vehi-cles with 15 inch wheels)

2WD vehicles with 16 inch wheels and 4WD ve-hicles

D- Front jacking point (2WD vehi-cles 16 inch wheels and 4WD ve-hicles)

For emergencies

6-13

6

E- Rear jacking point

WARNINGl Set the jack only at the positions shown

here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,it could dent your vehicle or the jackmight fall over and cause personal injury.

l Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-face. Otherwise, the jack might slip andcause personal injury. Always use thejack on a flat, hard surface. Before set-ting the jack, make sure there are nosand or pebbles under the jack base.

NOTEl When jacking up the rear of the vehicle, turn

the tip of the jack so that the grooved portion(F) properly meets the designated point.

To raise the vehicle1. Using the jack handle, turn the release valve

(G) clockwise until it stops.

2. Insert the jack handle in the bracket of thejack and hook the notch (H) on the jack han-dle end to the claw (I) of the bracket.

3. Move the jack handle up and down to raisethe ram until just before the jack contacts thejacking point of the vehicle. Ensure that thejack will properly contact the vehicle jackingpoint.Move the jack handle up and down to raisethe vehicle.

NOTEl This jack is a 2 stage expansion type.

To lower the vehicle1. Put the notch (J) provided on the jack handle

end on the valve (K) of the jack.

For emergencies

6-14

6

2. Using the jack handle, turn the release valveanticlockwise slowly to lower the ram and re-move the jack.

3. Press the piston down all the way, and turnthe release valve clockwise as far as possible.

4. Store jack, jack handle and chocks.

WARNINGl Be sure to open the release valve slowly.

If it is opened quickly, the vehicle willdrop abruptly and the jack may come outof position, causing a serious accident.

CAUTIONl If the release valve is loosened too much

(2 or more turns) in the anticlockwise di-rection, the jack’s oil will leak and thejack cannot be used.

CAUTIONl Close the release valve slowly when lower-

ing the vehicle, or the valve may be dam-aged.

NOTEl Occasionally when the vehicle is jacked up,

the grooved portion of the designated pointwill not come off. When this happens, rockthe vehicle to lower the ram.

l If the jack is difficult to remove by hand, in-sert the jack handle (L) into the bracket (M).Then using the handle, remove the jack.

WARNINGl Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the

tyre is raised off the ground. It is danger-ous to raise the vehicle any higher.

l Do not get under your vehicle while usingthe jack.

WARNINGl Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it

sitting on the jack for a long time. Bothare very dangerous.

l Do not use a jack except the one thatcame with your vehicle.

l The jack should not be used for any pur-pose other than to change a tyre.

l No one should be in your vehicle when us-ing the jack.

l Do not start or run the engine while yourvehicle is on the jack.

l Do not turn the raised wheel. The tyresstill on the ground could turn and makeyour vehicle fall off the jack.

For emergencies

6-15

6

Spare wheelE00801100094

The spare wheel is stored under the floor of the car-go bed.

A- Spare wheel

CAUTIONl When removing the spare wheel, put on

gloves. Removing the spare wheel withyour bare hands may cause injury to thefingers.

CAUTIONl Check the air pressure of the spare wheel

frequently and make sure it is ready foremergency use at any time.Driving with an insufficient tyre pressurecan lead to an accident. If you have nochoice but to drive with an insufficienttyre pressure, keep your speed down andinflate the tyre to the correct pressure assoon as possible. (Refer to “Tyre inflationpressures” on page 8-11.)Maintaining the spare wheel at the high-est specified air pressure will ensure thatit can always be used under any condi-tions (city/high-speed driving, varyingload weight, etc.).

To remove1. Set the jack handle. (Club cab, Double cab

with rear retractable power window only)(Refer to “To use the jack handle” on page6-12.)

2. Insert the jack handle (A) in the hole (B) be-low the rear gate.

3. Securely insert the pin (C) on the jack handleinto the holder (D) of the spare wheel carrier.

4. Insert the wheel nut wrench (E) through theend of the jack handle hole (F), and then turnit anticlockwise to lower the spare wheel com-pletely to the ground and to slack the chain.

For emergencies

6-16

6

5. Remove the hanger disc (G) from the sparewheel.

To install1. Install the hanger disc (A) in the wheel disc

hole.

2. Turn the wheel nut wrench (B) clockwise towind up the chain.

NOTEl Confirm that the hanger disc is securely fit-

ted in the wheel disc hole when the wheel isjust lifted off the ground.

3. After winding up the spare wheel sufficient-ly, make sure it is not loose (the tighteningtorque should be approximately 40 Nm) thenwithdraw the jack handle, taking care not toturn it in the reverse direction.

CAUTIONl The spare wheel should always be secure-

ly in position.If a flat tyre is changed, put the flat tyrein the spare wheel mounting positionwith the wheel outer surface upward, anduse the wheel nut wrench to secure it firm-ly.

How to change a tyreE00801202392

Before changing a tyre, first stop your vehicle in asafe, flat location.

1. Park the vehicle on level and stable ground.2. Set the parking brake firmly.3. On vehicles with manual transmission, turn

the ignition key to the “LOCK” position,move the gearshift lever to the “R” (Reverse)position.On vehicles with automatic transmission,move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) po-sition, turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position.

4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and setup a warning triangle, flashing signal lamp,etc., at an adequate distance from the vehi-cle, and have all your passengers leave the ve-hicle.

5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when itis raised on the jack, place chocks or blocks(A) at the tyre that is diagonally oppositefrom the tyre (B) you are changing.

For emergencies

6-17

6

WARNINGl Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the

correct tyre when jacking up the vehicle.If the vehicle moves while jacked up, thejack could slip out of position, leading toan accident.

NOTEl The chocks shown in the illustration do not

come with your vehicle. It is recommendedthat you keep one in the vehicle for use if nee-ded.

l If chocks are not available, use stones or anyother objects that are large enough to holdthe wheel in position.

6. Get the spare wheel, jack, jack handle andwheel nut wrench ready.

NOTEl Put the spare wheel under the vehicle body

near the flat tyre. This makes it safer if thejack slips out of position.

7. Loosen the wheel nuts with the wheel nutwrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.

Five wheel nuts

Six wheel nuts

8. Find the closest jacking point to the flat tyre(refer to “Jacking up the vehicle” on page6-13). Then position the jack and raise the ve-hicle until the tyre is slightly off the ground.

9. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nutwrench, then take the wheel off.

CAUTIONl Handle the wheel carefully when chang-

ing the tyre, to avoid scratching the wheelsurface.

10. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub surface(C), hub bolts (D) or in the installation holes(E) in the wheel, and then mount the sparewheel.

WARNINGl Mount the spare wheel with the valve

stem (F) facing outboard. If you cannotsee the valve stem (F), you have installedthe wheel backwards.Operating the vehicle with the sparewheel installed backwards can cause vehi-cle damage and result in an accident.

For emergencies

6-18

6

11. Finger-tighten the wheel nuts. (Turn themclockwise.) Vehicles with steel wheelsTighten the wheel nuts (tapered nuts) untilthe tapered parts of the wheel nuts makelight contact with the seats of the wheelholes and the wheel is not loose.With a spare wheel, tighten the wheel nuts inthe same way.

Vehicles with aluminium wheels

Tighten the wheel nuts (flange nuts) until theflanges of the wheel nuts touch the wheeland the wheel is not loose.

Normal wheels and spare wheel(aluminium wheels)

With a spare wheel, tighten the wheel nuts un-til the tapered parts of the wheel nuts makelight contact with the seats of the wheelholes and the wheel is not loose.

Spare wheel (steel wheels)

CAUTIONl Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts

or the nuts, or they will tighten too much.

NOTEl Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the

spare wheel, but return to the original wheeland tyre as soon as possible.

l If all 4 aluminium wheels are changed tosteel wheels, use tapered nuts.

12. Lower the vehicle slowly and then tightenthe nuts crisscross in 2 or 3 steps until eachnut has been tightened securely.

Tightening torqueSteel wheel: 137 to 157 NmAluminium wheel: 118 to 137 Nm

(Achieved by applying a force at the endof the wheel nut wrench supplied withthe vehicle.Steel wheel: 510 to 580 NAluminium wheel: 440 to 500 N)

For emergencies

6-19

6

CAUTIONl Never use your foot or a pipe extension

for extra force in the wheel nut wrench.If you do so, you will tighten the nut toomuch.

13. Lower and remove the jack, then store thejack, jack handle, wheel nut wrench, flattyre, and chocks. Have your damaged tyre re-paired as soon as possible.

14. Check your tyre inflation pressure. The cor-rect pressures are shown on the door label.See the illustration.

CAUTIONl The tyre pressure should be periodically

checked and maintained at the specifiedpressure while the tyre is stowed.

l After changing the tyre and driving the ve-hicle about 1,000 km (620 miles), retight-en the wheel nuts to make sure that theyhave not come loose.

CAUTIONl If the steering wheel vibrates when driv-

ing after changing the tyre, we recom-mend you to have the tyres checked forbalance.

l Do not mix one type of tyre with anotheror use a different size from the one listed.This would cause early wear and poor han-dling.

TowingE00801502816

If your vehicle needs to be towedIf towing is necessary, we recommend you to haveit done by your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Author-ized Service Point or a commercial tow truck service. In the following cases, transport the vehicle using atow truck.l The engine runs but the vehicle does not

move or abnormal noise is produced.l Inspection of the vehicle’s underside reveals

that oil or some other fluid is leaking.

If a wheel gets stuck in a ditch, do not try to towthe vehicle. Please contact your MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point or a commer-cial tow truck service for assistance. Only when you cannot receive a towing servicefrom a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-ice Point or commercial tow truck service, towyour vehicle carefully in accordance with the in-structions given in “Emergency towing” in this part.

For emergencies

6-20

6

The regulations concerning towing may differ fromcountry to country. It is recommended that youobey the regulations of the area where you are driv-ing your vehicle.

Towing the vehicle by a tow truck

CAUTIONl This vehicle must not be towed by a tow

truck using sling lift type equipment(Type A) as illustrated. Using a sling liftwill damage the bumper and front end.

l On 4WD vehicles, be sure to shift the trans-fer shift lever to “2H” position and trans-port the vehicle with the driving wheelson a carriage (Type C, D or E) as illustra-ted. Never try to tow with the transfershift lever in “4H” or “4L” positions andwith the front or rear wheels on theground (Type B or Type C) as illustrated.This could result in driving system dam-age or the vehicle may jump at the car-riage. If you cannot shift the transfershift lever to “2H” position or the trans-mission is malfunctioning or damaged,transport the vehicle with all the wheelson a carriage (Type D or E) as illustrated.

l If vehicles equipped with the Active Sta-bility & Traction Control system (ASTC)are towed with the ignition switch in the“ON” position and only the front wheelsor only the rear wheels raised off theground, the active Traction Control Sys-tem may operate, resulting in an accident.

l On 2WD vehicles, if the transmission ismalfunctioning or damaged, transportthe vehicle with the driving wheels on acarriage (Type C, D or E) as illustrated.

CAUTIONl If you tow a vehicle with automatic trans-

mission with the driving wheels on theground (Type B) as illustrated, make surethat the towing speed and distance givenbelow are never exceeded, causing dam-age to the transmission. Towing speed: 50 km/h (30 mph)Towing distance: 50 km (30 miles) For the towing speed and the towing dis-tance, follow the local driving laws andregulations.

Towing with front wheels off the ground (Type B)Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-tion (manual transmission) or the selector lever inthe “N” (NEUTRAL) position (automatic transmis-sion).Release the parking brake.

CAUTIONl Never tow an automatic transmission ve-

hicle with the front wheels up (and therear wheels on the ground) (Type B)when the automatic transmission fluid lev-el is low. This may cause serious and ex-pensive damage to the transmission.

For emergencies

6-21

6

Towing with rear wheels off the ground (Type C)Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral) posi-tion (manual transmission) or the selector lever inthe “N” (NEUTRAL) position (automatic transmis-sion). Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” positionand secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead po-sition with a rope or tie-down strap. Never placethe ignition switch in the “LOCK” position whentowing.

Emergency towingIf towing service is not available in an emergency,your vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cableor chain secured to the towing hook.If your vehicle is to be towed by another vehicle,pay careful attention to the following points.

If your vehicle is to be towed by anoth-er vehicle

1. The front towing hooks (A) and rear towinghook (B) are located as shown in the illustra-tion. Secure the tow rope to the towing hook.

Front (2WD vehicles with 15 inch wheels)

Front (2WD vehicles with 16 inch wheels and4WD vehicles)

Rear*

NOTEl Using any part other than the designated tow-

ing hooks could result in damage to the vehi-cle body.

l Using a wire rope or metal chain can resultin damage to the vehicle body. It is best touse a non-metallic rope. If you use a wirerope or metal chain, wrap it with cloth at anypoint where it touches the vehicle body.

l Take care that the tow rope is kept as horizon-tal as possible. An angled tow rope can dam-age the vehicle body.

l Secure the tow rope to the same side towinghook, to keep the tow rope as straight as pos-sible.

2. Keep the engine running.If the engine is not running, turn the ignitionkey to the “ACC” or “ON” position to un-lock the steering wheel.

CAUTIONl When the engine is not running, the

brake booster and power steering pumpdo not operate. This means higher brakedepression force and higher steering ef-fort are required. Therefore, vehicle oper-ation is more difficult than usual.

l Do not leave the key in the “LOCK” posi-tion. The steering wheel will lock, causingloss of control.

3. Place the gearshift lever in the “N” (Neutral)position (manual transmission) or the selec-tor lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL) position (au-tomatic transmission).

4. On 4WD vehicles, the transfer shift lever to“2H” position.

5. Turn on the hazard warning lamps if requiredby law. (Follow the local driving laws andregulations.)

6. During towing make sure that close contactis maintained between the drivers of both ve-hicles, and that the vehicles travel at lowspeed.

For emergencies

6-22

6

WARNINGl To prevent entry of exhaust gas from the

towing vehicle, set your air selection leverto the recirculation position.

CAUTIONl Avoid sudden braking, sudden accelera-

tion and sharp turning; such operationcould cause damage to the towing hooksor the tow rope.People in the vicinity could be injured asa result.

l When towing or being towed down a longslope, the brakes may overheat reducingthe effectiveness. In this situation, haveyour vehicle transported by a tow truck.

l When the vehicle with automatic trans-mission is to be towed by another vehiclewith the all wheels on the ground, makesure that the towing speed and distancegiven below are never exceeded, causingdamage to the transmission. Towing speed: 50 km/h (30 mph)Towing distance: 50 km (30 miles) For the towing speed and the towing dis-tance, follow the local driving laws andregulations.

If your vehicle tows another vehicle (vehicles withrear towing hook only)The rear towing hook is located as shown in the il-lustration. Secure the tow rope to the rear towinghook.

NOTEl Using any part other than the designated tow-

ing hook could result in damage to the vehi-cle body.

CAUTIONl On vehicles with super select 4WD, when

you are going to tow another vehicle,move the transfer shift lever to “4H” posi-tion.Selecting “2H” drive may increase the dif-ferential oil temperature, resulting in pos-sible damage to the driving system.Further, the drive train will be subjectedto excessive loading possibly leading to oilleakage, component seizure, or other seri-ous faults.

NOTEl Your vehicle should only be used to tow an-

other vehicle if the weight of the other vehi-cle is less than the weight of your vehicle.

For emergencies

6-23

6

Operation under adverse drivingconditions

E00801702140

If your vehicle becomes stuck in sand,mud or snowIf the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand, ormud, it can often be moved with a rocking motion.Move the selector lever alternately between the“L” (LOW) and “R” (REVERSE) position (withmanual transmission, between 1st and Reverse),while applying slight pressure to the accelerator ped-al.Avoid racing the engine or spinning the wheels. Pro-longed efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result inoverheating and transmission failure. Allow the en-gine to idle for a few minutes to let the transmis-sion cool between rocking attempts.If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking at-tempts, seek other assistance.

WARNINGl When attempting to rock your vehicle out

of a stuck position, be sure that the areaaround the vehicle is clear of people andphysical objects. The rocking motion maycause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-ward or backward, causing injury or dam-age to nearby people or objects.

On 2WD vehicles, it is recommended to start the ve-hicle with parking brake partially, but not complete-ly, applied by slightly pulling the parking brake lev-er.After the vehicle has become free, do not forget torelease the parking brake.

NOTEl Depress the accelerator pedal gradually when

starting the vehicle.

On a flooded roadl Avoid flooded roads. Water could enter the

brake discs, resulting in temporarily ineffec-tive brakes. In such cases, lightly depress thebrake pedal to see if the brakes operate prop-erly. If they do not, lightly depress the pedalseveral times while driving in order to drythe brake pads.

l When driving in rain or on a road with manypuddles a layer of water may form betweenthe tyres and the road surface.This reduces a tyre’s frictional resistance onthe road, resulting in loss of steering stabilityand braking capability. To cope with this, observe the following items:

(a) Drive your vehicle at slow speed. (b) Do not drive on worn tyres. Always

maintain the specified tyre inflationpressures.

On a snow-covered or frozen roadl When driving on a snow-covered or frozen

road, it is recommended that you use snowtyres or tyre chains.Refer to the “Snow tyres” and “Tyre chains”sections.

l Avoid high-speed operation, sudden acceler-ation, abrupt brake application and sharp cor-nering.

l Depressing the brake pedal during travel onsnowy or icy roads may cause tyre slippageand skidding. When traction between thetyres and the road is reduced the wheels mayskid and the vehicle cannot readily bebrought to a stop by conventional brakingtechniques. Braking will differ, dependingupon whether you have anti-lock brake sys-tem (ABS). If you do have ABS, brake bypressing the brake system pedal hard, andkeeping it pressed. If you do not have ABS,pump the brake pedal with short rapid jabs,each time fully applying and fully releasingfor greatest effect.

l Allow extra distance between your vehicleand the vehicle in front of you, and avoid sud-den braking.

l Accumulation of ice on the braking systemcan cause the wheels to lock. Pull away froma standstill slowly after confirming safetyaround the vehicle.

CAUTIONl Do not press the accelerator pedal rapid-

ly. If the wheels break free of the ice, thevehicle could suddenly start moving andpossibly cause an accident.

On a bumpy or rutted roadl Drive as slow as possible when driving on

bumpy or rutted roads.

For emergencies

6-24

6

CAUTIONl The impact on tyres and/or wheels when

driving on a bumpy or rutted road candamage the tyre and/or wheel.

For emergencies

6-25

6

Vehicle care precautions...............................................................7-02Cleaning the interior of your vehicle............................................7-02Cleaning the exterior of your vehicle...........................................7-03

Vehicle care

7

Vehicle care precautionsE00900100870

In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, it isnecessary to perform regular maintenance using theproper procedures. Always maintain your vehiclein compliance with environmental pollution controlregulations. Carefully select the materials used forwashing, etc., to be sure that they do not contain cor-rosives. If in doubt, we recommend you to consulta specialist for selection of these materials.

CAUTIONl Cleaning products can be dangerous.

Some are poisonous. Others can burst in-to flame if you strike a match or dropthem on a hot part of the vehicle. Someare dangerous if you breathe their fumesin a closed space. When you use anythingin a container to clean your vehicle, al-ways follow the instructions and alwaysopen your vehicle doors or windows whenyou’re cleaning the inside. Never use thefollowing to clean your vehicle:

• Petrol• Paint Thinner• Benzine• Kerosene• Turpentine• Naphtha• Lacquer Thinner• Carbon Tetrachloride• Nail Polish Remover• Acetone

l These are all dangerous, and can damageyour vehicle.

Cleaning the interior of yourvehicle

E00900200288

After cleaning the interior of your vehicle with wa-ter, cleaner or similar, wipe and dry in a shady, well-ventilated area.

CAUTIONl Do not use organic substances (solvents,

benzine, kerosene, alcohol, petrol, etc.) oralkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discolouring,staining or cracking of the surface.If you use cleaners or polishing agents,make sure their ingredients do not in-clude the substances mentioned above.

NOTEl Always read the instructions on the cleaner la-

bel.

Plastic, vinyl leather, fabric andflocked parts

E00900300045

1. Gently wipe off with gauze or other softcloth soaked with a 3 % aqueous solution ofneutral detergent.

2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring out well.Using this cloth, wipe off the detergent thor-oughly.

NOTEl Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and protec-

tants containing silicons or wax.Such products may cause annoying reflec-tions and obscure vision.

UpholsteryE00900500018

1. To maintain the value of your new vehicle,handle the upholstery carefully and keep theinterior clean.Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean theseats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic leathershould be cleaned with an appropriate clean-er, and cloth fabrics can be cleaned with ei-ther upholstery cleaner or a 3 % solution ofneutral detergent in lukewarm water.

2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum cleanerand remove any stains with carpet cleaner.Oil and grease can be removed by lightly dab-bing with a clean colourfast cloth and stain re-mover.

Genuine leather*E00900600817

1. Gently wipe off with gauze or other softcloth soaked with a 5 % aqueous solution ofneutral detergent.

2. Dip cloth in fresh water and wring it outwell. Using this cloth, wipe off the detergentthoroughly.

3. Apply leather protecting agent to the genuineleather surface.

Vehicle care

7-02

7

NOTEl If genuine leather is wet with water or is wash-

ed in water, wipe off water as quickly as pos-sible with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mil-dew may grow.

l The genuine leather surface may be damagedif a nylon brush or synthetic fibre is rubbedhard against it.

l Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene,alcohol and petrol, acid or alkaline solventsmay discolour the genuine leather surface.Be sure to use neutral detergents.

l Remove dirty patches or oil substances quick-ly as they can stain genuine leather.

l The genuine leather surface may harden andshrink if it is exposed to direct sun for longhours. When your vehicle is parked, place itin the shade as much as possible.

l When the temperature of the vehicle interiorrises in summer, vinyl products left on thegenuine leather seat may deteriorate andstick to the seat.

Cleaning the exterior of yourvehicle

E00900700010

If the following is left on your vehicle, it maycause corrosion, discolouration and stains, washthe vehicle as soon as possible.l Seawater, anti-freeze for road use.l Soot and dust, iron powder from factories,

chemical substance (acids, alkalis, coal-tar,etc.).

l Droppings from birds, carcasses of insects,tree sap, etc.

WashingE00900902016

Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust picked upfrom the road surface can damage the paint coatand body of your vehicle if left in prolonged contact.Frequent washing and waxing is the best way to pro-tect your vehicle from this damage. This will alsobe effective in protecting it from environmental el-ements such as rain, snow, salt air, etc.Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Park thevehicle in the shade and spray it with water to re-move dust. Next, using an ample amount of cleanwater and a car washing brush or sponge, wash thevehicle from top to bottom.Use a mild car washing soap if necessary. Rinsethoroughly and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Afterwashing the vehicle, carefully clean the joints andflanges of the doors, bonnet, etc., where dirt is like-ly to remain.

CAUTIONl When washing the under side of your ve-

hicle or wheel, be careful not to injureyour hands.

l Refrain from using a car wash as its brush-es may scratch the paint surface, causingit to lose its gloss.Scratches will be especially visible ondarker coloured vehicles.

l Never spray or splash water on the electri-cal components in the engine compart-ment, as this may adversely affect enginestarting.Exercise caution also when washing theunderbody; be careful not to spray waterinto the engine compartment.

l Some types of hot water washing equip-ment apply high pressure and heat to thevehicle. They may cause heat distortionand damage to the vehicle resin parts andmay result in flooding of the vehicle inte-rior. Therefore; observe the following.

• Maintain a good distance of approx.50 cm or more between the vehiclebody and the washing nozzle.

• When washing around the door glass,hold the nozzle at a distance of morethan 50 cm and at right angles to theglass surface.

Vehicle care

7-03

7

CAUTIONl After washing the vehicle, drive the vehi-

cle slowly while lightly depressing thebrake pedal several times in order to dryout the brakes.Leaving the brakes wet could result in re-duced braking performance. Also, thereis a possibility that they could freeze upor become inoperative due to rust, render-ing the vehicle unable to move.

l Using an automatic car wash, pay atten-tion to the following items, referring tothe operation manual or consulting a carwash operator. If the following procedureis not followed, it could result in damageto your vehicle.

• The outside mirrors are retracted.• If your vehicle is equipped with the pil-

lar antenna, it can be retracted.• If your vehicle is equipped with the

roof antenna, it can be removed.

During cold weatherSalt and other chemicals spread on the roads insome areas in winter can have a harmful effect onthe vehicle body. You should therefore wash the ve-hicle as often as possible in accordance with ourcare-instructions. It is recommended to have a pres-ervative applied and the underfloor protectionchecked before and after the cold weather season.After washing your vehicle, wipe off all water-drops from the rubber parts around the doors to pre-vent the doors from freezing.

NOTEl To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping

on the doors, bonnet, etc., they should be trea-ted with silicone spray.

WaxingE00901000687

Waxing the vehicle will help prevent the adherenceof dust and road chemicals to the paintwork. Applya wax solution after washing the vehicle, or at leastonce every three months to assist displacing of water.Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight. Youshould wax after the surfaces have cooled.

CAUTIONl Waxes containing high abrasive com-

pounds should not be used. Such waxes re-move rust and stains effectively from thepaintwork but they are harmful to the lus-tre on the painted surface and the platedsurface.Further, they are harmful to glossy surfa-ces such as grille, garnish, mouldings, etc.

l Do not use petrol or paint thinners to re-move road tar or other contamination tothe vehicle surface.

l Do not apply wax on the areas havingblack mat coating as it can cause unevendiscolouration, patches, blurs, etc. Ifstained with wax, immediately wipe offwith a piece of soft cloth and warm water.

CAUTIONl On vehicles with a sunroof, be careful

when waxing the area around the sunroofopening, not to put any wax on the weath-erstrip (black rubber). If stained withwax, the weatherstrip cannot maintain aweatherproof seal with the sunroof.

PolishingE00901100011

The vehicle should only be polished if the paint-work has become stained or lost its lustre. Matt-fin-ish parts and plastic bumpers must not be polished,polishing these parts will stain them or damagetheir finish.

Damaged paintE00901200012

Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat shouldbe touched up as soon as possible withMITSUBISHI touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.Check body areas facing the road or the tyres care-fully for damage to the paint coat caused by flyingstones, etc. The paint code number for your vehiclecan be found on the vehicle information code platein the engine compartment.

Cleaning plastic partsE00901300446

Use a sponge or chamois leather.If a car wax adheres on a grey or black rough sur-face of the bumper, moulding or lamps, the surfacebecomes white. In such a case, wipe it off usinglukewarm water and soft cloth or chamois leather.

Vehicle care

7-04

7

CAUTIONl Do not use a scrubbing brush or other

hard tools as they may damage the plasticpart surface.

l Do not use wax containing compound (pol-ishing powder) which may damage theplastic part surface.

l Do not bring the plastic parts into contactwith petrol, light oil, brake fluids, engineoils, greases, paint thinners, and sulphu-ric acid (battery electrolyte) which maycrack, stain or discolour the plastic parts.If they touch the plastic parts, wipe themoff with soft cloth, chamois or the likeand an aqueous solution of neutral deter-gent then immediately rinse the affectedparts with water.

Chrome partsE00901400014

In order to prevent spots and corrosion of chromeparts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and apply aspecial protective coating. This should be donemore frequently in winter.

Aluminium wheels*E00901500116

1. Remove dirt using a sponge while sprinklingwater on the wheel.

2. Use neutral detergent on any dirt that cannotbe removed easily with water.Rinse off the neutral detergent after washingthe wheel.

3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamoisleather or a soft cloth.

CAUTIONl Do not use a brush or other hard imple-

ment on the wheels.Doing so could scratch the wheels.

l Do not use any cleaner that contains anabrasive substance or is acidic or alka-line. Doing so could cause the coating onthe wheels to peel or become discolouredor stained.

l Do not directly apply hot water using asteam cleaner or by any other means.

l Contact with seawater and road deicercan cause corrosion. Rinse off such sub-stances as soon as possible.

Window glassE00901600058

The window glass can normally be cleaned usingonly a sponge and water.Glass cleaner can be used to remove oil, grease,dead insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe drywith a clean, dry, soft cloth. Never use the samecloth to wipe the window glass as would be used towipe the paintwork; wax from the painted surfacescould adhere to the glass and reduce its transparen-cy and visibility.

NOTEl To clean the inside of the rear window, al-

ways use a soft cloth and wipe the windowglass along the demister heater element so asnot to cause damage.

Wiper bladesE00901700017

Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove grease,dead insects, etc., from the wiper blades. Replacethe wiper blades when they no longer wipe proper-ly. (Refer to page 8-16.)

Cleaning the sunroof*E00901800180

Clean the inside of the sunroof with a soft cloth.Hard deposits should be wiped away with a clothdipped in warm, neutral detergent solution. Wipeaway the solution with a sponge dipped in fresh wa-ter.

NOTEl The surface treatment on the inside of the

glass may be removed if hard cloth or organ-ic solvent (benzine, kerosene, thinner, etc.) isused.

Engine compartmentE00902100265

Clean the engine compartment at the beginning andend of winter. Pay particular attention to flanges,crevices and peripheral parts where dust containingroad chemicals and other corrosive materials mightcollect.If salt and other chemicals are used on the roads inyour area, clean the engine compartment at least ev-ery three months.Never spray or splash water on the electrical com-ponents in the engine compartment, as this maycause damage.Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic parts andso on into contact with sulphuric acid (battery elec-trolyte) which may crack, stain or discolour them.

Vehicle care

7-05

7

If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth, cha-mois or the like and an aqueous solution of neutraldetergent then immediately rinse the affected partswith plenty of water.

Vehicle care

7-06

7

Service precautions.......................................................................8-02Catalytic converter........................................................................8-02Bonnet...........................................................................................8-03Engine oil......................................................................................8-04Engine coolant..............................................................................8-05Automatic transmission fluid*......................................................8-06Washer fluid.................................................................................8-07Brake fluid....................................................................................8-07Clutch fluid*.................................................................................8-08Power steering fluid......................................................................8-09Battery..........................................................................................8-09Tyres.............................................................................................8-10Clutch pedal free play*.................................................................8-14Brake pedal free play....................................................................8-15Parking brake lever stroke............................................................8-15Wiper blades.................................................................................8-16General maintenance....................................................................8-17For cold and snowy weather.........................................................8-18Fusible links..................................................................................8-18Fuses.............................................................................................8-19Replacement of lamp bulbs..........................................................8-22

Maintenance

8

Service precautionsE01000100706

Adequate care of your vehicle at regular intervalsserves to preserve the value and appearance as longas possible.Maintenance items as described in this owner’s man-ual can be performed by the owner.We recommend you to have the periodic inspectionand maintenance performed by a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point or another spe-cialist.In the event a malfunction or other problem is dis-covered, we recommend you to have it checkedand repaired. This section contains information oninspection maintenance procedures that you can doyourself. Follow the instructions and cautions foreach of the various procedures.

WARNINGl When checking or servicing the inside of

the engine compartment, make sure theengine is switched off and has had achance to cool down.

l If it is necessary to do work in the enginecompartment with the engine running, beespecially careful that your clothing, hair,etc., does not become caught by the fans,drive belts, or other moving parts.

l For vehicle with air conditioning, the fanmay turn on automatically even if the en-gine is not running; turn the ignition keyto “LOCK” position and remove the keyto ensure safety while you work in the en-gine compartment.

WARNINGl Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open

flames around fuel or battery. The fumesare flammable.

l Be extremely cautious when workingaround the battery. It contains poisonousand corrosive sulphuric acid.

l Do not get under your vehicle with justthe body jack supporting it. Always useautomotive jack stands.

l Improper handling of components andmaterials used in the vehicle can endan-ger your personal safety. We recommendyou to consult a specialist for necessary in-formation.

Catalytic converterE01000200925

For ordinary use, there are no particular precautions.The exhaust gas scavenging devices used with thecatalytic converter are extremely efficient for the re-duction of noxious gases. The catalytic converter isinstalled in the exhaust system.It is important to keep the engine properly tuned toensure proper catalyst operation and prevent possi-ble catalyst damage.

CAUTIONl Damage to the catalytic converter can re-

sult if your vehicle is not kept in properoperating condition. In the event of an en-gine malfunction particularly involvingengine misfire or other apparent loss ofperformance, have your vehicle servicedpromptly. Continued operation of your ve-hicle with a severe overheated conditionmay result in possible damage to the con-verter and vehicle.

WARNINGl As with any vehicle, do not park or oper-

ate this vehicle in areas where combusti-ble materials such as dry grass or leavescan come in contact with a hot exhaustsince a fire could occur.

l Paint should not be applied to the catalyt-ic converter.

Maintenance

8-02

8

The catalytic converter itself gets hot quickly, andmay be damaged if overheated. The followingpoints should be noted in order to prevent the igni-tion of unburned petrol within the catalytic convert-er.l Do not drive with an extremely low fuel lev-

el; running out of fuel could cause damage tothe catalytic converter.

l Do not switch OFF the ignition switch whiledriving.

l Do not attempt to start the engine by pushingthe vehicle. If the battery is weak or dis-charged, use another battery to start the en-gine.

l Do not idle the engine for prolonged periodsduring very rough idle or malfunctioning op-erating conditions.

l Do not race the engine when turning off theignition switch. This will cause the catalyticconverter to be damaged due to contact withunburnt fuel.

l Stop driving the vehicle if you think the per-formance is noticeably low, or if the enginehas a malfunction such as with the ignition,etc.If it is impractical to stop driving immediate-ly, reduce the speed and drive for only ashort time. We recommend you to have yourvehicle inspected as soon as possible.

l In unusual situations involving major engineproblems, a burnt smell may indicate severeand abnormal catalyst overheating.If this occurs, the vehicle should be stoppedin a safe place, the engine switched off andthe vehicle allowed to cool. Once the engineis cool, a service, including a tuneup to man-ufacturer’s specifications, should be obtainedimmediately.

BonnetE01000301936

To openPull the release lever towards you to unlock the bon-net.

LHD

RHD

Raise the bonnet while pressing the safety lock.

NOTEl Only open the bonnet when the wipers are in

the parked position. Failure to do so maycause damage to the bonnet, wiper arms orfront windscreen.

Support the bonnet by inserting the support bar inits slot.

Maintenance

8-03

8

CAUTIONl Note that the support bar may disengage

the bonnet if the open bonnet is lifted bya strong wind.

l Always insert the support bar into thehole provided specifically for this pur-pose. Supporting the bonnet at any otherlocation could result in the support barslipping out and lead to an accident.

To closeUnlatch the support bar and clip it in its holder.Slowly lower the bonnet to a position about 30 cmabove the closed position, then let it drop.

NOTEl If this does not close the bonnet, release it

from a slightly higher position.l Do not press down the bonnet hard with a

hand as it may damage the bonnet.

CAUTIONl Be careful that hands or fingers are not

trapped when closing the bonnet.l Before driving, make sure that the bon-

net is securely locked. An incompletelylocked bonnet can suddenly open whiledriving. This can be extremely dangerous.

Engine oilE01000401979

To check and refill engine oil

Type 1 Type 2

The engine oil used has a significant effect on theengine’s performance, service life and startability.Be sure to use oil of the recommended quality andappropriate viscosity.All engines consume a certain amount of oil duringnormal operation, and engine oil consumption isgreatly influenced by payload, engine speed, etc.Therefore, it is important to check the oil level atregular intervals or before starting a long trip.This check must be made with the engine warm butnot running. Park the vehicle on a level surface,stop the engine, and then wait a few moments to al-low the engine oil in circulation to return to the oilpan to ensure accurate measurement.Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a clean cloth.Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes. Remove thedipstick and read the oil level, which should al-ways be within the range indicated.

Maintenance

8-04

8

If the oil level is below the specified limit, removethe cap located on the cylinder head cover and addenough oil to raise the level to within the specifiedrange.Be sure to use the specified engine oil and do notmix various types of oil. Also, avoid mixing differ-ent makes of oil together if possible.After adding oil, close the cap securely. Use only the recommended oils with an ACEA orAPI classification as specified in this manual.

NOTEl The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the

vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (forexample, repeated operation on rough roads,in mountainous regions, on roads with manyuphill and downhill gradients, or over shortdistances). Consequently, the oil will requireearlier replacement.

l For handling of used engine oils, refer topage 05.

Selection of engine oil

l Select engine oil of the proper SAE viscositynumber according to the atmospheric temper-ature.

l Use engine oil conforming to the followingclassification:

• ACEA classification:“For service A3/ B3, A3/B4 or A5/B5”

• API classification:“For service CF-4”

NOTEl Use of additives is not recommended since

they may reduce the effectiveness of addi-tives already included in the engine oil. Itmay result in failure of the mechanical assem-bly.

Engine coolantE01000501202

To check the coolant levelA translucent coolant reserve tank is located in theengine compartment.The coolant level in this tank should be kept be-tween the “LOW” and “FULL” marks when meas-ured while the engine is cold.

To add coolantThe cooling system is a closed system and normal-ly the loss of coolant should be very slight. A no-ticeable drop in the coolant level could indicate leak-age. If this occurs, we recommended you to havethe system checked as soon as possible.If the level should drop below the “LOW” level onthe reserve tank, open the lid and add coolant.Also, if the reserve tank is completely empty, re-move the radiator cap and add coolant until the lev-el reaches the filler neck.

Maintenance

8-05

8

WARNINGl Do not open the radiator cap while the en-

gine is hot. The coolant system is underpressure and any hot coolant escapingcould cause severe burns.

Anti-freezeThe engine coolant contains an ethylene glycol anti-corrosion agent. The cylinder head and water pumphousing are cast aluminium alloy, and periodicchanging of the engine coolant is necessary to pre-vent corrosion of these parts. Use “DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFE COOL-ANT” or equivalent.MITSUBISHI Genuine Coolant has excellent pro-tection against corrosion and rust formation of allmetals including aluminium and can avoid block-ages in the radiator, heater, cylinder head, engineblock, etc.Because of the necessity of this anti-corrosionagent, the coolant must not be replaced with plainwater even in summer. The required concentrationof anti-freeze differs depending on the expected am-bient temperature.

Ambient tempera-ture (minimum) °C

-15 -20 -25 -30 -35 -50

Anti-freezeconcentration %

30 35 40 45 50 60

CAUTIONl Do not use alcohol or methanol anti-

freeze or any engine coolants mixed withalcohol or methanol anti-freeze. The useof an improper anti-freeze can cause cor-rosion of the aluminium components.

l For effective anti-corrosion and anti-freeze performance, keep the anti-freezeconcentration within the range of 30 to60 %.Concentrations exceeding 60 % will re-sult in a reduction of both the anti-freezeand cooling performance thus adverselyaffecting the engine.

l Do not top up with water only.Water by itself reduces the rust-protec-tive and anti-freeze qualities of the cool-ant and has a lower boiling point. It canalso cause damage to the cooling system ifit should freeze. Do not use tapwater, as itcan cause corrosion and rust formation.

During cold weatherIf the temperatures in your area drop below freez-ing, there is the danger that the coolant in the en-gine or radiator could freeze and cause severe dam-age to the engine and/or radiator. Add a sufficientamount of anti-freeze to the coolant to prevent itfrom freezing.The concentration should be checked before thestart of cold weather and anti-freeze added to thesystem if necessary.

Automatic transmission fluid*E01000600903

The proper amount of automatic transmission fluidis essential to the life and operation of the automat-ic transmission. Either insufficient fluid or exces-sive fluid could cause transmission trouble. Thetransmission fluid filler port cap is equipped with adipstick. Use the following procedure to check thefluid level.

Procedure for checking the fluid level1. Check the fluid level after the vehicle has

been driven enough to warm up the transmis-sion fluid.

2. Park the vehicle on a flat, level surface andapply the parking brake.

3. With the engine idling and the brake pedalfully depressed, move the transmission selec-tor lever through all the positions from the"P” (PARK) to “L” (LOW), stopping momen-tarily at each position.

4. Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)position.

5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a cleanlint-free cloth.

6. Reinsert the dipstick as far as it goes.

Maintenance

8-06

8

7. Remove dipstick and read the automatic trans-mission fluid level.The fluid level should always be between thetwo marks on the dipstick.

WARNINGl Do not spill the fluid onto a hot exhaust

manifold during topping up or inspec-tion, or a fire may occur.

Fluid typeUse only “DIA QUEEN ATF SP III” transmissionfluid to ensure optimum transmission performance.

Washer fluidE01000700672

The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is in the en-gine compartment.Check the washer fluid level at regular intervalsand add washer fluid to reservoir if necessary.

NOTEl The washer fluid container server serves the

windscreen and headlamps (if so equipped).

During cold weatherTo ensure proper operation of the washers at lowtemperatures, use a fluid containing an anti-freez-ing agent.

Brake fluidE01000900687

To check the fluid levelCheck the brake fluid level in the reservoir.The brake fluid level must be between the “MAX”and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.

The brake fluid level is monitored by a float. Whenthe brake fluid level falls below the “MIN” mark,the brake fluid warning lamp lights up.The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the brakepads, but this does not indicate any abnormality.If the brake fluid level falls markedly in a shortlength of time, it indicates leaks from the brake sys-tem.If this occurs, we recommend you to have the vehi-cle checked.

Fluid typeUse brake fluid conforming to DOT3 or DOT4.The brake fluid is hygroscopic. Too much moisturein the brake fluid will adversely affect the brake sys-tem, reducing the brake performance.

Maintenance

8-07

8

In addition, the brake fluid reservoir is equippedwith a special cap to prevent the entrance of air,and this cap should not be removed.

CAUTIONl Take care in handling brake fluid as it is

harmful to the eyes, may irritate yourskin and also damage painted surfaces.

l Use only the specified brake fluid.Do not mix or add different brands ofbrake fluid to prevent chemical reactions.Do not let any petroleum-based fluidtouch, mix with, or get into the brake fluid.This will damage the seals.

l Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to pre-vent the brake fluid from deteriorating ex-cept maintenance.

l Clean the filler cap before removing andclose the cap securely after maintenance.

Clutch fluid*E01001000281

To check the fluid levelThe clutch fluid in the master cylinder should bechecked when performing other underhood service.In addition, the system should be checked for leak-age at the same time.Check to make certain that the clutch fluid level isalways between the “MAX” and “MIN” level mark-ings on the fluid reservoir.

LHD

RHD

A rapid fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch sys-tem which should be inspected by a MITSUBISHIMOTORS Authorized Service Point or another spe-cialist and repaired immediately.

Fluid typeBrake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 shouldbe used.The reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoidcontamination from foreign matter or moisture.DO NOT ALLOW PETROLEUM-BASED FLUIDTO CONTACT, MIX WITH, OR OTHERWISECONTAMINATE THE BRAKE FLUID. SEALDAMAGE WILL RESULT.

WARNINGl Take care in handling brake fluid as it is

harmful to the eyes and may also causedamage to painted surfaces. Wipe up anyspills immediately.

Maintenance

8-08

8

Power steering fluidE01001100703

To check the fluid levelCheck the fluid level in the reservoir while the en-gine is idling.Check to make certain that the power steering fluidlevel is always between the “MAX” and “MIN” lev-el markings on the fluid reservoir and refill the flu-id, if necessary.

Fluid typeUse “ATF DEXRON III or DEXRON II”.

BatteryE01001201466

The condition of the battery is very important forquick starting of the engine and proper functioningof the vehicle’s electrical system. Regular inspec-tion and care are especially important in cold weath-er.

Checking battery electrolyte level

The electrolyte level must be between the specifiedlimit on the outside of the battery. Replenish withdistilled water as necessary.The inside of the battery is divided into several com-partments; remove the cap from each compartmentand fill to the upper mark. Do not top up beyondthe upper mark because spillage during drivingcould cause damage.Check the electrolyte level at least once everyfour weeks, depending on the operating conditions.If the battery is not used, it will discharge by itselfwith time.Check it once every four weeks and charge withlow current as necessary.

During cold weatherThe capacity of the battery is reduced at low tem-peratures. This is an inevitable result of its chemi-cal and physical properties.This is why a very cold battery, particularly onethat is not fully charged, will only deliver a fractionof the starter current which is normally available.We recommend you to have the battery checked be-fore the start of cold weather and, if necessary,have it charged or replaced.This does not only ensure reliable starting, but a bat-tery which is kept fully charged also has a longer life.

Disconnection and connectionTo disconnect the battery cable, stop the engine,first disconnect the negative (-) terminal and thenthe positive (+) terminal.When connecting the battery, first connect the posi-tive (+) terminal and then the negative (-) terminal.

NOTEl Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-

necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-nal of the battery.

Type 1

Maintenance

8-09

8

Type 2

WARNINGl Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away

from the battery because the batterycould explode.

l The battery electrolyte is extremely caus-tic. Do not allow it to come in contactwith your eyes, skin, clothing, or the pain-ted surfaces of the vehicle. Spilt electro-lyte should be flushed immediately withample amounts of water.Irritation to eyes or skin from contactwith electrolyte requires immediate medi-cal attention.

l Ventilate when charging or using the bat-tery in an enclosed space.

CAUTIONl Never disconnect the battery with the ig-

nition switch in the “ON” position; doingso could damage the vehicle’s electricalcomponents.

l Never short-circuit the battery; doing socould cause it to overheat and be damaged.

CAUTIONl Always wear protective eye goggles when

working near the battery.l If the battery is to be quick-charged, first

disconnect the battery cables.l In order to prevent a short circuit, be

sure to disconnect the negative (-) termi-nal first.

l Keep it out of reach of children.l Do not bring the nearby parts, the plastic

parts and so on into contact with sulphu-ric acid (battery electrolyte) which maycrack, stain or discolour them.If they are in contact, wipe off with softcloth, chamois or the like and an aqueoussolution of neutral detergent then imme-diately rinse the affected parts with plen-ty of water.

NOTEl Keep the terminals clean. After the battery is

connected, apply terminal protection grease.To clean the terminals, use lukewarm water.

l Check to see if the battery is securely instal-led and cannot be moved during travel. Alsocheck each terminal for tightness.

l When the vehicle is to be left unused for along period of time, remove the battery andstore it in a place where the battery fluid willnot freeze. The battery should be stored onlyin a fully charged condition.

TyresE01001300239

WARNINGl Driving with tyres that are worn, dam-

aged or improperly inflated can lead to aloss of control or blow out of the tyreswhich can result in a collision with seri-ous or fatal injury.

Maintenance

8-10

8

Tyre inflation pressuresE01001402188

Tyre sizeUP TO 3 PASSENGERS MAX. LOAD OR TRAILER TOWING

Front Rear Front Rear

195R15C 106/104R 8PR2.0 bar

(200 kPa){29 psi}

2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}

2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}

4.5 bar(450 kPa){65 psi}

205R16C 110/108R 8PR2.4 bar

(240 kPa){35 psi}

2.4 bar(240 kPa){35 psi}

2.4 bar(240 kPa){35 psi}

4.5 bar(450 kPa){65 psi}

205/80R16 104S RF2.2 bar

(220 kPa){32 psi}

2.2 bar(220 kPa){32 psi}

2.2 bar(220 kPa){32 psi}

2.9 bar(290 kPa){42 psi}

245/70R16 111S RF2.0 bar

(200 kPa){29 psi}

2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}

2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}

2.9 bar(290 kPa){42 psi}

245/65R17 111S RF2.0 bar

(200 kPa){29 psi}

2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}

2.0 bar(200 kPa){29 psi}

2.9 bar(290 kPa){42 psi}

Check the tyre inflation pressure of all the tyres while they are cold; if insufficient or excessive, adjust to the specified value.After the tyre inflation pressure has been adjusted, check the tyres for damage and air leaks. Be sure to put caps on the valves.

Maintenance

8-11

8

Wheel conditionE01001800797

1- Location of the tread wear indicator2- Tread wear indicator

Check the tyres for cuts, cracks and other damage.Replace the tyres if there are deep cuts or cracks.Also check each tyre for pieces of metal or pebbles.The use of worn tyres can be very dangerous be-cause of the greater chance of skidding or hydro-planing. The tread depth of the tyres must exceed1.6 mm in order for the tyres to meet the minimumrequirement for use.If there are tread wear indicators on the tyres, theywill appear in six places on the surface of the tyreas the tyre wears, thereby indicating that the tyreno longer meets the minimum requirement for use.When these wear indicators appear, the tyres mustbe replaced with new ones.Check that the wheel nuts are tightened correctly.Refer to the section entitled “For emergencies” forinformation concerning replacement of the tyres.

NOTEl The mark and the location of the tyre tread

wear indicators are different depending onthe tyre manufacturer.

On 4-wheel drive vehicles, when replacement ofany of the tyres is necessary, replace all of them.

CAUTIONl Always use tyres of the same size, same

type, and same brand, and which have nowear differences. Using tyres of differentsize, type, brands or degree of wear, willincrease the differential oil temperature,resulting in possible damage to the driv-ing system. Further, the drive train willbe subjected to excessive loading, possiblyleading to oil leakage, component seizure,or other serious faults.

Replacing tyres and wheelsE01007200038

CAUTIONl Avoid using different size tyres from the

one listed and the combined use of differ-ent types of tyres, as this can affect driv-ing safety.Refer to “Tyres and wheels” on page9-17.

CAUTIONl Even if a wheel has the same rim size and

offset as the specified type of wheel, itsshape may prevent it from being fitted cor-rectly. We recommend you to consult aspecialist before using wheels that youhave.

Tyre rotationE01001900990

Tyre wear varies with vehicle conditions, road sur-face conditions and individual driver’s driving hab-its. To equalize the wear and help extend tyre life,it is recommended to rotate the tyres immediatelyafter discovery of abnormal wear, or whenever thewear difference between the front and rear tyres isrecognizable.

Maintenance

8-12

8

When rotating tyres, check for uneven wear anddamage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incor-rect tyre pressure, improper wheel alignment, outof balance wheel, or severe braking. We recom-mend you to have it checked to determine thecause of irregular tread wear.

Spare tyre used*

Spare tyre not used

Front

Front

Front

Tyres that have arrows showing rotation direction

*- If the spare tyre wheel differs from the stand-ard tyre wheel, do not perform tyre rotation us-ing a spare wheel.

CAUTIONl If the tyres have arrows (A) indicating

the correct direction of rotation, swap thefront and rear wheels on the left handside of the vehicle and the front and rearwheels on the right hand side of the vehi-cle separately. Keep each tyre on its origi-nal side of the vehicle. When fitting thetyres, make sure the arrows point in thedirection in which the wheels will turnwhen the vehicle moves forward. Anytyre whose arrow points in the wrong di-rection will not perform to its full poten-tial.

Front

CAUTIONl Avoid the combined use of different types

of tyres.Using different types of tyres can affect ve-hicle performance and safety.

Snow tyresE01002000725

The use of snow tyres is recommended for drivingon snow and ice. To preserve driving stability,mount snow tyres of the same size and tread pat-tern on all 4 wheels.Snow tyres worn more than 50% are no longer suit-able for use as snow tyres.Snow tyres which do not meet specifications mustnot be used.

CAUTIONl Observe permissable maximum speed for

your snow tyres and the legal speed limit.

NOTEl The laws and regulations concerning snow

tyres (driving speed, required use, type, etc.)vary. Find out and follow the laws and regu-lations in the area you intend to drive.

l If flange nuts are used on your vehicle,change to tapered nuts when steel wheels areused.

Tyre chainsE01002101534

It is recommended that snow chains are carried insnow regions and fitted when required to the rearwheels.On 4WD vehicles in which the driving power is dis-tributed preferentially to the rear wheels, ensurethat the tyre chains are fitted on the rear.Use only tyre chains which are designed for usewith the tyres mounted on the vehicle: use of the in-correct size or type of chain could result in damageto the vehicle body.

Maintenance

8-13

8

Before fitting tyre chains, we recommend you toconsult a MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Serv-ice Point. The max. chain height is as follows.

Tyre size Wheel size Max. chainheight [mm]

195R15C 15x6.0 JJ

22

205R16C 16x6.0 JJ

205/80R16 16x6.0 JJ

245/70R16 16x7.0 J

245/65R17 17x7.5 J

The speed limit for tyre chain is 50 km/h (30 mph)and remove the tyre chains as soon as possible onsnow free roads.

WARNINGl DO NOT use a jack when fitting the

chains, as in thsee conditions, the tyresmay slip on the icy road causing the vehi-cle to slip off the jack.

CAUTIONl Practice fitting the chains before you

need them.Don’t expect help from other people inthe cold.

l Choose a clear straight stretch of roadwhere you can pull over and still be seenwhile you are fitting the chains.

l Do not fit chains before you need them.This will wear out your tyres and theroad surface.

CAUTIONl After driving around 100-300 metres,

stop and retighten the chains.l Drive carefully and do not exceed

50 km/h (30 mph). Remember, fittingchains is not going to stop accidents fromhappening.

l When tyre chains are installed, take carethat they do not damage the disc wheel orbody.

l An aluminium wheel can be damaged bya tyre chain while driving. When fitting atyre chain on an aluminium wheel, takecare that any part of the chain and fittingcannot be brought into contact with thewheel.

l When installing or removing the tyrechains, take care that hands and otherparts of your body are not injured by thesharp edges of the vehicle body.

l Install the chains only on the rear tyresand tighten them as tightly as possiblewith the ends securely fastened.

NOTEl The laws and regulations concerning the use

of tyre chains vary. Find out and follow thelaws and regulations of the area you’re driv-ing in.In most countries, it is prohibited by law touse tyre chains on roads without snow.

Clutch pedal free play*E01002200222

Press down the clutch pedal with your fingers untilinitial resistance is felt.This distance should be within the specified range.

A- Free play: 4 to13 mm

If the clutch pedal free play is not within the stand-ard range, we recommend you to have it checked.

Maintenance

8-14

8

Brake pedal free playE01002300281

Stop the engine, depress the brake pedal severaltimes, and press down the pedal with your fingersuntil initial resistance is felt. This distance shouldbe within the specified range.

A- Free play: 3 to 8 mm

If the brake pedal free play is not within the stand-ard range, we recommend you to have it checked.

Parking brake lever strokeE01002400442

Pull the parking brake lever up to check the num-ber of “clicks” that the ratchet makes. One click rep-resents a lever movement of one notch. The levershould move the specified number of notches fornormal brake application.

Type 1

A

Type 2 (LHD)Type 2 (LHD)

Type 2 (RHD)Type 2 (RHD)

A- Parking brake lever strokeType 1 8 to 9 notchesType 2 11 to 13 notches

(Parking brake adjustment when pulled withthe force of 200 N)

If the parking brake lever stroke is out of the stand-ard range, we recommend you to have it checked.

WARNINGl Continued operation of the vehicle with

the parking brake lever out of adjust-ment may result in the vehicle movingwhen unattended.

Maintenance

8-15

8

Wiper bladesE01002600385

When lifting the wiper arms off the windscreen,first raise the driver’s side wiper arm and then thepassenger’s side wiper arm.When returning them to their original positions,first put the passenger’s side wiper arm back inplace and then the driver’s side wiper arm.If the blades are frozen to the windscreen, do notoperate the wipers until the ice has melted and theblades are freed, otherwise the wiper motor may bedamaged.

Wiper blade rubber replacement

Driver’s side1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) dis-

engages from the hook (B). Then, pull thewiper blade further to remove it.

NOTEl Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the

windscreen; it could damage the glass.

3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper blade.

For LHD vehicles refer to the illustration toensure that the retainers are correctly alignedas you attach them.

LHD

RHD

4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, startingwith the opposite end of the blade from thestopper. Make sure the hook (B) is fitted cor-rectly in the grooves in the blade.

NOTEl If retainers are not supplied with the new wip-

er blade, use the retainers from the old blade.

5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) en-gages securely with the stopper (A).

Passenger’s side1. Lift the wiper arm off the windscreen.2. Pull the wiper blade until its stopper (A) dis-

engages from the hook (B). Then, pull thewiper blade further to remove it.

Maintenance

8-16

8

NOTEl Do not allow the wiper arm to fall onto the

windscreen; it could damage the glass.

3. Attach the retainers (C) to a new wiper blade.Refer to the illustration to ensure that the re-tainers are correctly aligned as you attachthem.

4. Insert the wiper blade into the arm, startingwith the opposite end of the blade from thestopper. Make sure the hook (B) is fitted cor-rectly in the grooves in the blade.

NOTEl If retainers are not supplied with the new wip-

er blade, use the retainers from the old blade.

5. Push the wiper blade until the hook (B) en-gages securely with the stopper (A).

General maintenanceE01002700113

Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaustgas leakageLook under the body of your vehicle to check forfuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaust gas leaks.

WARNINGl If you see a suspicious fuel leak or if you

smell fuel, do not operate the vehicle; werecommend you to call for assistance.

Exterior and interior lamp operationOperate the combination lamp switch to check thatall lamps are functioning properly.If the lamps do not illuminate, the probable causeis a blown fuse or defective lamp bulb. Check thefuses first. If there is no blown fuses, check thelamp bulbs.For information regarding the inspection and re-placement of the fuses and the lamp bulbs, refer to“Fuses” on page 8-19 and “Replacement of lampbulbs” on page 8-22.If the fuses and bulbs are all OK, we recommendyou to have your vehicle checked and repaired.

Meter, gauge and indicator/warninglamps operationRun the engine to check the operation of all meters,gauges, and indicator/warning lamps.If there is anything wrong, we recommend you tohave your vehicle inspected.

Maintenance

8-17

8

Hinges and latches lubricationCheck all latches and hinges, and lubricate if neces-sary by first cleaning and then applying multipur-pose grease.

For cold and snowy weatherE01002800257

Ventilation slotsThe ventilation slots in front of the windscreenshould be kept clear of leaves or brushed clear afterheavy snowfall, so that the operation of the heatingand ventilation systems will not be impaired.

WeatherstrippingTo prevent freezing of the weatherstripping on thedoors, bonnet, etc., they should be treated with sili-cone grease or spray.

Additional equipmentIt is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-han-dled spade in the vehicle during the winter so thatyou can clear away snow if you get stranded. Asmall hand-brush for sweeping snow off the vehi-cle and a plastic scraper for the windscreen andrear window are also useful.

Fusible linksE01002900030

The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if alarge current attempts to flow through certain elec-trical systems.In case of a melted fusible link, we recommendyou to have your vehicle inspected.

Maintenance

8-18

8

FusesE01003000849

Fuse block locationE01007600032

To prevent damage to the electrical system due toshortcircuiting or overloading, each individual cir-cuit is provided with a fuse.There are fuse blocks in the passenger compart-ment and in the engine compartment.

Passenger compartmentThe fuse block in the passenger compartment is lo-cated in front of the driver’s seat at the positionshown in the illustration.

LHD

RHD

Engine compartmentIn the engine compartment, the fuse block is loca-ted as shown in the illustration.

1- Push the knob.2- Remove the cover.

Fuse load capacityE01007700033

The fuse capacity and the name of the electrical sys-tems protected by the fuses are indicated on the in-side of the fuse lid located at the driver’s leg areaand on the inside of the fuse block cover for fuseslocated in the engine compartment.

Passenger compartment fuse location tableE01007900501

NOTEl Spare fuses are contained in the fuse lid. Al-

ways use a fuse of the same capacity for re-placement.

Passenger compartment fuse location (LHD)

Maintenance

8-19

8

Passenger compartment fuse location (RHD)

No. Symbol Electrical system Ca-pacity

1 Tail lamp (left) 7.5 A

2 Cigarette lighter 15 A

3 Ignition coil 10 A

4 Starter motor 7.5 A

5 Sunroof 20 A

6 Accessory socket 15 A


7 Tail lamp (right) 7.5 A

8 Outside rear-view mirrors 7.5 A

9 Engine control unit 7.5 A

10 Control unit 7.5 A

11 Rear fog lamp 10 A

12 Central door lock 15 A

13 Room lamp 10 A

14 Rear window wiper 15 A

15 Gauge 7.5 A

16 Relay 7.5 A

17 Heated seat 20 A

18 Option 10 A

19 Heated door mirror 7.5 A

20 Windscreen wiper 20 A

21 Reversing lamps 7.5 A

22 Demister 30 A

23 Heater 30 A

24 Power seat 40 A

25 Radio 10 A


26 Electronic controlled unit 15 A

27 — Spare fuse 7.5 A

28 — Spare fuse 20 A

29 — Spare fuse 30 A

l Some fuses may not be installed on your ve-hicle, depending on the vehicle model or spec-ifications.

l The table above shows the main equipmentcorresponding to each fuse.The fuse block does not contain spare 10 Aand 15 A fuses. If a fuse of one of these ca-pacities blows, replace it temporarily by bor-rowing the one that matches from:10 A: Radio15 A: Cigarette lighterReplace the borrowed fuse as soon as possible.

Maintenance

8-20

8

Engine compartment fuse location tableE01008000583

Engine compartment fuse location

Front


1 — — —

2 Electric window system 40 A

3 Ignition switch 40 A

4 Air conditioning compres-sor 10 A

5 Condenser fan motor 20 A


6 Headlamp high-beam(left) 10 A

7 Headlamp high-beam(right) 10 A

8 Headlamp low beam (left) 10 A

9 Headlamp low beam(right) 10 A

10 Engine control 20 A

11 Alternator 7.5 A

12 Stop lamps 15 A

13 Horn 10 A

14 Automatic transmission 20 A

15 Hazard warning flasher 10 A

16 Fuel pump 15 A

17 Front fog lamps 15 A

18 Audio amp 20 A

l Some fuses may not be installed on your ve-hicle, depending on the vehicle model or spec-ifications.

l The table above shows the main equipmentcorresponding to each fuse.

Identification of fuseE01008100308

Capacity Colour

7.5 A Brown

10 A Red

15 A Blue

20 A Yellow

30 A Green (fuse type)/Pink (fusible link type)

40 A Green (fusible link type)

Fuse replacementE01007800281

1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off theelectrical circuit concerned and place the ig-nition switch in the “LOCK” position.

2. Pull the fuse lid (A) to remove it.3. Remove the fuse puller (B) from the fuse lid

(A).

LHD

Maintenance

8-21

8

RHD

4. Referring to the fuse load capacity table,check the fuse pertaining to the problem.

C- Fuse is OKD- Blown fuse

NOTEl If any system does not function but the fuse

corresponding to that system is normal, theremay be a fault in the system elsewhere. Werecommend you to have your vehicle checked.

5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity by us-ing the fuse puller and insert the fuse at thesame place in the fuse block.

CAUTIONl If the newly inserted fuse blows again af-

ter a short time, we recommend you tohave the electrical system checked to findthe cause and rectify it.

l Never use a fuse with a capacity largerthan that specified or any substitute, suchas wire, foil, etc.; doing so will cause thecircuit wiring to heat up and could causea fire.

Replacement of lamp bulbsE01003100710

Before replacing a bulb, ensure the lamp is off. Donot touch the glass part of the new bulb with yourbare fingers; the skin oil left on the glass will evap-orate when the bulb gets hot and the vapour willcondense on the reflector and dim the surface.

CAUTIONl Bulbs are extremely hot immediately af-

ter being turned off.When replacing a bulb, wait for it to coolsufficiently before touching it. You couldotherwise be burnt.

NOTEl If you are unsure of how to carry out the

work as required, we recommend you to con-sult a specialist.

l Be careful not to scratch the vehicle bodywhen removing a lamp or lens.

l When it rains or when the vehicle has beenwashed, the inside of the lens sometimes be-comes foggy. This is the same phenomenonas when window glass mists up on a humidday, and does not indicate a functional prob-lem. When the lamp is switched on, the heatwill remove the fog. However, if water gath-ers inside the lamp, we recommend you tohave the lamp checked.

Bulb capacityE01003200085

When replacing a bulb, use a new bulb with thesame wattage and colour.

Maintenance

8-22

8

OutsideE01003302295

Front (Type 1)

1- Headlamps, high-beam: 60 W (HB3)2- Headlamps, low beam: 55 W (H11)3- Position lamps: 5 W (W5W)4- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W)5- Side turn-signal lamps: 5 W (WY5W)6- Front fog lamps: 55W (H11)

Front (Type 2)

1- Headlamps, high/low beam: 60/55 W (H4)2- Position lamps: 5 W (W5W)3- Front turn-signal lamps: 21 W (PY21W)

4- Side turn-signal lamps: 5 W (WY5W)5- Front fog lamps*: 55 W (H11)

Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.

Rear

Type 1 Type 2

6- High-mounted stop lamp: 5 W (W5W)7- Rear turn-signal lamps: 16 W (W16W)8- Tail and stop lamps: 21/5 W (P21/5W)9- Reversing lamps: 16 W (W16W)10- Rear fog lamp (Type 1, Driver’s side only):

21 W (P21W)11- Rear fog lamp (Type 2, Driver’s side only):

21 W (W21W)

12- Licence plate lamps: 5 W (W5W) Codes in parentheses indicate bulb types.

InsideE01003401518

Single cab

1- Door courtesy lamps*: 3.4 W2- Room lamp: 8 W3- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W 4- Centre console downlight: 1.4 W

Maintenance

8-23

8

Club cab

1- Door courtesy lamps*: 3.4 W2- Front room lamp and personal lamps*:

7.5 W3- Rear room lamp: 8 W 4- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W5- Centre console downlight: 1.4 W

Double cab

1- Door courtesy lamps*: 3.4 W2- Front room lamp and personal lamps: 7.5 W3- Rear room lamp*: 8 W4- Glove box lamp: 1.4 W5- Centre console downlight: 1.4 W

HeadlampsE01003501375

Type 11. Remove the bulb and connector assembly

(A) by turning it anticlockwise.

High beam

Low beam

2. Depress the tab (B) on the harness connectorand pull the harness connector (C) to removeit.

High beam Low beam

3. To install the bulb, perform the removalsteps in reverse.

CAUTIONl Handle halogen lamp bulbs with care.

The gas inside halogen lamp bulbs is high-ly pressurized, so dropping, knocking, orscratching a halogen lamp bulb can causeit to shatter.

l Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with abare hand, dirty glove, etc.The oil from your hand could cause thebulb to break the next time the head-lamps are operated.If the glass surface is dirty, it must becleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc.,and refit it after drying it thoroughly.

Maintenance

8-24

8

Type 21. Disconnect the connector (A).

2. Remove the sealing cover (B).

3. Unhook the spring (C) which secures thebulb, and then remove the headlamp bulb.




l Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with abare hand, dirty glove, etc.The oil from your hand could cause thebulb to break the next time the head-lamps are operated.If the glass surface is dirty, it must becleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc.,and refit it after drying it thoroughly.

Maintenance

8-25

8

Position lampsE01003700833

Type 11. Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise to re-

move it. And remove the bulb from the sock-et by pulling out.



move it. And remove the bulb from the sock-et by pulling out.


Front turn-signal lampsE01003800818


move it. And remove the bulb from the sock-

et by turning it anticlockwise while pressingin.



move it. And remove the bulb from the sock-et by turning it anticlockwise while pressingin.

Maintenance

8-26

8


Side turn-signal lampsE01003900037

1. To remove a side turn-signal lamp, insert astraight blade (or minus) screwdriver at theend of the lamp nearer the front of the bodyand use it to gently lever the lamp out of thebody.

Front

NOTEl Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the

screwdriver in order to avoid scratching thelens and the body.

2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly togeth-er by turning it anticlockwise, and then re-move the bulb by pulling out.


NOTEl When replacing the lamp assembly, push in

the end facing the rear of the vehicle first.

Front

Front fog lamps*E01004001410

1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriverwith a cloth over its tip at the edge of the cov-er and pry gently to remove the cover.

Type 1

Type 2

Maintenance

8-27

8

2. Turn the 3 bolts (A) anticlockwise to removethem. And then remove the lamp assembly.

3. Depress the tab (B) on the harness connectorand pull the harness connector (C) to removeit.

4. Turn the entire socket and bulb assembly (D)anticlockwise to remove it.




l Never hold the halogen lamp bulb with abare hand, dirty glove, etc.The oil from your hand could cause thebulb to break the next time the fog lampsare operated.If the glass surface is dirty, it must becleaned with alcohol, paint thinner, etc.,and refit it after drying thoroughly.

Rear fog lampE01004100384

Type 1 (Driver’s side only)1. Remove the screws (A) from the rear fog

lamp lens, and then remove the lens (B).

Maintenance

8-28

8

2. Remove the bulb (C) by turning it anticlock-wise while pressing it inward.


Type 2 (Driver’s side only)1. Remove the socket and bulb assemblies by

turning it anticlockwise, and then remove thebulb by pulling out.


Rear combination lampsE01004200763

1. Open the rear gate.(Refer to “Rear gate” on page 1-13.)

2. Remove the screws (A) that hold the lamp unit.

3. Move the lamp unit towards the rear of the ve-hicle and remove the clips (B).

4. Remove each socket and bulb assembly byturning it anticlockwise.

C- Rear turn-signal lampRemove the bulb by pulling it out.

D- Tail and stop lampRemove the bulb from the socket by turn-ing it anticlockwise while pressing in.

E- Reversing lampRemove the bulb by pulling it out.


NOTEl When mounting the lamp unit, align the pins

(F) and clip (G) on the lamp unit with theholes (H) in the body.

Maintenance

8-29

8

High-mounted stop lampE01004500577

1. Open the rear gate.(Refer to “Rear gate” on page 1-13.)

2. Remove the 8 screws (A) from the inner sur-face of the rear gate. Remove the rear gatecover (B).

3. Remove the socket and bulb assembly togeth-er by turning it anticlockwise, and then re-move the bulb by pulling it out.


Licence plate lampsE01004600578

1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriverinto the lamp assembly and pry gently to re-move it.


screwdriver in order to avoid scratching thelens and the body.

2. Remove the socket and bulb assembly togeth-er by turning it anticlockwise, and then re-move the bulb by pulling out.


NOTEl When mounting the lamp unit, put the hook

(A) on the right side of the lamp unit into thebody first.

Maintenance

8-30

8

Front room lamp and personal lamps*E01004700364

1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriverinto the notch of the lens and pry gently to re-move it.Remove the bulb from the lamp holder.


screwdriver in order to avoid scratching thelens.


NOTEl When installing the lens, align the 2 tabs on

the lens with the holes on the vehicle side.

Rear room lamp*E01004900119

Type 11. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriver

into the notch of the lens and pry gently to re-move it. Remove the bulb from the lamp hold-er.




NOTEl When installing the lens, fit the two tabs on

one side of the lens into the holes on the vehi-cle side before fitting the two tabs on the op-posite side of the lens into the holes on the ve-hicle side.


into the notch of the lens and pry gently to re-move it. Remove the bulb from the lamp hold-er.

Maintenance

8-31

8






Door courtesy lamps*E01005400238

1. Insert a straight blade (or minus) screwdriverinto the lens and pry gently to remove it. Re-move the bulb from the lamp holder.






Glove box lampE01006100069

We recommend you to have the glove box lamp re-placed by a specialist.

Centre console downlightE01008700144

Type 1 Type 2

Maintenance

8-32

8

Type 1We recommend you to have the centre consoledownlight replaced by a specialist.


with a cloth over its tip at edge of the garnish(A) and pry gently to remove it.

2. Turn the bulb socket (B) anticlockwise to re-move it.

3. Remove the bulb by pulling out.


Maintenance

8-33

8

Vehicle labeling............................................................................9-02Vehicle dimensions.......................................................................9-03Vehicle performance.....................................................................9-09Vehicle weight..............................................................................9-10Engine specifications....................................................................9-14Transmission specifications..........................................................9-15Electrical system...........................................................................9-16Tyres and wheels..........................................................................9-17Other specifications......................................................................9-18Fuel consumption.........................................................................9-19Refill capacities............................................................................9-21

Specifications

9

Vehicle labelingE01100101791

Vehicle identification numberThe vehicle identification number is stamped asshown in the illustration.

Vehicle information code plateThe vehicle information code plate is located asshown in the illustration.

The plate shows model code and engine model,transmission model and body colour code, etc.

Please use this number when ordering replacementparts.

1- Model code2- Engine model code3- Transmission model code4- Body colour code5- Interior code6- Option code

Vehicle identification number plate(RHD vehicles only)The vehicle identification number is stamped onthe plate riveted to the left front corner of the instru-ment panel pad. It is visible from outside of the ve-hicle through the windscreen.

Engine numberThe engine number is stamped on the engine cylin-der block as shown in the illustration.

Specifications

9-02

9

Vehicle dimensionsE01100201981

Single cab

Specifications

9-03

9

Single cab

1 Front track 1,505 mm

2 Overall width 1,750 mm

3 Front overhang 830 mm

4 Wheel base 3,000 mm

5 Rear overhang 1,210 mm

6 Overall length 5,040 mm

7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm

8 Overall height (unladen) 1,775 mm

9 Rear track 1,500 mm

10 Cargo bed length 2,220 mm

11 Cargo bed width 1,470 mm

12 Cargo bed height 845 mm

Specifications

9-04

9

Club cab

Specifications

9-05

9

Club cab

Item Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD

1 Front track 1,505 mm 1,520 mm

2 Overall width 1,750 mm 1,800 mm

3 Front overhang 795 mm, 830 mm*1


5Rear overhang

Without rear bumper 1,325 mm

With rear bumper 1,400 mm

6 Overall lengthWithout rear bumper 5,120 mm, 5,155 mm*1

With rear bumper 5,195 mm, 5,230 mm*1

7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm 205 mm

8 Overall height (unladen) 1,775 mm 1,780 mm

9 Rear track 1,500 mm 1,515 mm

10 Cargo bed length 1,805 mm


12 Cargo bed height 855 mm 860 mm*1: Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine

Specifications

9-06

9

Double cab

Specifications

9-07

9

Double cab

Item 2WD and Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD

1 Front track 1,505 mm 1,520 mm

2 Overall width 1,750 mm 1,800 mm

3 Front overhang 795 mm, 830 mm*1


5Rear overhang

Without rear bumper 1,210 mm, 1,390 mm*2

With rear bumper 1,285 mm, 1,465 mm*2

6Overall length

Without rear bumper 5,005 mm, 5,185 mm*2, 5,040 mm*1, 5,220 mm*3

With rear bumper 5,080 mm, 5,260 mm*2, 5,115 mm*1, 5,295 mm*3

7 Ground clearance (unladen) 200 mm 205 mm

8 Overall height (unladen) 1,775 mm 1,780 mm

9 Rear track 1,500 mm 1,515 mm

10 Cargo bed length 1,325 mm, 1,505 mm*


12 Cargo bed height 845 mm 850 mm*1: Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine*2: Vehicles with long bed*3: Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine with long bed

Specifications

9-08

9

Vehicle performanceE01100301751

Item M/T A/T

Maximum speedVehicles with standard power engine 167 km/h (104 mph) 165 km/h (102 mph)

Vehicles with high power engine 179 km/h (111 mph) 175 km/h (109 mph)

Minimum turning radiusBody 6.3 m, 6.1 m*

Wheel 5.9 m, 5.7 m*

*: 2WD vehicles with 15 inch tyres

Specifications

9-09

9

Vehicle weightE01100402179

Single cab

Item 2WD4WD

LHD RHD

Kerb weightWithout optional parts 1,555 kg 1,770 kg

With full optional parts 1,585 kg 1,830 kg, 1,835 kg *1 1,810 kg

Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,630 kg 2,850 kg 2,890 kg

Maximum axle weightFront 1,030 kg 1,260 kg

Rear 1,700 kg 1,800 kg

Maximum towable weightWith brake 1,800 kg 2,700 kg

Without brake 750 kg

Maximum trailer-nose weight 77 kg 115 kg

Maximum gross combination weight 4,400 kg 5,500 kg 5,540 kg

Seating capacity (including a driver) 2 persons, 3 persons *2

*1: Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine*2: Vehicles equipped with bench seat

NOTEl Trailer specifications indicate the manufacturer’s recommendation.l When loading luggage and/or towing a trailer, make sure not to exceed any of the above maximum weights all the time.

Club cab

ItemEasy select 4WD Super select 4WD

LHD RHD LHD RHD

Kerb weightWithout optional parts 1,790 kg, 1,800 kg* 1,805 kg, 1,815 kg*

With full optional parts 1,885 kg, 1,870 kg* 1,865 kg, 1,855 kg* 1,895 kg, 1,905 kg* 1,880 kg, 1,890 kg*

Specifications

9-10

9

ItemEasy select 4WD Super select 4WD

LHD RHD LHD RHD

Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,850 kg 2,850 kg,2,860 kg*

Maximum axle weightFront 1,260 kg

Rear 1,800 kg

Maximum towable weightWith brake 2,700 kg


Maximum trailer-nose weight 115 kg

Maximum gross combination weight 5,500 kg 5,500 kg,5,510 kg*

Seating capacity (including a driver) 4 persons

*: Vehicles with high power engine


Double cab

Item

2WD

M/TA/T

Vehicles with 15 inch tyres Vehicles with 16 inch tyres

Kerb weightWithout optional parts 1,655 kg 1,760 kg 1,770 kg

With full optional parts 1,725 kg 1,890 kg 1,900 kg

Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,630 kg 2,800 kg

Maximum axle weightFront 1,030 kg 1,260 kg

Rear 1,700 kg 1,800 kg

Specifications

9-11

9

Item

2WD

M/TA/T

Vehicles with 15 inch tyres Vehicles with 16 inch tyres

Maximum towable weightWith brake 1,800 kg 2,700 kg


Maximum trailer-nose weight 75 kg 112 kg

Maximum gross combination weight 4,400 kg 5,465 kg

Seating capacity (including a driver) 5 persons


Item

4WD

Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD

M/TA/T

M/T A/T

LHD RHD LHD RHD LHD RHD

Kerb weight

Without optional parts 1,860 kg,1,870 kg *1

1,840 kg,1,850 kg *1 1,870 kg 1,880 kg,

1,890 kg *11,865 kg,

1,875 kg *11,890 kg,

1,905 kg *11,875 kg,

1,890 kg *1

With full optional parts1,990 kg,

1,985 kg, *1

1,980 kg *2

1,970 kg,1,960 kg *1 2,000 kg

2,020 kg,2,030 kg, *1

2,010 kg *2

2,010 kg,2,020 kg *1

2,015 kg,2,030 kg *1

2,020 kg *2

2,020 kg,2,035 kg *1

Maximum gross vehicle weight 2,850 kg 2,890 kg,2,895 kg *1 2,850 kg 2,910 kg,

2,920 kg *1 2,850 kg 2,920 kg,2,935 kg *1

Maximum axle weightFront 1,260 kg

Rear 1,800 kg*1: Vehicles with high power engine*2: Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine

Specifications

9-12

9

Item

4WD

Easy select 4WD Super select 4WD

M/TA/T

M/T A/T

LHD RHD LHD RHD LHD RHD

Maximum towable weightWith brake 2,700 kg


Maximum trailer-nose weight 115 kg

Maximum gross combination weight 5,500 kg 5,540 kg,5,545 kg *1 5,500 kg 5,560 kg,

5,570 kg *1 5,500 kg 5,570 kg,5,585 kg*1

Seating capacity (including a driver) 5 persons*1: Vehicles with high power engine*2: Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine


Specifications

9-13

9

Engine specificationsE01100602171

ItemStandard power engine High power engine

M/T A/T2WD with 15 inch tyres 2WD with 16 inch tyres, 4WD

Engine type

Four-cylinder, in line, watercooled four-cycle, doubleoverhead camshaft with

small-sized intercooler andturbocharger

Four-cylinder, in line, water cooled four-cycle, double overhead camshaft with intercoolerand turbocharger

Engine models 4D56Total displacement 2,477 ccBore 91.1 mmStroke 95.0 mm

Compression ratio 17.0:1 16.5:1

Valve clearanceIntake 0.09 mm (cold)

Exhaust 0.14 mm (cold)

Maximum output (EEC net) 94 kW/4,000 r/min 100 kW/4,000 r/min,100 kW/3,500 r/min* 131 kW/4,000 r/min

Maximum torque (EEC net) 240 Nm/1,500 to 3,500 r/min 314 Nm/2,000 r/min 400 Nm/2,000 to 2,850 r/min 350 Nm/1,800 to 3,500 r/min

*: Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine.

Specifications

9-14

9

Transmission specificationsE01100701364

Item

M/T A/T

2WD 4WD

2WD

4WD

Vehicleswith 15

inch tyres

Vehicleswith 16

inch tyres

Easy select 4WD Super select 4WDEasy se-lect 4WD

Super select 4WD

High pow-er engine

Standardpower en-

gine

High pow-er engine

Standardpower en-

gine4A/T 5A/T

Transmission

1st gear ratio 4.313 2.842 3.789

2nd gear ratio 2.330 1.495 2.057

3rd gear ratio 1.436 1.000 1.421

4th gear ratio 1.000 0.731 1.000

5th gear ratio 0.788 — 0.731

Reverse gear ratio 4.220 2.720 3.865

TransferHigh gear ratio — 1.000 — 1.000 1.000

Low gear ratio — 1.900 — 1.900 1.900

Final gear ratio 3.909 3.917 3.692 3.917 3.917 4.100 3.917 3.917 4.100 3.917

Specifications

9-15

9

Electrical systemE01100801769

Voltage 12 V

BatteryType (JIS) 95D31L 80D26L*

Capacity (5HR) 64 Ah 55 Ah*

Alternator capacity 90 A, 120 A*

*: Optional equipment

Specifications

9-16

9

Tyres and wheelsE01100902204

Tyre 195R15C 106/104R 8PR 205/80R16 104S RF,205R16C 110/108R 8PR 245/70R16 111S RF 245/65R17 111S RF

WheelSize 15x6JJ 16x6JJ 16x7J 17x7 1/2J

Offset 46 mm 38 mm

NOTEl Contact your MITSUBISHI MOTORS Authorized Service Point on the combination used on your vehicle.

Specifications

9-17

9

Other specificationsE01101000862

Fuel systemFuel control Direct injection common rail system

Fuel pump Electronic controlled rotary type

Clutch Dry single disc clutch with diaphragm spring, hydraulic action

Steering system Rack & pinion type, power assisted

SuspensionFront Independent type, wishbone, coil spring

Rear Rigid type, leaf spring

Service brakes

TypeVehicles without ABS Hydraulic, front and rear split double circuit system with power assistance

Vehicles with ABS Hydraulic, diagonal split double circuit system with power assistance

Front Ventilated disc brakes

Rear Drum brakes

Parking brakes Parking brake acts mechanically on rear wheels

Specifications

9-18

9

Fuel consumptionE01101100515

Vehicles with standard power engine

ItemCombined Urban conditions Extra-urban con-

ditions

CO2 (g/km) Fuel consumption(L/100 km)

Fuel consumption(L/100 km)


Single cab2WD 190 7.2 9.3 6.0

4WD 215, 221*1 8.1, 8.4*1 10.3, 10.6*1 6.9, 7.1*1

Club cabStandard 215, 221*1 8.1, 8.4*1 10.3, 10.6*1 6.9, 7.1*1

Full option 218, 224*1 8.3, 8.5*1 10.4, 10.7*1 7.1, 7.2*1

Double cab

2WD with 15 inch tyres 194 7.4 9.4 6.2

2WD with16 inch tyres

M/TStandard 215 8.1 10.3 6.9

Full option 218 8.3 10.4 7.1

A/TStandard 229 8.6 11.0 7.3

Full option 234 8.8 11.2 7.5

4WD

M/TStandard 218, 215*2, 224*1 8.3, 8.1*2, 8.5*1 10.4, 10.3*2,

10.7*17.1, 6.9*2, 7.2*1

Full option 223, 218*2, 229*1 8.5, 8.3*2, 8.7*1 10.5, 10.4*2,10.9*1

7.3, 7.1*2, 7.4*1

A/TStandard 234, 240*1 8.8, 9.0*1 11.2, 11.7*1 7.5

Full option 240, 260*1 9.1, 9.3*1 11.6, 12.1*1 7.6, 7.7*1

*1: Vehicles for Russia and Ukraine*2: RHD vehicles without wide fender

Specifications

9-19

9

Vehicles with high power engine

ItemCombined Urban conditions Extra-urban con-

ditions

CO2 (g/km) Fuel consumption(L/100 km)



Club cabStandard 212 8.0 9.6 7.1

Full option 214 8.1 9.7 7.2

Double cab

M/TStandard 214 8.1 9.7 7.2

Full option 218, 214* 8.3, 8.1* 9.8, 9.7* 7.4, 7.2*

A/TStandard 240 9.1 10.9 8.1

Full option 248 9.4 11.3 8.3*: RHD vehicles without wide fender

NOTEl The results given do not express or imply any guarantee of the fuel consumption of the particular vehicle.

The vehicle itself has not been tested and there are inevitably differences between individual vehicles of the same model. In addition, this vehicle may incor-porate particular modifications. Furthermore, the driver’s style and road and traffic conditions, as well as the extent to which the vehicle has been driven andthe standard of maintenance, will all affect its fuel consumption.

Specifications

9-20

9

Refill capacitiesE01101302827

LHD

RHD M/T A/T

M/T A/T

Specifications

9-21

9

No. Item Quantity Lubricants

1 Engine coolant8.2 litres

[includes 0.65 litre in thereserve tank]

DIA QUEEN SUPER LONG LIFECOOLANT or equivalent

2 Automatic transmission fluid 9.7 litres DIA QUEEN ATF SP III

3 Brake fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4

4 Clutch fluid As required Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4

5 Power steering fluid As required ATF DEXRON III or DEXRON II

6 Engine oil

Oil pan2WD with 15 inch tyres 6.5 litres

Refer to page 8-04.2WD with 16 inch tyres, 4WD 5.5 litres

Oil filter 0.8 litre

Oil cooler 0.1 litre

7 Washer fluid 4.8 litres,4.5 litres*1 —

8 Manual transmis-sion oil

2WD 2.3 litres Gear oil API classification GL-3 SAE75W-854WD 3.4 litres

9 Transfer oil 2.5 litresGear oil API classification GL-3 SAE75W-85 or Gear oil API classification

GL-4 SAE 75W-85

10 Differential oil

Front*2 1.2 litres

Gear oil API classification GL-5 orhigher SAE 80WRear

Standard power en-gine

2WD with 15 inch tyres 1.5 litres

2WD with 16 inch tyres, 4WD2.6 litres

High power engineA/T

M/T 3.2 litres

11 Refrigerant (air conditioning) 480-520 g,535-575 g*3 HFC-134a

*1: Vehicles with front (Type 1) (Refer to “Outside” on page 8-23)*2: 4WD vehicles only

Specifications

9-22

9

*3: Double cab with capacity up air conditioning

Specifications

9-23

9

44-wheel drive operation 4-37

AAccessory (Installation) 04Accessory socket 5-39Active Stability & Traction Control (ASTC) 4-45Additional equipment 8-18Air conditioning

Automatic air conditioning 5-08Important operation tips for the air condition-ing 5-12Manual air conditioning 5-04

Air purifier (with deodorizing function) 5-13Airbag 2-27Antenna 5-35Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 4-42

Warning lamp 4-43Armrest (Double cab) 2-07Ashtray 5-37Audio

Audio system anti-theft feature 5-33Error codes 5-31Handling of compact discs 5-33LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CDplayer 5-14Steering wheel remote control switch 5-29

Automatic air conditioning 5-08Automatic transmission 4A/T 4-15

Fluid 8-06,9-21Overdrive control switch 4-16Selector lever operation 4-15,4-19Selector lever position 4-16Selector lever position indicator 4-15

Automatic transmission Sports Mode 5A/T 4-19Fluid 8-06,9-21

Selector lever operation 4-19Selector lever position indicator 4-20Selector lever positions 4-20Sports mode 4-21Sports mode indicator 4-21

BBattery 8-09

Discharged battery (Emergency starting) 6-02Specification 9-16

Bleeding the fuel system 6-05Bonnet 8-03Bottle holder 5-46Brake

Anti-lock brake 4-42Braking 4-41Fluid 8-07,9-21Parking brake 4-05Parking brake lever stroke 8-15Pedal free play 8-15Warning lamp 3-08

CCargo loads 4-51Catalytic converter 8-02Cautions on handling of 4-wheel drive vehi-cles 4-39Central door locks 1-07Centre console downlight 5-42

Bulb capacity 8-23Replacement 8-33

Centre information display 3-10Changing a fuse 8-21Changing gears 4-13Check engine warning lamp 3-08Child restraint 2-13Child-protection rear doors 1-08

Cigarette lighter 5-38Cleaning

Exterior of your vehicle 7-03Genuine leather 7-02Interior of your vehicle 7-02Plastic, vinyl leather, etc 7-02Sunroof 7-05Waxing 7-04

Clock 5-40Clutch

Fluid 8-08,9-21Pedal free play 8-14

Coat hook 5-47Combination headlamps and dipper switch 3-30Convenient hook 5-47Coolant (engine) 8-05,9-21Cruise control 4-47

Switch 4-48Cup holder 5-45Curtain airbag system 2-35

DDemister (rear window) 3-40Differential oil 9-21Digital clock 5-40Dimensions 9-03Dipper (High/Low beam change) 3-31Door courtesy lamps 5-42

Replacement 8-32Doors

Central door locks 1-07Child-protection 1-08Lock and unlock 1-06

Driving, alcohol and drugs 4-02

EEasy select 4WD 4-24

Alphabetical index

1

Economical driving 4-02Electric window control 1-08

Switch 1-08Electrical system 9-16Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting sys-tem) 1-03Emergency starting 6-02Engine specifications 9-14Engine

Coolant 8-05,9-21Number 9-02Oil 8-04,9-21Overheating 6-04Specifications 9-14Used engine oils safety instructions and disposalinformation 05Water temperature gauge 3-05

Error codes 5-31Exterior and interior lamp operation 8-17

FFirst-aid kit and warning triangle band for secur-ing 5-47Floor console box 5-43Fluid

Automatic transmission fluid 8-06,9-21Brake fluid 8-07,9-21Clutch fluid 8-08,9-21Engine coolant 8-05,9-21Power steering fluid 8-09,9-21Washer fluid 8-07,9-21

For cold and snowy weather 8-18Front console box 5-43Front fog lamps

Bulb capacity 8-23Indication lamp 3-07Replacement 8-27Switch 3-35

Front room lampBulb capacity 8-24Replacement 8-31

Front seat 2-03Front turn-signal lamps


Fuel consumption 9-19Fuel

Filling the fuel tank 02Fuel filter indication lamp 3-07Fuel gauge 3-04Fuel selection 02Low fuel warning lamp 3-04Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuelsystems 04Tank capacity 02

Fuses 8-19Fusible links 8-18

GGauges 3-02General maintenance 8-17General vehicle data 9-03Genuine parts 05Glove box 5-43Glove box lamp


HHandling of compact discs 5-33Hazard warning flasher switch 3-34Hazard warning indication lamps 3-07Head restraints 2-08Headlamp levelling switch 3-32Headlamps

Bulb capacity 8-22,8-23Headlamp flasher 3-31Replacement 8-24Switch 3-30Washer switch 3-40

Heated mirror 4-09Heated seats 2-06Heater 5-04High-mounted stop lamp


Hinges and latches lubrication 8-18Hooks

Coat hook 5-47Convenient hook 5-47

Horn switch 3-41

IIf the vehicle breaks down 6-02Ignition switch 4-10Indication and warning lamps 3-06Indication lamps 3-07Inside rear-view mirror 4-08Inspection and maintenance following rough roadoperation 4-39Installation of accessories 04Instruments 3-02Interior lamps 5-40

JJack handle 6-12

Storage 6-07Jacking up the vehicle 6-13Jack

Storage 6-07Jump starting (Emergency starting) 6-02

Alphabetical index

2

KKeyless entry system 1-04Keys 1-02

LLabeling 9-02Lamp monitor buzzer 3-31Lamps (headlamps, fog lamp, etc.) auto-cutout func-tion 3-31Leakage (Fuel, engine coolant, oil and exhaustgas) 8-17Licence plate lamps


Limited-slip differential (LSD) 4-41Low fuel warning lamp 3-04Lubricants 9-21LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CD play-er 5-14

MManual transmission 4-13

Oil 9-21Manual window control 1-08Mirror

Inside rear-view mirror 4-08Outside rear-view mirrors 4-08Vanity mirror 5-37

Modification/alterations to the electrical or fuel sys-tems 04

OOdometer 3-03Oil

Differential oil 9-21Engine oil 8-04,9-21Manual transmission fluid 9-21Transfer oil 9-21

Operation under adverse driving conditions 6-24Other specifications 9-18Outside rear-view mirrors 4-08Overheating 6-04

PParking 4-06

Parking brake 4-05Parking brake lever stroke 8-15

Personal lamps 5-41Replacement 8-31

Position lampsBulb capacity 8-23Replacement 8-26

Power steeringFluid 8-09,9-21System 4-44

Precautions to observe when using wipers and wash-ers 3-40Pregnant women restraint 2-11Puncture (Tyre changing) 6-17

RRadio

LW/MW/FM electronic tuning radio with CDplayer 5-14

Rear combination lampsBulb capacity 8-23Replacement 8-29

Rear differential lock 4-33Rear fog lamp

Bulb capacity 8-23Indication lamp 3-07

Replacement 8-28Switch 3-35

Rear room lamp 5-40Bulb capacity 8-24Replacement 8-31

Rear seat 2-07Rear side/quarter window 1-12Rear turn-signal lamps


Rear window demister switch 3-40Rear-view mirror

Inside 4-08Outside 4-08

Refill capacities 9-21Removal of water from the fuel filter 6-06Replacement of lamp bulbs 8-22Reversing lamps


Room lamp 5-40,5-41Running-in recommendations 4-03

SSafe driving techniques 4-03Seat belt 2-09

Adjustable seat belt anchor 2-11Child restraint 2-13Inspection 2-27Pregnant women restraint 2-11Pretensioner 2-12Seat belt reminder/warning lamp 2-10

Seat under tray 5-45Seat

Adjustment 2-03Armrest (Double cab) 2-07Front seat 2-03Head restraints 2-08

Alphabetical index

3

Heated seats 2-06Rear seat 2-07

Secret box 5-44Service precaution 8-02Side airbag system 2-35Side turn-signal lamps


Snow tyres 8-13Spare wheel 6-16Spark plug 9-16Specifications 9-02Speedometer 3-03Starting 4-11Steering

Power steering fluid 8-09,9-21Power steering system 4-44Steering wheel height adjustment 4-07Steering wheel lock 4-11Steering wheel remote control switch 5-29

Stop lampsBulb capacity 8-22Replacement 8-29

Storage spaces 5-42Sun visors 5-36Sunglasses holder 5-44Sunroof 1-14

Safety mechanism 1-14Sunshade 1-14Switch 1-14

Super select 4WD 4-28Supplemental restraint system 2-27

How the Supplemental Restraint Systemworks 2-29Servicing 2-39Warning lamp 2-38

TTachometer 3-03Tail lamps


Tank capacity 02Ticket holder 5-36Tools 6-09

Storage 6-07Towing 6-20Trailer towing 4-52Transfer oil 9-21Transmission

Automatic transmission 4A/T 4-15Automatic transmission Sports Mode 5A/T 4-19Fluid 8-06,9-21Manual transmission 4-13Specifications 9-15

Tripmeter 3-03Turn-signal indication lamps 3-07Turn-signals lever 3-33Tyres 8-10

How to change a tyre 6-17Inflation pressures 8-11Rotation 8-12Size (tyre and wheel) 9-17Snow tyres 8-13Tyre chains 8-13Wheel condition 8-12

UUsed engine oils safety instructions and disposal in-formation 05Utility box 5-44

VVanity mirror 5-37Vehicle care precautions 7-02Vehicle dimensions 9-03Vehicle identification number 9-02Vehicle identification number plate 9-02Vehicle information code plate 9-02Vehicle labeling 9-02Vehicle performance 9-09Vehicle weight 9-10Ventilators 5-02

WWarning lamps 3-08Washer

Fluid 8-07,9-21Switch 3-36,3-40

Washing 7-03Water temperature gauge 3-05Waxing 7-04Weatherstripping 8-18Weight 9-10Wheel condition 8-12Wheel

Specification 9-17Wiper

Switch 3-36Wiper blade rubber replacement 8-16Wiper blades 8-16

Alphabetical index

4

l200 - english - ocre10e1 - מיצובישי mitsubishi

Documents